MXM363N-M453N-M503N SM GB

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM503/S1E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-M363N
MX-M453N
MODEL MX-M503N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA [J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[L] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[11] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 12-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[13] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [A] EXTERIOR

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .B-1
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, [C] DSPF SECTION
the developing unit, and the fusing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . C-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[D] SCANNER SECTION
2. Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . D-1
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .E-1
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-5
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .F-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[G] LSU SECTION
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
[5] SIMULATION 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
4. Paper JAM code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . J-1
[8] MAINTENANCE 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION
2. Contents of the maintenance codes
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .K-1
(Relationship between various counters values and
display messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works . . . . . . . . 8-4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING [L] FUSING SECTION

1. HDD partition and data contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . L-1
2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
3. Counter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[11] SPECIFICATIONS [N] DRIVE SECTION
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION [O] PWB SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 [P] FAN SECTION
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[13] TOOL LIST [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Exclusive-use tools list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
NOTE
MX-M503N
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting
Service Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
• Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, • Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING 2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only) It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
result.
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
grounding must be made.
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
11-13/16"
(30cm) • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. kinds.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These kinds are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the kinds of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operatable.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or when a special care is required, the details are
described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper-
a case.
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the
eyes. NOTE: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten
performed, safety may not be assured. securely to avoid loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
oping unit, strictly observe the following items.
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10
(Plate thickness
sheets of paper to cover it.)
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
(Plate thickness
eign material on the transfer roller.
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit) M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. System configuration
Paper exit system
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
10 MX-SCX1
EXIT TRAY UNIT
4 MX-TRX2
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

FINISHER
5 MX-FNX9 MX-M363N Paper feed system
PUNCH MODULE
MX-M453N
8 MX-PNX1 MX-M503N
A/B/C/D
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
10 MX-SCX1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
3 MX-LCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
11 AR-SC3 (For saddle)
PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER
7 MX-FN10
PUNCH MODULE
9 MX-PNX5
STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
A/B/C/D PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
1 MX-DEX8 2 MX-DEX9
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
14 AR-SC2 PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE
12 MX-FN11 13 MX-PNX6
A/B/C/D
Printer expansion Image send expansion
PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT

15 MX-PKX1 17 AR-PF1 FACSIMILE INTERNET FAX APPLICATION
EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT EXPANSION KIT INTEGRATION MODULE
XPS EXPANSION KIT

18 MX-FXX2 19 AR-SU1 21 MX-FWX1 23 MX-AMX1
16 MX-PUX1 ENHANCED
STAMP CARTRIDGE COMPRESSION KIT
20 AR-SV1 22 MX-EBX3
Authentication/Security Application/Solution
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

DATA SECURITY KIT 1 LICENSE KIT 50 LICENSE KIT COMMUNICATION MODULE KEYBOARD
24 MX-FR14U 25 MX-USX1 28 MX-US50 30 MX-AMX2 32 MX-KBX2
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK EXTERNAL
5 LICENSE KIT
Memory 26 MX-USX5
100 LICENSE KIT
29 MX-USA0
ACCOUNT MODULE
31 MX-AMX3
EXPANSION
SHARPDESK
MEMORY BOARD
10 LICENSE KIT
33 MX-SMX3 27 MX-US10
MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Machine configuration
MX-M363N/MX-M453N/MX-M503N
Copier STD
PCL printer STD
PS printer OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5"
FAX OPT
Scanner STD
Filing STD
HDD STD
RSPF/DSPF DSPF
Automatic duplex STD
Security OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

OPT*1: Product key target.
3. Combination of options
MX-M363N
Product key
Section Name Model name MX-M453N Remarks
target
MX-M503N
Paper feed system 1 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX8 
2 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX9 
3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1  A4
Paper exit system 4 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX2 
5 FINISHER MX-FNX9  Inner finisher
6 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3 
7 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10 
8 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1A/B/C/D  For inner finisher
9 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5A/B/C/D  For saddle stitch finisher
10 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1  For finisher (MX-FNX9)/
For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
11 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3  For saddle
12 FINISHER MX-FN11 
13 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6A/B/C/D  For finisher (MX-FN11)
14 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC2  For finisher (MX-FN11)
Printer expansion 15 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1  
16 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 *3  The expansion memory board
(MX-SMX3) is required.
17 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1 
Image send expansion 18 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 *1
19 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1 
20 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1 
21 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1  
22 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EBX3 
23 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1  
Authentication/Security 24 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR14U   Commercial version
Application/Solution 25 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1 
26 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5 
27 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10 
28 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50 
29 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0 
30 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE MX-AMX2 STD/*2  For North America, the
SharpOSA Utility CD-ROM is
not provided.
31 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3  
32 KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/*2
Memory 33 EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3  1GB (Required when the XPS
expansion kit is used.)
STD: Standard provision. : Installable. —: Cannot be connected.

* 1: No support for some destinations.
* 2: Standard for North America.
* 3: Memory expansion are required.
MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500NT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500NR 10
B. MPE
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500BT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500NR 10
C. Asia/SRH (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500AT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500AR 10
D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)

Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500GT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500GV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500GR 10
E. SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500FT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500AR 10
F. SESC
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner: Net 910g) x1 40K MX-500CT 10 Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Black)
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500CV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500CR 10
2. Maintenance parts list

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Agency (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)
No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks
1 Heat roller kit (200K kit) MX-503HK Lower heat roller 1 200K 5
Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4
Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2
Upper heat roller 1
Upper pressure roller bearing 2
Pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
2 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 200K 10
Discharge plate 1
MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

3 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 200K 10
DV side seal F/R 1
TN filter UN 2
4 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 200K 10
Toner reception seal 1
Side seal F/R 1
Drum separation pawl unit 4
MC unit 1
5 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5
6 Paper dust removing unit MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 200K 10
7 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 400K 10
8 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11)
9 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN10)
10 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/FN10)
11 Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)

1 Upper heat roller kit MX-503UH Upper heat roller 1 200K 10
(200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4
2 Lower heat roller kit MX-503LH Lower heat roller 1 200K 10
(200K kit) Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2
3 Web cleaning kit MX-503WC Upper pressure roller bearing 2 200K 10
Pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
4 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 200K 10
Discharge plate 1
5 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 200K 10
DV side seal F/R 1
TN filter UN 2
6 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 200K 10
Toner reception seal 1
Side seal F/R 1
Drum separation pawl unit 4
MC unit 1
7 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5
8 Paper dust removing unit MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 200K 10
9 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 400K 10
10 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11)
11 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN10)
12 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/FN10)
13 Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20
3. Definition the developer/drum life end 36/45/50-sheet machine

When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level. Single multi 110,000
2 sheets multi 150,000
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
3 sheets multi 177,000
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged 4 sheets multi 200,000
as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is per-
36/45/50-sheet machine
formed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum
rotates. Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be Printable counter
determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the 250,000
rpm reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end. 36/45/50-sheet machine
200,000
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13.
(840K rotations = 7,916,813cm) 150,000
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm 100,000
Developer/drum 200K 930K rotations

50,000
0
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

4. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
A. Drum cartridge side of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Internal product name Destination Incompatibility
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows. A 3MX 500N T 1 A
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. B 00001 090210 B
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2. Production Serial No. Production Version
2: Alphabet place in production day year/month/day
Indicates the model conformity code. Example: 1st of production on February 10, 2009
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
D. Environmental conditions
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
(Humidity)
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date. 85%
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 60%
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
20%
B. Developer 10 30 35
(Temperature)
BK
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C
conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
(8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (9) (5) (6)
(10)
When a finisher / saddle stitch

finisher is not installed
(7)
When a finisher is installed
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
When a saddle stitch finisher is (11)

installed
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-
sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to
replace a toner cartridge.
3 Paper pass unit* This transfers output to the finisher (large capacity) or the saddle stitch
finisher.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Right tray* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
7 Finisher* This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed
to punch holes in output.
8 Punch module* This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large
capacity).
9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB When using the USB port, be
memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. careful of the total current
consumption not to exceed 500mA.
10 Keyboard* This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not
used, it can be stored under the operation panel.
11 Saddle stitch finisher* This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding
and stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are
also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
12 Finisher (large capacity)* This can be used to staple output.
13 Tray 1 This holds paper.
14 Tray 2 This holds paper.
15 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
16 Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer is installed)*
17 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is This holds paper.
installed)*
*: Peripheral device.
MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

[Automatic document feeder and document glass]
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(8)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original mis-feed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
B. Internal operation parts

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
4 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
5 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension.
6 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
7 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
8 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
9 Right cover of stand/ Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 3 or tray 4.
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer right cover of stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)
10 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 1 or tray 2.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper mis-feed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.

C. Connectors
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the When using the USB port, be
machine. This connector cannot be used under the factory setting. The connector on the careful of the total current
front section can be used under the factory setting. When the keyboard is installed to the consumption not to exceed 500mA.
machine, an exclusive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.)
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For
the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0. A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine
as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to
this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector
must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug
6 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to
this socket.
7 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this
socket.

D. Operation panel
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9)
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides
confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
10 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
11 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
12 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
13 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
14 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( )
blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
15 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
16 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

E. DSPF
(1) Internal structure
5 4 14 2 3 1
7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller.
document.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to
document.
14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly.
(2) Sensors and Switches
5 4 14 2 3 1
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
CIS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD5 SPPD6 (SPOD)
7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

CIS CIS unit CIS Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SCOV DSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the DSPF upper cover.
SPLS1 DSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 DSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPED DSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD6 (SPOD) DSPF document exit sensor Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the DSPF paper feed tray.

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB and lamps
4
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS
FAN

FAN Cooling fan motor DC motor Cools the CIS unit and the motor.
SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.

1 DSPF control PWB Controls the DSPF section.
2 DSPF flash ROM PWB Program ROM for DSPF
3 DSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the DSPF section.
4 DSPF CIS unit Reads document images. (CIS PWB: CIS control, LED: Light source)

F. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS CCD
TFD3
TFD2 POD3
HPOS
POD2
APPD1
POD1
WEB-END
TH_MY
TH_US
DSW_ADU
BD
PCS
TCS
TH_DV/HUD_DV APPD2
PPD2 MPED MPLD
TNBOX
MTOP1
TNF MPWD
MTOP2
PPD1
MPFD
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1 DSW_C
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
BD Laser beam detection Detects the laser scan start timing.
CCD CCD unit Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear Duct switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 - 4. Duct switch
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Duct switch
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear Duct switch
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 - 4. Duct switch
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Duct switch
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position Transmission type
(storing position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull- Transmission type
out position).
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. Reflection type
PCS Image density sensor Detects toner patch density. Reflection type
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature and the humidity in the process section.
TH_MY Main thermistor Fusing temperature detection (main) Thermistor
TH_US Sub thermistor Fusing temperature detection (sub) Thermistor
TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
WEB-END Web end detection Detects life end of the web cleaner. Electrode switch
G. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW DSW-F

DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source.

H. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
MPUC
CPFC2
MPFS
MPGS
PSPS
TDSC
CPUC1
CPFC1
CPUC2

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
CPFC1 Paper transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller 7.
CPFC2 Paper transport clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper transport section of
the paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
(Paper feed tray 2)
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
(Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
PSPS Separation solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.

I. Drive motor
OSM
ADUM_H
POM
WEBM
FUM
PGM
MIM DM
PFM
CPFM RRM
CLUM1
ADUM_L
CLUM2

ADUM_H ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller in the right door section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM Drum motor Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor Brush-less motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) unit.
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the paper feed section.
Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

J. Lamps and gates
CCFT CLI
2
1
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW

CCFT LCD back-light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Back-light for LCD
CLI Scanner lamp LED Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
HL_UM Heater lamp (main) Heats the heat roller (main).
HL_US Heater lamp (sub) Heats the heat roller (sub).
HL_UW Heater lamp (for warm-up) Heats up supplementarily when warming-up.
No. Name Type Function/Operation

1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to
discharge paper to the right tray.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route of paper to the duplex (ADU) section.

K. Fans and filters
POFM1
POFM2
RDCFM OZFM
POFM3 1
LSUFM
CPUFAM PSFM2
2
2
PSFM1
Signal name Name Function/Operation

CPUFAM MFP PWB cooling fan Cools the MFP PWB.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU section.
OZFM Ozone fan Exhausts ozone.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.
POFM1 Paper exit cooling fan 1 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section.
RDCFM Suction fan Stabilizes paper transport.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.

L. PWB
13
14
15
11
12
27
8
10
22
23 21
26
7
16
5
4
19
20
18
28
17 6
24
25
29
3

1 RD I/F PWB Interfaces each sensor signal in the right door unit section.
2 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size in the paper feed tray.
3 DC power PWB Generates a DC voltage.
4 Motor drive PWB Drives each motor in the paper transport section.
5 HV PWB Generates the main charger voltage, the developing bias voltage, and the transfer voltage.
6 AC power PWB Controls the power source in the primary side.
7 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner and the operation panel section.
8 CCD PWB Scans document images.
9 LED drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
10 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
11 Document detection light emitting PWB Drives the document size detection LED.
12 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD back-light.
13 LVDS PWB Converts display signals into LCD display signals.

14 8.5 MFP OPE PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
15 Power SW PWB Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source.
16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
17 MFP PWB Controls data related to images, and controls the whole machine.
18 Mother PWB Interfaces signals of the MFP PWB and another PWB.
19 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
20 PCU Flash ROM PWB The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB.
21 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
22 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
23 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
24 PROG1 ROM PWB Program ROM PWB for booting the printer controller
25 PROG2 ROM PWB MFP PWB program ROM PWB
26 SCN Flash ROM PWB Scanner control program ROM PWB
27 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
28 Scanner function expansion PWB (Option: MX-EBX3) Controls compression and decompression of image data.
29 WH PWB (Service kit: Dehumidifier heater) Controls the dehumidifier heater.
M. Fuses/Thermostats
14
TS_UM
TS_US
10
13
11
12
8 6
7
1 9
2
3
4
5
Signal name Name Specifications Section

TS UM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS US Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
NO Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB
6 F1 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) AC power PWB
7 F2 Fuse T10AH250V (200V only) AC power PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB

NO Signal name Name Specifications Section
10 F101 Fuse 12A 125V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
11 F102 Fuse T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
12 F103 Fuse T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
13 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
14 F1 Fuse T0.8A 250V LCD INV PWB
N. Rollers
34
35
33
32
36
37
24
25
27
26
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
23 21
31
30
5 19
17
18
4
6
15
16
8 14
40
7 41
12
13
9

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.

11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport
roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
paper.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
paper.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
paper.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 1.
paper.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
paper.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
paper.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the
manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section. / Transports paper to the paper exit roller 2.
paper.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
39 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
paper.

[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
2D Transfer separation bias voltage adjustment 8-17
ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image 3A Print engine image skew adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
position, image magnification ratio, 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
void area adjustments 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment 50-10/50-1
(Manual adjustments) 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment 50-10
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
(OC mode) 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment
4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
4D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment 5A DSPF parallelism adjustment
(DSPF mode) 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1/48-5
7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 48-1
7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 48-1
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center adjustment 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
(Manual adjustment) 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position, void area adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 10 Copy image position, image loss, 10A Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
and void area adjustment 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode scanner scan position adjustment) 53-8
(Manual adjustment) 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 11 CCD calibration 11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Document table mode) 63-3/63-5
11B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
11C Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer density and gradation 46-24
(Auto printer density and gradation adjustment
adjustment) 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment 46-16
12C Copy density in each copy mode (Overall density adjustment) 46-2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
12D Density and gradation adjustment in each copy mode (Normally not required) 46-10
12E Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy mode 46-32
12F Color document reproducibility adjustment in the copy mode 46-37
12G Copy density and gradation adjustment (DSPF mode) 46-9
(Individual adjustment of the low density area and the high density area)
12H Automatic copy and printer density and gradation adjustment by the user
(Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the automatic copy density and gradation adjustment, and
the adjustment)
ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment (Printer 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment 67-25
density and gradation adjustment)
ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure mode operating conditions in copy, scan, and FAX 46-19
ADJ 15 Paper size detection adjustment 15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
15B DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 16 Document size detection 16A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment (Document table mode) 16B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, image 18A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
off-center, image magnification (Document table mode)
ratio adjustment 18B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
(Automatic adjustment) 18C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document table mode)
18D Copy image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image 50-28
magnification ratio automatic adjustment (DSPF mode)
ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
3. Details of adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm in between 20mm - 40mm
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
* The developing unit has been disassembled. 5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm - 40mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
* When the print image density is low.
0.40  0.02mm.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. developing doctor and the developing roller.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
NOTE: Do not hold the adjacent section of the MG roller strongly.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove 20mm 20mm
the developing unit upper cover. 40mm 40mm
Note for use of a thickness gauge

NOTE: All DV material must be removed before beginning step 2. • Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw. • The gauge must pass freely.
• The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

position
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
NOTE: All DV material must be removed before begining step 2.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)

4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller 1-C Toner density control reference value
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) setting
* When developer is replaced.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM 25-2.
2 㨪 3mm When setting the toner density control reference value, pull out
the toner cartridge in advance.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B.
$7'(9(92B.
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and the

doctor tip of the developing unit, and check that it is 12.0 
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. . (;(&87(
2) Close the front cabinet and press [EXECUTE] button.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.
7&9B.
12.0±0.5mm
. (;(&87(
Adjustment completed
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B.
$7'(9(92B.
. (;(&87(
Abnormal end
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust- 7&9B.(((/
ment plate with the fixing screw.
. (;(&87(

3) After completion of the adjustment of the toner density control 2) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
reference value, insert the toner cartridge.

4) Close the front cabinet. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel- 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$˖ ˖*%B.
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner $˖
density, and the output value is displayed. ˷̚˹
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-

age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not. 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
NOTE: 10-key
EXECUTE
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
EXECUTE
result is not reflected. or after 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
play.
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the reference $˖

$˖ ˖*%B.
toner density control value is not completed normally. ˷̚˹
Error display Content Details of content

EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77, or
sensor control voltage level over 207
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177, or sensor
control voltage level less than 52
NOTE: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25- 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2.
3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 1 of the high
voltage PWB and the GND.
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
2
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
1
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, use a old developer unit and OPC drum for this
adjustment.
5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified val-
ues, change the adjustment value and adjust.
Adjustment value Setting Default

Item/Display Content
(Monitor voltage) range value
A GB_K K charging/grid 31.22  0.26V 0 - 850 650
bias set value
If the specified value voltage is not obtained even though the

adjustment value is changed, the following parts may be
defective.
• High voltage PWB
• PCU PWB
• MC unit
• OPC drum unit
• High voltage circuit electrode

3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 3 of the high
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage voltage PWB and the GND.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.

The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.
5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
Adjustment value Setting Default

(Monitor voltage) range value
A DVB_K K developing 0.84  0.02V 0 - 700 496
2) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode. bias set value
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
'96(77,1*$1'287387 adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
$˖ ˖'9%B.
$˖ though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts

˷̚˹
may be defective.
• High voltage PWB
• PCU PWB
• Developing unit
• High voltage circuit electrode
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE * U2 trouble has occurred.
EXECUTE * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
or after 30 sec.
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖'9%B. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ 7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
˷̚˹
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;

'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2. (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;
'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.

2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Setting Default value

range 36 PPM model 45/50 PPM model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/ Standard paper mode
Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX White Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper mode Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
D TC HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 113 129
F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 - 255 113 129
G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 161 161
H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 161 161
I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 - 255 113 129
2-D Transfer separation bias voltage ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image
adjustment
position, image magnification
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced. ratio, void area adjustments
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Manual adjustments)
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 3-A Print engine image skew adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 8-17 mode. (LSU parallelism adjustment)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
7(67
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387 * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
$˖ ˖3/9)$&(
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&. 1) Enter the SIM 64-2 mode.
˷̚˹

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$

(˖ ˖08/7,ǂ&2817
)˖ ˖(;32685(̚,)$̚̚67$1'$5'',7+(5
*˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
(;(&87( 2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 10-key EXECUTE
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖3/9)$&(
EXECUTE
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&. or end of print
˷̚˹

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$

(˖ ˖08/7,ǂ&2817
)˖ ˖(;32685(̚,)$̚̚67$1'$5'',7+(5
(;(&87( 2. *˖ ˖3$3(5&6
+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key. (;(&87( 2.
By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer separation bias 2) Set the set items to the values shown below.
voltage is outputted.
Item Setting value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content A 1
range value
B 1
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
C 254
(Front surface)
D 255
B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
(Back surface)

3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
changing the value of G. and side of the rectangle print pattern.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
The check pattern is printed out. adjust.
5) Check the printed image for any skew. If not, execute the following procedures.
Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat- 6) Remove the left cover and the paper exit tray cabinet.
tern.
There are following two methods of checking the image for any
skew (right angle).
Method 1:
Measure the maximum length of the diagonal lines of the rect-
angle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the
diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good. 2
Method 2:
Compare the right angle of vertical side and the horizontal side
A 4
of the rectangle print pattern with the right angle of A3 or 11" x
8.5" paper for judgment of good or no good. 1 3
(NOTE)
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
7) When the LSU unit fixing screw is attached to the hole position
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
on the lower side, remove the fixing screw and attach it to the
be used in advance.
hole on the upper side.
Loosen the fixing screw which is attached to the adjustment
(Method 1) hole position on the upper side. Loosen the LSU fixing screw
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle (left).
print pattern.
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
8) Move the LSU front frame side up and down to adjust.

(When Method 1 is used to check the image for any skew
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
When C > D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
shifted upward.
and D of the diagonal lines.
When C < D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
shifted downward.
the following range. C – D =  0.8mm
(When Method 2 is used to check the image for any skew
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
is no need to adjust.
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, to shift the
LSU upward. If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B,
(Method 2) to shift the LSU downward.
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern.
Comparison line
0.5mm or less
Direction A Direction B
9) Execute procedures 4) and 5).

(Repeat procedures 4), 5), 7) and 8) until a satisfactory result
is obtained.)
10) When the adjustment result reaches a satisfactory level,
tighten the LSU unit fixing screws (at the left and at the center).

6) Change the set value of set item A.
3-B Print engine image magnification ratio
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
adjustment (Main scanning direction) by 0.1mm.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
* U2 trouble has occurred. value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. main scanning direction is decreased.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
3-C Print engine print area (void area)
adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 * When a paper tray is replaced.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
,˖ ˖68%0)7 * When the duplex section is disassembled.
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
/˖ ˖68%/&& * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print * The PCU PWB has been replaced.

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
(Note)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 3B print
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 tion) in advance.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 $˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
.˖ ˖68%&6 %˖ ˖0$,10)7
/˖ ˖68%/&&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
2. '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(;(&87(
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll ,˖ ˖68%0)7
key. -˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
The check pattern is printed out. (;(&87( 2.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
 0.5mm.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
240 0.5mm )˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below 6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
are in the range of the standard values. the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Content Standard adjustment value Setting Default

X Lead edge void area 3.0  1.0mm range value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0  2.0mm edge reference position
adjust- (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
Z1 value motor ON Tray
2.0 2.0mm
C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC adjust- LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 - 99 50
paper
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
X loss area loss area setting
3.0 1.0mm Y H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
2.0 - 5.0mm value adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjust- adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
Z2 ment
2.0 2.0mm M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired ratio adjustment (CCD)
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. correction
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( value value
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 value
'˖ ˖55&%/&& R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
value
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖/($'
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖6,'( T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 66
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1% When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
.˖ ˖)52175($5
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
area is decreased.
2.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is

10-key changed by 0.1mm.
OK NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
(˖ ˖55&%0)7 of all paper feed tray.
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
,˖ ˖'(1$ each paper tray.
-˖ ˖'(1%
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
.˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
that the void area is within the specified range.
2. Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Setting Default
3-D Print engine image off-center adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. value (Tray 3)
* When a paper tray is replaced. F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 4)
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment value (LCC)
(Main scanning direction) is performed. H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. value (ADU)
NOTE:
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
Before execution of this
* When the duplex section is disassembled. adjustment check to
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced. insure that the adjustment
items A - G have been
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
properly adjusted. If not,
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. this adjustment cannot be
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. made properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50
motor ON paper feed
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. J SUB-CS12 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. adjustment tray
(Note) K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
item.
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* Check that the ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual 1-6 1 2
adjustment (Main scanning direction) has been properly paper feed (CS1)
adjusted. CS1 Tray 1 2
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode. CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 LCC LCC 6
$˖
$˖ ˖%.0$* P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
NO selection No 1
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
cedure 2).
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7 The adjustment pattern is printed.
-˖ ˖68%&6
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
rect position.
(;(&87( 2. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
EXECUTE all the following conditions are satisfied.
EXECUTE
End of print RV
2.0mm 2.0mm

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Use the scroll key to select a paper feed tray which is to be

adjusted. (Items B - H)
Setting Default FV
Item/Display Content 2.0mm 2.0mm
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100 RV: REAR VOID AREA
magnification ratio BK
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
value (Manual paper feed) RV + FV  4.0mm
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 RV = 2.0  2.0mm
value (Tray 1)
FV = 2.0  2.0mm
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2) If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion

adjustment (OC mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
* When the copy image is distorted. 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism
adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the LED lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which
are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the
scanner unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.

5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B. 4-B Scan image sub scanning direction
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- distortion adjustment
dures, perform the following procedures. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
is not in contact.
L
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner L L
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)

5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- frame side.
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image main scanning direction

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.) Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
L right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
L L frame side, change the overall height.
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
L = 10mm Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
L
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
4-D Scan image distortion adjustment
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
(Whole scanner unit)
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.) This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 4A, ADJ 4B, and ADJ 4C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
A A A
Ld Ld A
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.

ADJ 5 Scanner image skew
adjustment (DSPF mode)
5-A DSPF parallelism adjustment
1) Make an DSPF parallelism adjustment sheet.
Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart> <Work procedure>

a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment Place the DSPF height adjustment sheet between section A
and the DSPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the DSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the DSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the DSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass
holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counter- b) If it cannot be pulled out, loosen the fixing nut and turn the
clockwise)
section D clockwise to lift the DSPF unit, and make an
adjustment.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, loosen the fixing nut
and turn the section D counterclockwise to move down the
Turn the hinge DSPF unit, and make an adjustment.
D to lift the
DSPF so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)

c) Adjust the section F.
Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.3mm - 5.0mm.
If not, loosen the fixing nut and turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the
section F.
edge (a) of the OC mat.
No
4.3 - 5.0mm
Is there a
Section F
resistance in the
section B?
Yes a
Increase the 20mm

clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.0mm.
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the DSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the DSPF unit.

d) Check section B.
Place the DSPF height adjustment sheet between section B
and the DSPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the DSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the DSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section B. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the DSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is
in contact, it is O.K.)
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height
adjustment sheet.
B
b
Is
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
Adjust hinge f) Check section C.

E until the Check to confirm that the projection in section C in the right
separation in front side of then DSPF bottom is in contact with the glass
section C is
Check section C. deleted. surface (b).
(Counter-
clockwise)
b
C
* The bosses in section A
Is there No and B are excessively
a separating pressed. (The right
section.
side is separating.)
Yes
End of the b
adjustment

[Check Method 2]
5-B DSPF skew adjustment
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
(Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 1.0mm.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
0 - 1.0mm
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values A
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)".
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the DSPF diagonal adjustment
screw section.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1] 4) Raise the DSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the
(Front side) hinge.
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d

5) Close the DSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the DSPF
diagonal adjustment screw section. 5-C DSPF skew adjustment
Turn the hex wrench of the DSPF diagonal adjustment screw (Back surface mode)
to adjust the alignment. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction

* In the case of (A), turn the DSPF diagonal adjustment screw
counterclockwise.
In the case of (B), turn the DSPF diagonal adjustment screw
clockwise.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
A B Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
 1mm or less) is satisfied.
C D
7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
c d

[Check Method 2] 5) Check the image skew state, and shift the CIS mounting plate
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction to "L" or "R" direction to adjust.
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
L R
0 - 1.0mm
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the

If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the left]
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) (When c < d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "L" direction.
of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)". [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the right]
procedures of step 3) or later. (When c > d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "R" direction.
3) Remove the front frame cabinet of the DSPF. Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
mode/DSPF front surface mode)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
4) Loosen the adjustment plate fixing screw. (On the front frame 1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
side)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%

(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
2.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the A
copy mode, and make a copy.
B
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
(Example) tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  1.0%)
copy image. and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back
surface mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
100mm scale * When the CIS unit is replaced.
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
* When the CIS unit is replaced.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted.
1.0mm * When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
Copy image 1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
(1mm (1%) 2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
10 20 90 100 110 is satisfactorily focused.
shorter than
the original) If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Remove the rear frame and the front frame cabinet of the
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the DSPF unit.
following procedures. 4) Loosen the fixing screw of the focus adjustment plate. (About
7) Remove the document table glass. one turn)
8) Remove the dark box cover. On the front frame side and the rear frame side.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.

5) Turn the CIS focus adjustment screws on the front and the rear 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
frame sides to adjust the focus.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%

(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
2.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100  1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory focus is obtained. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
adjustment Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100  1.0%).
(Manual adjustment)
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 7-B Sub scanning direction image
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. magnification ratio adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode)
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
direction is not properly adjusted. below.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
7-A Main scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%

(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
2.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the images.
Copy magnifi-
cation ratio
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)
Original dimension
100% original
(Example 1)
Copy A
copy
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than 10 50 100 150 200 250
the original)
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Example 2)
Copy B If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than (100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the original)
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
range (100  1.0%).

If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following $˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
procedure. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. '˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is 2.
within the specified range (100  1.0%).
Setting Default
7-C Main scanning direction image Item Display Content
range value
magnification ratio adjustment A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
(DSPF mode) magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. magnification ratio
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs.
surface magnification ratio
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. adjustment (Main scan)
* When the DSPF is disassembled. D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
a. Adjustment procedures
adjustment (Sub scan)
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
ment tray of the DSPF. surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and * Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the magni-
Paper pass direction fication ratio is increased by 0.1%.
A4 size * It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Both the front surface (Front surface)
and the back surface) SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
10mm 10mm
(Back surface)
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni- 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
fication ratio is changed by 0.02%. $˖

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
%˖ ˖&&'68%

Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
obtained. '˖ ˖63)68%

(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the

machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
2.
7-D Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment
Setting Default
(DSPF mode) Item Display Content
range value
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs. magnification ratio
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. adjustment (CCD)
* When the DSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF. adjustment (Sub scan)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and surface magnification ratio
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. adjustment (Main scan)
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the

10mm
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
Paper pass direction * Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the
A4 size magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
10mm (Back surface)
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
key, and press [OK] key.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
images.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
10
fication ratio is changed by 0.01%.

Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
50
obtained.
100

10

original
150
50

200
100
tion mode.
copy
150
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment The entered value is set.
(Manual adjustment) When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. copy mode and make a copy.
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is
8-A Scan image off-center adjustment satisfied.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 8-B Scan image off-center adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. (DSPF mode)
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
adjustment mode (document table). * When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 8A
A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.
a. Adjustment procedures
A=B 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
B direction.
Paper transport direction
Front surface Back surface
2) Check the copy image center position.

If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
A'
A' - B' = 1.0mm Draw a line at the center of the

front surface and the back surface
(100%) of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
B'
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF.
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode. original copy

a
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
If the difference is within the range of 0  2.7mmm there is no

2.
need to perform the adjustment.
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.

4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
(SIM50-12)
G Image FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20

loss (SIDE2) image loss
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( amount amount setting
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
H setting TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'( SIDE2 (SIDE2) edge image loss
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'( amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
surface
document off-
center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface
document off-
2.
center
adjustment
(SIM50-6) K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( magnification
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
ratio adjustment
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖ (Sub scan)
%˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

timing is delayed.
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

image loss is increased.
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63) * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
* The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
2.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
(SIM50-12)
SIM50-12
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
Setting Default
Item Display Content SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 (SIM50-6)
center adjustment
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
center adjustment (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
position is shifted to the rear frame side. shifted to the rear.)
1step = 0.1mm Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
SIM50-6
Setting Default machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
range value state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
document scan
tion mode.
position
adjustment
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position,
document scan
position void area adjustment
adjustment (Printer mode)
(CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
loss (SIDE1) lead edge image * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
amount loss amount
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
setting setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20 * U2 trouble has occurred.
(SIDE1) side image loss * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
amount setting * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) rear edge image NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
loss amount lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
setting (3mm) in the printer mode.
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0 - 99 30
(SIDE2) lead edge image
loss amount
setting

1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
$˖
$˖ ˖'(1&
in the standard adjustment value range.
%˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 Standard adjustment value: 3.0  2.0mm

'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
3.0 2.0mm
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5

'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
*˖ ˖'(1%&6 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8 6) Change the adjustment value.
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
(;(&87( 2. [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value printed.
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
in it. paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
range value
by about 0.1mm.
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30
lead edge image position. Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
(PRINTER MODE)
NOTE: To adjust the void area, change the adjustment values of
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
items B and C.
adjustment
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
adjustment
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 ADJ 10 Copy image position, image
area adjustment correction
value
loss, and void area adjustment
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 (Manual adjustment)
adjustment correction value
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value 10-A Copy image position, image loss, void area
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Document table mode)
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 66 * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed * U2 trouble has occurred.
CS1 Tray 1 2 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
CS2 Tray 2 3 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
CS3 Tray 3 4
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6 * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO) NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
NO selection No 1 the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-
pleted normally.

1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
below.
Setting Default
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction Item/Display Content
range value
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
plate.
edge edge reference
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead adjust- position (OC)
edge can be seen. B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
value motor Tray
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper feed
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ratio adjustment (CCD)
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( correction
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖ N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
%˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6

scanning correction value
'˖ ˖55&%/&& O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖55&%0)7 print area value
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖/($'
value value
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$ Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
-˖ ˖'(1% value
.˖ ˖)52175($5
R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
scanning value
2.
S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
10-key correction
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 66
OK value value
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.

Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
$˖ ˖55&$ mode.
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6

When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
'˖ ˖55&%/&& image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
copy scale.
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖/($' If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
+˖ ˖6,'(
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
.˖ ˖)52175($5 Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
obtained.
2.
Scale image 3.0mm position

Paper lead
edge
100%
5mm 10mm
200%
5mm 10mm

5) Image loss adjustment a. Adjustment procedures
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the 1) Make a copy in the DSPF (front surface) mode, and check for
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in any shade on the lead edge section of the copy image.
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
change these adjustment items.
Paper lead edge
Papar lead edge
Copy area Image area

Maginification ratio : 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm Shadow image of DSPF
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
De- Standard section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
Item/ Adjustment
Content fault adjustment 2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
Display range
value value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0

adjustment image loss  1.0mm ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
adjustment
$872 0$18$/
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
loss  1.0mm
adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

10-B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF

mode scanner scan position adjustment) 3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the DSPF scanning position is increased. When the
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. 0.1mm.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. obtained.
* When U2 trouble occurs. NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode).
This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when 10-C Copy mode image loss adjustment
scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode. (DSPF mode)
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
shifted to the specified position and a shade of the document table * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
DSPF (front surface) mode.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the following items must have
been properly adjusted.
ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment

ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode)
ADJ 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode
scanner scan position adjustment)

a. Adjustment procedures Setting Default
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. range value
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
dures. amount amount setting
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, amount setting
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) edge image loss
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
amount setting
Front surface
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
R
FACE surface document
off-center
adjustment
L
T
surface document
off-center
adjustment
Put the position K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
marks. front surface
magnification
F
ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
Draw arrows.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
R Back surface timing is delayed.
BACK
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the

image loss is increased.
L T
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
Put the position
marks.
F
Draw arrows. tion mode.
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
&/26(
the following values.
$˖
$˖ ˖6,'( (Standard set value)
%˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1):
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( 20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2):
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( 30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63) increased.)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2.
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0  1.0mm on
Setting Default the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
range value
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
position the image lead edge.
adjustment
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment
(CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20
Copy image
loss (SIDE1) lead edge image
amount loss amount
setting setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) side image loss
Image loss
amount setting 3.0 1.0mm
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) edge image loss If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
amount setting procedure.

3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
press [OK] key. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre- FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
sumed image lead edge. Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi- (When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.) loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. obtained.
(Rear edge image loss adjustment)

1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to ADJ 11 CCD calibration
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
11-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
Paper rear edge (Document table mode)
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
Copy image
surface are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
procedure.
(2) Adjustment procedures
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): ment table.
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): the left side.
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
rear frame side are 2.02.0mm on the front surface and the
back surface.
Paper F Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm
Copy image
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
Copy image
table.
Image loss NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

Paper R
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedure.

2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode. (2) Adjustment procedures
Select [OC] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray.
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
(;(&87(
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC CIS gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such method using the SIT chart.
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
and low humidity. 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode.
11-B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

&/26(
(DSPF mode)
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the CIS unit is replaced.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. &&&555
000***
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. <<<%%%
(1) Note before adjustment

1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it % * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of 3) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are selected color is displayed.
free from dirt and scratches.
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
If they are dirty, clean them. the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one. of the selected color is displayed.
NOTE: * Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera- page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
ture and low humidity. grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
% * 5 '63) 2&

4) When [DSPF] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color * When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed. played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color

auto adjustment is executed. % * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic

adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
11-C Shading adjustment (Calibration)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67

&/26(
(DSPF mode)
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
1) Open the DSPF paper exit section, and insert the white refer-
ence adjustment sheet (UKOG-0330FCZZ) along the guide on
the rear frame until it makes contact with the paper exit roller.
Guide on the rear frame
(;(&87(
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed

in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis-
played.
When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the
sub number entry screen.
* When inserting the white reference adjustment sheet, insert

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( it straight along the guide on the rear frame until the paper
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6&$11(502725,61275($'< detection actuator can be seen through the cut-out section
of the white reference adjustment sheet.
2) Close the DSPF paper exit section.
4) Select [DSPF SHADING].

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6+$',1*(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error

patch numbers are displayed.
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
tial screen. (The previous value is displayed)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6$035,1*'$7$81),7 2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(

3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7

5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
is started. density and gradation adjustment)
* The white reference adjustment sheet is transported in the Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy density
paper exit direction, and shading data are obtained during and gradation adjustment depend on the machine status and the
transportation. servicing conditions.
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed. Follow the flowchart of the copy density and gradation adjustment
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the procedures depending on the actual conditions.
operation is interrupted. There are following four, major cases.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key 1) When installing (as needed)
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis- 2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
played.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other (When a consumable part is replaced.)
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
screen.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
<Descriptions of keys>
Display Content (2) Copy density and gradation check
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading (Note)
SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
Before checking the copy density and gradation, be sure to execute
DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
the following jobs.
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode)
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
<Result display> forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
Display Content * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
COMPLETE Normal completion (Method)
ERROR Abnormal completion Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption that it is proper.
Note for checking the copy mode density
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
(Auto printer density and mode (Manual).
gradation adjustment) In addition, all the picture quality adjustment settings in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
(1) Note before execution of the copy density and gradation [Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)]
adjustment
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy density and the following conditions.
gradation adjustment
Before execution of the copy density and gradation adjustment, Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
be sure to check to confirm that the related adjustments which SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
will affect the copy density and gradation have been properly
completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(Items which will affect the copy density and gradation but are
not required to be adjusted frequently. However, they must be Patch 3 is copied.
checked and adjusted when a trouble occurs.) Patch 1 is not copied.
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.

[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)]
Job
Adjustment item list Simulation Check to confirm that it is in the conditions shown below.
No
ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing doctor
1 developing 1A gap Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
unit ADJ Adjust the developing roller

1B main pole position
ADJ Adjusting ADJ Adjust the main charger grid 8-2
2 high voltage 2A voltage
values ADJ Adjust the developing bias 8-1
2B voltage
ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6
2C adjustment
Patch 7 is slightly
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment copied or not copied.
6
ADJ CCD ADJ CIS gamma adjustment (CIS 63-3
11 calibration 11B calibration) (DSPF mode)
ADJ Shading adjustment 63-2
11C (Calibration) (DSPF mode)

c. Adjustment procedure
12-A Auto copy density and gradation
(Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer den-
adjustment, and auto printer density and sity and gradation adjustment by the serviceman)
gradation adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Flowchart of the auto copy density and gradation adjustment/
auto printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM46-24)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
Start
Execute ADJ 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. auto printer density and gradation adjustment.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table, and press
a. General [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the
There are following two modes in the auto copy density and grada- adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.)
tion adjustment.
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*1)
1) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer
The adjustment check patterns of the copy mode and the printer
density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46- mode are printed out.
24 is used.)
SIM 46-24 allows simultaneous execution of the automatic Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
copy density and gradation adjustment, and the automatic is automatically performed.
printer density and gradation adjustment.
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-ton correction
There is no method to execute the automatic density and gra- (process control).
dation adjustment separately in the copy mode and in the
printer mode. When the half-ton correction (process control) is completed,
To execute the printer density and gradation adjustment auto- "Please quit this mode" is displayed.
"OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is normally
matically, use this method. completed.
2) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user (The When [RESULT] button is pressed, the details of the half-ton
user program mode is used.) correction are displayed.
The auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user is

Cancel SIM 46-24.
provided to reduce the number of service calls.
If the balance of the copy density or gradation is lost for some
reason, the user can use this adjustment to recover the image Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment.
quality. Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy density.
work effectively.
On the other hand, the automatic copy density and gradation Are the density
NO
adjustment by the serviceman can be used to obtain normal and gradation at the
satisfactory level?
picture quality even tough the machine environment is greatly
changed. In addition, if there is a fatal problem on the machine,
repair and adjustment of the machine can provide normal YES
images.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy
density and gradation adjustment.
understood. (SIM46-16)
b. Note for execution of the auto copy density and gradation
adjustment *1:
If there is any streak or unclear
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. copy on the printed check pattern,
check the print engine for any
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
problems.
erly.
3) Set the adjustment pattern sheet on the document table, and
place 5 sheet of white paper on the adjustment pattern sheet. Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment.
Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern, and check the density.
Are the density

and gradation at the NO
satisfactory level?
YES
End Execute manual printer density

and gradation adjustment.
(SIM67-25)

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the

half tone image correction is performed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)257+,6$'-8670(17 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) 2.

paper is selected.)
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no Remark:
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
cedure 2) on the document table. played. This operation takes several minutes.
Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on 6) Check the copy gradation and density.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on (Method 1)
the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch Check to insure that the printed copy check patch image is
image (adjustment pattern) paper. within the following specifications.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.

The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A is not copied.

Patch C or D is slightly copied.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
Q (Max)
Low density High density
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
Patch A must not be copied.
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 (Method 2)
Use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the servicing
color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode
(Manual) to check the copy density and gradation. (Refer to
the item of the copy density and gradation check.)
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory copy
density and gradation, use ADJ 12B manual adjustment (SIM
46-16).
(;(&87(
The copy density and gradation adjustment and the printer

density and gradation adjustment are automatically performed,
and the copy check patch image and the printer check patch
image are printed. (One for each) Wait until the operation
panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

7) Check the printer density and gradation.
12-B Manual copy density and gradation
Check to insure that the printed printer check patch image is
within the following specifications. adjustment
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
The patch density is changed gradually. replaced.
P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION
Patch A or B is slightly copied.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Q (Max) * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
The manual copy density and gradation adjustment (manual
adjustment) is used when the automatic adjustment previously
stated cannot obtain the specified result or a fine adjustment is
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
required and the user requests for customization.
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. Execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and
then execute this adjustment for better efficiency.
b. Note for the copy density and gradation adjustment
8) Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-tone correction (pro-
(Manual adjustment)
cess control).
1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
c. Adjustment procedure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 Manual copy density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1 (SIM 46-16)
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,2167$57
253/($6(386+&$.(<72),1,6+ Start
Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment. (*1)
Enter the SIM 46-16 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or

A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper.
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
(;(&87( Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check

pattern.
When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed, Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
"Please quit this mode" is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
"OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is nor-
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment check pattern is
mally completed. printed.)
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the details of the half-tone
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check
correction are displayed. pattern.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 Are the density NO
7(67 &/26(
at the satisfactory
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17
level?
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'( YES
2.RU1*
Cancel SIM 46-16.
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM 44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or servicing color
test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy
in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the density.
5(68/7 5(75<
Display Content Are the density NO

at the satisfactory
COMPLETE Normal completion level?
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality
YES
ADJUSTMENT
[K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality
End
OTHER Other errors
*1:
9) Cancel the simulation. If satisfactory density is not obtained with the
adjustment, check the print engine for any problems.

1) Enter the SIM46-16 mode. 4) Select the point to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Density level Adjustment

Item/Display Default
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (Point) value range
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17 B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
'˖ ˖32,17
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
*˖ ˖32,17 F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
+˖ ˖32,17 G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
,˖ ˖32,17
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17 I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
/˖ ˖32,17 J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
(;(&87( 2. K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
10-key EXECUTE M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
EXECUTE N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
or self print end
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
The adjustment value can be set in the range of 245 - 755.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17 When SIM 46-24 is used to execute the automatic density and
(˖ ˖32,17 gradation adjustment, all the set values of this simulation are
)˖ ˖32,17
set to 500.
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

,˖ ˖32,17 decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
/˖ ˖32,17 fied.
(;(&87( 2. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
paper is selected.)
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no way of adjustment.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
6) Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check pat-
The adjustment check pattern is printed. tern. (Refer to the item of the copy density and gradation
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density check.)
and gradation is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started.
Patch A is not copied.

Patch C or D is slightly copied. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Q (Max)
(;(&87(
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
not be reversed. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted on the request
from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color bal-
ance stated above.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the following
procedures.

(Normal end (Auto transition)) 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
5(68/7 $˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
&203/(7( ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
5(68/7 (;(&87( /2: +,*+ 2.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) 10-key

OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
5(68/7 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
(5525. $˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
5(68/7 (;(&87(
/2: +,*+
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 2.
This adjustment is required to memory the data as the refer-

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
ence data for half-tone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 12B (Copy density and Setting Default
gradation adjustment (Manual)), be sure to execute this adjust- range value
ment. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
When ADJ 12A (Copy/printer density and gradation adjust- HIGH 1 - 99 50
ment (Automatic)) is executed, this adjustment is automatically B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
executed. HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
8) Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user’s docu-
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
ment according to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(Manual), and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
item of the copy density and gradation check.)
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
If the copy density and gradation are not adjusted to the speci- HIGH 1 - 99 50
fied level, there may be another cause. G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat- HIGH 1 - 99 50
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
from the beginning. HIGH 1 - 99 50
12-C Copy density in each copy mode 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(Overall density adjustment) When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: mode and change the adjustment value.
* When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den- When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
sity and high density part at each copy mode individually. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the density is decreased.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
copy mode individually. Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
* U2 trouble has occurred. nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-2) and the
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
obtained.
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
12-D Density and gradation adjustment in each
3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
copy mode (Normally not required) key.
* When there is a necessity to change the density and gradation in Adjustment
Item/Display Density level (Point) Default value
value range
each copy mode individually.
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
This is to adjust the density in each copy mode. Normally individual E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
there is a request from the user. G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
$872 $872 7(;7 7(;73573+272
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
7(;73+272 35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
(;(&87( increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
$872 sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
adjusted.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
printed out.
)˖ ˖32,17
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
.˖ ˖32,17 referring to this adjustment pattern. However, it is more practi-
/˖ ˖32,17
cally to make a copy and check it.
'3, '3, (;(&87( 2.
10-key 12-E Document background density

OK reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy
mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@
$˖ ˖32,17
density in auto copy mode.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17 * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
(˖ ˖32,17
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 image of the document.
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.

. '3,
* When there is request from the user.
& 0 '3,
< (;(&87( 2.
[SYSTEM
EXECUTE
EXECUTE SETTINGS] key
or end of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. '3, & 0 '3,

< (;(&87( 2.

1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
$˖ ˖55DWLR
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'( $˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
'˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
˷̚˹
(˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
2.
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
10-key
OK
10-key DEFAULT

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
˷̚˹
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
'˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
(˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

2.
EXECUTE NO
2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: DSPF" with
the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
7(67
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
background and the low density image is increased. When the $˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- %˖ ˖*5DWLR
˷̚˹
ground and the low density image is decreased.
Setting Default
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 YES
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 $˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ ˖*5DWLR
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 %˖
˷̚˹
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
12-F Color document reproducibility adjustment

in the copy mode
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Use to adjust the reproducibility of the red image and the yellow
image when copying a color document that includes the red/yellow
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
images.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. Setting Default
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red range value
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 303
copy mode. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 697

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Setting Default
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the ini- Item Button Display Content
range value
tial values (Default). A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is SIDEA: LOW exposure
increased, the copy density of red images is decreased. When adjustment
the adjustment value is decreased, the density is increased. (Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is
SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
increased, the copy density of yellow images is increased.
adjustment
When the adjustment value is decreased, the density in also (Low density side)
decreased. C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
4) Press [OK] key. LOW exposure
5) Make a copy in text/printed photo copy mode (manual), check adjustment
the copy. (Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 SIDEA: HIGH exposure
mode and change the adjustment value. adjustment
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is (High density side)
obtained. E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: HIGH mode exposure
adjustment
12-G Copy density and gradation adjustment (High density side)
(DSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
low density area and the high density area) HIGH exposure
adjustment
It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol-
(High density)
lowing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
* When the copy density differs in the DSPF mode and in the doc- SIDEB: LOW exposure
ument table mode. adjustment
* When the copy density differs on the front surface and on the (Low density side)
back surface in the DSPF mode. B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure
* When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high. adjustment
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. (Low density side)
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled. C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
* When the DSPF CIS unit is replaced.
adjustment
* When U2 trouble occurs. (Low density side)
a. Adjustment procedures D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH exposure
(Front surface copy density adjustment) adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH mode exposure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
(High density side)
$˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2: HIGH exposure
'˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖+,*+ adjustment
(˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+ (High density)
)˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R balance R
H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G balance G
I BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B balance B
2& '63) 2.
2) Press [OC] key to select the front surface copy density adjust-
OC
ment mode.
10-key 3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY
OK SIDE A LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area,
select "COPY SIDE A HIGH."
4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease
$˖
$˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖/2:
the density, enter a smaller number.
%˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2: 5) Press [OK] key.

'˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖+,*+
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.
(˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+
)˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+ 7) Make a copy and check the copy density.

2& '63) 2.

(Back surface copy density adjustment) Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode. range value
D DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH exposure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment
(;32685($'-8670(1763) (High density side)
$˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖/2:
$˖ E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
%˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2:

'˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖+,*+ adjustment
(˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+ (High density side)
)˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+ F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure
adjustment
(High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R balance R
2& '63) 2. H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G balance G
DSPF
SIDEB: B balance B
10-key
2) Press [DSPF] key to select the back surface copy density
OK adjustment mode.
3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) SIDE B LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area,
$˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖/2: select "COPY SIDE B HIGH."
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'(%˖/2:

4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key.
'˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖+,*+
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease
(˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖+,*+
)˖ ˖)$;6,'(%˖+,*+
the density, enter a smaller number.
*˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖5 5) Press [OK] key.
+˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖*
,˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖%
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.
7) Make a copy, and check the copy density.
2& '63) 2.
12-H Automatic copy and printer density and

Setting Default gradation adjustment by the user
range value (Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: LOW exposure
automatic copy density and gradation
adjustment adjustment, and the adjustment)
(Low density side) a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the automatic
adjustment
adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gradation.
(Low density side) This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 tion with SIM 26-53.
LOW exposure
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user’s
adjustment
(Low density side)
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy and
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
the printer density and gradation as well as the user’s oper-
SIDEA: HIGH exposure ational ability is judged enough to execute the adjustment.
adjustment When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
(High density side) explained to the user.
adjustment * U2 trouble has occurred.
(High density side) * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
HIGH exposure
adjustment
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
(High density) * When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)

b. Setting procedure 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode. The copy and the printer density and gradation adjustment is
automatically executed. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖<(612
ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment

$˖
˷̚˹
(Printer density and gradation

adjustment)
(1) Note before execution of the printer density and gradation
adjustment
(2) Printer density and gradation check
2. (Note)
10-key Before checking the printer density and gradation, be sure to exe-
cute the following procedures in advance.
OK
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21 (Method 1)
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
˷̚˹
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
2.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When this is set to DISABLE, the menu of the automatic adjust-
ment of the user copy color balance and density is not displayed in
the user program mode.
(Automatic adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gra-
dation)
Remark:
1) Enter the system setting mode. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
reversed.
3) Press the auto calibration key.
(Method 2)
Execute SIM 67-25 to print the adjustment check pattern.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. The patch density is changed gradually.
5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION
4) on the document table.

Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch
image (adjustment pattern).
Q (Max)
Place the adjustment pattern on the document table so that the Low density High density
adjustment pattern patch faces in the sub scanning direction.
(When the adjustment pattern is printed on A4R or 11" x 8.5"R
paper, place the adjustment pattern paper vertically on the
document table.)
Thin line
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.

13-A Manual printer density and gradation
adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
* When the copy density and gradation adjustment is required. $˖

$˖ ˖32,17
%˖ ˖32,17
a. General ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
When the printer density and gradation are not within the specified '˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
range in the previous automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A, or when a )˖ ˖32,17
fine adjustment is required, or when the user requests for customi- *˖ ˖32,17
zation, this adjustment is executed manually. +˖ ˖32,17

,˖ ˖32,17
Execute the automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A in advance, and -˖ ˖32,17
then execute this adjustment for better efficiency. .˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
b. Adjustment procedure
(;(&87( 2.
Manual printer density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart

(SIM 67-25) 10-key
OK
Start

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
Execute ADJ 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment. $˖ ˖32,17
(*1) $˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

Enter the SIM 67-25 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or '˖ ˖32,17
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper. (˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check -˖ ˖32,17
pattern. .˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
Select a target adjustment density level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. EXECUTE EXECUTE
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

or self print end

Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
pattern. 35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
Are the density NO (˖ ˖32,17
at the satisfactory )˖ ˖32,17
level? *˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
YES
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
Cancel SIM 67-25. /˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
Check the printer density and gradation adjustment result.
Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern,

and check the printer density.
Are the density

and gradation at the NO
satisfactory level?
YES
End
*1:
If satisfactory density is not obtained with the
adjustment, check the print engine for any problems.

2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
paper is selected.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. (;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'( ˖
The adjustment check pattern is printed. $(B6723B&23< ˖
02'(
5($/7,0(
02'(
6723 35(6&$1
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density $(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
and the gradation are satisfactory. $(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1

$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
If not, execute the following procedures. $(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57

P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION

A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P 2) Set REALTIME or STOP to adjustment item AE STOP COPY.

For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Change the
setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART", in
Q (Max)
Low density High density some cases.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
mode
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Stop (for copy)
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must Stop (for FAX)
not be reversed. AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Patch A or B is slightly copied. Stop (for scanner)
When, however, the density and the gradation are adjusted on AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
the request by the user, there is no need to set to the standard setting NORMAL
density and gradation stated above. SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
4) Select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99). MODE2: Normal gamma
When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic density, all the STOP:
set values of this simulation are set to 50. Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To document, decides the output image density according to
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- stant at whole area.)
fied. REALTIME:
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the decides the output image density according to the density
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. of each part of the document. (The output image density
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient may be not constant at whole area.)
way of adjustment. AE WIDTH FULL:
6) Cancel SIM 67-25. Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
(leading edge of document) x Document width. No relation-
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
ship to PRESCAN MODE
density and gradation.
AE WIDTH PART:
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
The print test pattern is printed.
(leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relation-
ship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in auto copy mode:
ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure When the density of the document of the read area is light,
mode operating conditions in output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
copy, scan, and FAX image density is decreased by control.
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
ment density in auto copy mode.
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in auto mode.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.

Document table/DSPF mode

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
3 to 7mm 7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
AE WIDTH = FULL
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Document table mode

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3 to 7mm %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
DSPF mode %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
3 to 7mm
100mm AE WIDTH = PART

(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.
Document density detection area

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
ADJ 15 Paper size detection

adjustment
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
(;(&87(
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. 15-B DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (;(&87(

2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
display.
tion.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
9) Press [EXECUTE] key. tion.
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed,
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper-
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

ADJ 16 Document size detection 16-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode.
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
16-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
EXECUTE

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
Adjustment
failed
Adjustment completed EXECUTE

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw

and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32  0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)
32+
-0.5mm 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.

ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 18-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode)
* The operation panel has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode. 2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-

63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button.

2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds (Any paper size will do.)
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. 7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen 0)7 &6 &6
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, (;(&87(
image off-center, image 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

magnification ratio adjustment The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(Automatic adjustment) 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM 50-28. It takes less time to use this adjustment than to use the NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
following manual adjustments. guide.
* ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction)
* ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment
* ADJ 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 10 Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjust-
ment (Manual adjustment)
(Menu in SIM 50-28 mode)
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1* 0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&
(;(&87( (;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ratio The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
7) Press [OK] key. 6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
The adjustment result becomes valid. tion)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
guide.
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
18-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

(Each paper feed tray)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'- The following item is automatically adjustment.
5(68/7 '$7$
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

18-C Copy lead edge image reference position
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button. adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
3) Select [ALL] with the key button. direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (Document table mode)
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
$//

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment

* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button. 7) Press [OK] key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. The adjustment result becomes valid.
(Any paper size will do.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
0)7 &6 &6

(;(&87(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 18-D Copy image off-center, image lead edge
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. position, sub scanning direction image
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(Any direction)
(DSPF mode)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*

3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

(;(&87( used to print DSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
sponding button.
The following item is automatically adjustment.
Select [ALL] with the key button.
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
SIDE1: DSPF adjustment for the front side
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment SIDE2: DSPF adjustment for the back side
ALL: DSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print DSPF
adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print
of DSPF adjustment patterns.
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing DSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start DSPF adjustments.

6) DSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF. 10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the DSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the * To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
DSPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
adjustment
reading and calculating DSPF adjustment patterns (for the Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
front side). ing cases, perform this adjustment.
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. * When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment * When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where paper rear edge section.
you can have the machine start reading DSPF adjustment
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
patterns (for the back side).
position in the front/rear frame direction.
<Adjustment item list>
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
• DSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
• DSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
• DSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (front side)
8) DSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF.
The standard fixing position is one scale lower than the center
of the marking scale. Change the actual fixing position accord-
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the ing to the condition.
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print * When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
DSPF adjustment patterns again. in the arrow direction B.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading * When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is arrow direction A.
reading DSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment item list>
• DSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
• DSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
• DSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (back side)

[5] SIMULATION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. General (Including basic operations)

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON  Program key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON
 CLEAR key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON  Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key  START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
When canceling the current simulation mode to change the
main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit messages is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit Automatic document feeder
section and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control Automatic document feeder
circuit.
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control Finisher
circuit.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and their control Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
circuits.
3 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 Used to check the operation of the paper transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation unit (Operation/Display Control PWB)
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
solenoids) and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. Others
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Fusing
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the Toner supply, developing
control circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode Photo-conductor
and the control circuit.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Transfer
17 Used to check and adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit.
9 2 Used to check the operation of the sensors and detectors in the switchback section (duplex Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
section) and the control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its Duplex
control circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related Toner supply, developing
circuit.
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. MFP (ICU) PWB
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble. Fusing
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to display the print count value of each section and the operation mode.
2 Used to display the number of total mis-feed and the number of troubles.
3 Used to display the mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position.
4 Used to display the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to display the ROM version of each unit (section).
6 Used to print information on various settings, adjustments, counters, controls, and versions.
8 Used to display the number of operations (the counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and
scanning (reading).
9 Used to display the print quantity of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
10 Used to display the system configuration (options and internal hardware).
11 Used to display the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed.) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
12 Used to display the mis-feed position of the DSPF and the number of mis-feed at the position. Automatic document feeder
13 Used to display the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to display various counter values related to scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed.
80 Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit.
5 Used to clear the developer counter. Toner supply, developing
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. Photoconductor
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode (Web page) password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section, and to display the toner density Toner supply, developing
detection level.
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. Toner supply, developing
(Automatic adjustment)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit operation from the right side. Paper exit section
2 Used to set the paper type and the weight type. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print.
6 Used to set the specifications of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK
versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
35 Used to set the trouble history display mode.
38 Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the
consumable part life is over.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the
center binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set the operation specifications and functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment) in the
copy mode.
65 Used to set the limit of the staple process.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster, the continuous
enlargement copy, the card scan, and the A3 wide copy mode.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel mode.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number.
(FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain
adjustment retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry
number history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
the control circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card. Others
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
43 1 Used to make the fusing reference temperature setting 1 in each operation mode. Fusing
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each operation mode. Fusing
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing
fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing
the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing
fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing
the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4. Fusing
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Process
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor. Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Process
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density Process
sensor.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Toner supply, developing
21 Used to register the target value of the half-tone process control. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control Process
operation.
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. Toner supply, developing
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in each monochrome copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (color mode).
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (monochrome mode).
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image density (copy, image send mode)
10 Used to adjust the copy density (in each copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the copy density manually.
19 Used to set the operating conditions of document density scanning (copy, image send mode). Scanner
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
24 Copy and printer density adjustment (Auto adjustment)
32 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the document background density in the automatic copy
mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the scan image color document (copy, image send
mode).
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the output resolution in each copy mode.
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process
mode (manual adjustment).
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level in the image send mode (color, gray, auto
exposure mode).
63 Used to adjust the density in the low density area of a scan image.
64 Used to set the image process mode in each copy mode.
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub Scanner
scanning direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to install and update the Operation Manual data stored in the HDD.
5 Used to install and update the watermark data stored in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (simple adjustment).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF mode).
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF mode) (simple
adjustment).
10 Used to adjust the image off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send
mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
DSPF resist roller.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor. Automatic document feeder
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan Automatic document feeder
position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM.
(Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication
data and address data) to the USB memory.
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. HDD
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory. HDD
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory. MFP (ICU) PWB
2 Used to set the specifications of the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM. MFP (ICU) PWB
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power LSU
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). HDD
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). HDD
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). HDD
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. HDD
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. HDD
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) HDD
10 Used to delete the job log data. HDD
11 Used to delete the document filing data. HDD
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. HDD
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual and watermark area) HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading. Scanner
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Scanner
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting. Scanner
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
5 Used to check the operation panel key input. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
67 17 Printer controller reset
25 Printer density adjustment (Manual adjustment)
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone process control data).
33 Used to adjust the gamma and the density in each printer screen.
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section.
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP (ICU) PWB
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1 Section Scanner (reading)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed).
1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
panel key.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
scan resolution (operation speed). 600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s) 2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
2
2-1
1-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner matic document feed unit and the control
(reading) section and the related circuits. circuit.
Section Scanner Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
6&$11(56(1625&+(&. ation speed).
MHPS
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)

2-3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
63)$*,1*
&/26(
63)6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feed unit and
the control circuit.
Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key.
SINGLE '28%/( (;(&87(
The selected load performs the operation.
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor

2-2 SPFM DSPF transport motor
Purpose Operation test/check SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
STMPS Stamp solenoid
sors and the detectors in the document
(Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.)
feed unit section and the control circuits.

Operation/Procedure ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-

63)287387&+(&.
6380 63)0
played. 655& 63))$1
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 67036
are highlighted.
SSET DSPF installation detection

SOCD DSPF open/close detector
SCOV DSPF cover open/close detector
SPED1 DSPF document detector 1
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detector 1 (Paper entry detection)
(;(&87(
SPPD2 DSPF document pass detector 2
(Resist roller front document transport detection)
(Document scanning front document transport detection)
(Document reverse rear document transport detection)
3
SPOD DSPF paper exit detector
SPLS1 DSPF document length detector 1 (Short) 3-2
SPLS2 DSPF document length detector (Long) Purpose Operation test/check
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detector
SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
the control circuit.
Section Finisher

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure
63)6(1625&+(&.ǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂ6:'B/(1 6('B$'
66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
633' 633' 633' 633' played.
63/6 63/6 67038
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
632'
are highlighted.
<Inner finisher>
FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1")
FBED Tray paper detection
FULD Tray upper limit detection
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection
FLLD Tray lower limit detection
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2
FRLD Roller up/down detection
FBRD Belt separation detection
FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear
FJPD Alignment guide position detection
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSD Staple empty detection
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection
<4K finisher>
FDSW Door open detection
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1") FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FPHPD Punch HP detection FED Entry port paper detection
FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 FAED2 Tray 1 area detection 2
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2 FAED3 Tray 1 area detection 3
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3 FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4 FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FPPD5 Punch paper surface detection 5 FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FPPD6 Punch paper surface detection 6 FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FPDD Punch dust detection FCCD Tray approach detection
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 FPDD1 Discharged paper detection
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2 FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
<Saddle stitch finisher> FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
PDPPD1 FJPID Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
PDPPD2 FJPOD Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
PDCS FJPDD Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FPPD1 FED Paper delivery detector 1 FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FPAPHS_F FFJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSD Staple empty detection
FPAPHS_R FRJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTD Needle lead edge position detection
FATPD FAD Paper alignment tray paper detector FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FGHPS FGHPD Gripper home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
FDTPD EMPS Delivery tray paper detector FSAD Staple safety SW
FPLD FSLD Paper surface detector FSHTD Shutter open detection
FPPD2 FFPD Paper transport detector 2 FCD Upper door open detection
FSPHS FFHPD Saddle plate home position sensor FFDD Front cover open detection
FSTPD FFED Saddle exit tray paper detector F24V 24V output interruption detection
FSMRS FFE Saddle motor rotation sensor FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
FTULD FULD Tray upper limit detector FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
FTLLD FLLD Tray lower limit detector FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection
FTLMRS FLE Tray lift motor rotation sensor FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1
FSHS FSHPD Staple home position sensor FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2
FSSHPS FSTHPD Stapler shift home position sensor FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3
FSED FSD Staple empty detector FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
FSLS FSPD Staple lead edge sensor FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection
FTPS FMLD Tray position sensor FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection
FCD1 FFDD Cover detector 1 FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection
FCD2 FCD Cover detector 2 FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection
FSSW1 FFDDW Safety switch 1 FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection
FCD FJSW Finisher connection detector FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection
FSSSW1 FSSSW Staple safety switch FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection
FFL FFANLK Fan lock signal FPE Punch motor lock detection
FDRHS FNHPD Delivery roller home position sensor FPUC Punch unit connection detection
FPPD3 FSPOD Paper transport detector 3 FPHPD Punch HP detection
FSATPD FSDTPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FSSSW2 FSJPD Stapler safety switch 2 FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPHHD FPHHPD Paper hold home position sensor FPDD Punch dust detection
FSAPHS FSJHPD Saddle alignment plate home position sensor FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
FSPGHS FAHPD Saddle paper guide home position sensor
FSRHS FSR3HPD Saddle roller home position sensor

FPDD FGED Delivery detector ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
FSSHS FSSHPD Saddle staple home position sensor ),16(1625&+(&.
3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33'
FSSES FSSD Saddle staple sensor )3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36
FSSCS FSSDSW Saddle staple cover sensor )'73' )3/' )33' )63+6
FSSSHS FSSTHPD Finisher saddle stapler shift home position )673' )6056 )78/' )7//'
)7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6('
sensor )6/6 )736 )&' )&'
FPMRS FPMCK Punch motor rotation sensor )66: )&' )666: ))/
FPD FPUC Punch unit detection (connector) )'5+6 )33' )6$73' )666:
)3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6
FPCHPS FPHPD Punch home position sensor )3'' )66+6 )66(6 )66&6
FPDFS FPDD Punch dust sensor )666+6
FPHPS FPSHPD Punch unit home position sensor

FPTS FPTD Punch timing sensor
FPES1 FPSD1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FPPS FPPD Punch paper position sensor
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
3-3
FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Purpose Operation test/check FPNM Punch motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Operation/Procedure 7(67
),1/2$'&+(&.
&/26(
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 3'3*6 3'370 3'&) )370
key. 㩷 )'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 㩷 )660 )60 )7/0 )370
The selected load performs the operation. 㩷 )6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. )6'60 )3+6 )3+6
㩷
<Inner finisher>
㩷
FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid 㩷
FPDS Paddle solenoid (;(&87(
FBRS Belt separation solenoid

FRM Registration motor
FSWM Oscillation motor 3-10
FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor Purpose Adjustment
FFJM Alignment motor front Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
FRJM Alignment motor rear
Section Finisher
FSM Staple shift motor
FFSM Staple motor Operation/Procedure
FTLM Tray lift motor 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
FFANM Fan motor panel.
FPNM Punch motor 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
FPSM Punch side resist motor
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
<Saddle stitch finisher> <Inner finisher>
PDPGS FINRPS Paper pass paper gate solenoid Setting Default
PDPTM FJPM Paper pass paper transport motor range value
PDCF FJFM Paper pass cooling fan A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10
FPTM1 FFM Paper transport motor 1 ADJUST adjustment (front)
FDRLM FNM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10
FGM FGM Gripper motor adjustment (rear)
FPAM-F FFJM Paper alignment motor F C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100
adjustment
FPAM-R FRJM Paper alignment motor R
(one position at the rear)
FSSM FSM Stapler shift motor
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100
FSM FFSM Staple motor
FRONT adjustment
FPTM2 FLM Paper transport motor 2 (one position in front)
FSDM FFM2 Saddle motor E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100
FSPTM FTM Saddle paper transport motor adjustment (center position
FSPAM FSR3M Saddle paper alignment motor of two positions binding)
FSPM FSJM Saddle positioning motor F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100
FSDSM FPPM Saddle staple motor adjustment (staple pitch of
FPHS1 FSSM Paper holding solenoid 1 two positions binding)
FPHS2 FPHS Paper holding solenoid 2 G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50
FTLM FPS Tray lift motor CENTER sensor
FPM FPNM Punch motor H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50
FPSM FPSM Punch shift motor (paper transport direction)
<4K finisher is installed> <Saddle stitch finisher>
FINRPS Interface paper gate solenoid Setting Default

range value
FJPM Interface transport motor
A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50
FJFM Interface transport fan motor
POSITION adjustment
FFM Entry port transport motor
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 - 75 50
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
POSITION adjustment
FFJM Alignment motor front
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50
FRJM Alignment motor rear ADJUST adjustment (Front)
FSM Staple shift motor D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50
FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor adjustment (Rear)
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
FFSM Staple motor adjustment (one position at
FSWM Oscillation motor the rear) (When the paper
FASM Rear edge assist motor width is greater than
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid 232mm)
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
Setting Default
range value 4
F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 - 75 50
R adjustment (one position at
the rear) (When the paper 4-2
width is 232mm or less) Purpose Operation test/check
G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section
FRONT adjustment (one position in
(Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and
front) (When the paper
width is greater than their control circuits.
232mm) Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 55 50 Operation/Procedure
FRONT R adjustment (one position in
front) (When the paper The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
width is 232mm or less) played.
I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 - 55 50 The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
adjustment (two positions are highlighted.
at the center)
<Desk>
J STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 35 - 62 50
adjustment (two positions DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection
in pitch) DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection
K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 - 65 50 DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection
CENTER DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 - 60 50 DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
adjustment
DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50
ST_POS adjustment
N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50
adjustment
DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust- DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection
ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi- DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection
tion adjustment" DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection
The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
folding position adjustment can be executed in the system DCSS21 Desk 2 rear edge detection 1
setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set- DCSS22 Desk 2 rear edge detection 2
ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation. DCSS23 Desk 2 rear edge detection 3
If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set DCSS24 Desk 2 rear edge detection 4
to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection
setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
setting 5.0mm) <A4 LCC>
In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad- LPFD LCC transport sensor
dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu- LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
lation, the above trouble will not occur. LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
<4K finisher>
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
Default LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
Item Display Item Set range
value LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10 L24VM LCC24V power monitor
adjustment (front) LLSW LCC upper limit SW
B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 - 106 100 LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 - 106 100

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
adjustment (one 7(67 &/26(
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
position in front) '&6, '3)' '/8' '3('
D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 '&63' '&66 '&66 '&66

'&66 '&6, '3)' '/8'
CENTER adjustment '3(' '&63' '&66 '&66
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50 '&66 '&66 '6:B'6.
adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6$''/(326,7,21
$˖ %˖ ˖)2/',1*326,7,21

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)5217$'-867
'˖ ˖5($5$'-867
(˖ ˖67$3/(5($5
)˖ ˖67$3/(5($55
*˖ ˖67$3/()5217
+˖ ˖67$3/()52175
,˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
-˖ ˖67$3/(3,7&+
.˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
/˖ ˖381&++2/(
2.
4-3

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section '75& ˖'75&2))
/75&
(Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits.
˖/75&2))
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport

Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
<Desk>
DPFM Desk main motor
DLUM1
DPUC1
Desk 1 lift-up motor
Desk 1 paper feed clutch
5
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch 5-1
DTRC Desk transport clutch Purpose Operation test/check
<A4 LCC> Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
LPFM LCC transport motor cuit.
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
Section Operation unit
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
(Operation/Display Control PWB)
LTRC LCC transport clutch Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX 
㩷
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
㩷
'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
'3)0 '/80 '38& '/80
'38& '75&
checked.
ǂǂNO.05-01
ǂǂǂSIMULATION
7(67
(;(&87(
4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the paper
transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
Operation/Procedure
[Check the ON operation]
Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
[Check the OFF operation]
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
button Content
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC LCC transport clutch
5-2
6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
6-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Operation/Procedure
the paper transport system (clutches and
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel solenoids) and the control circuits.
key.
Operation/Procedure
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10
times at the interval of 500ms. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater The selected load performs the operation.
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
the frames. Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
HL_UM Main heater lamp (HL MAIN) there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
HL_US Sub heater lamp (HL SUB) sound.
HL_UW Warm-up heater lamp (HL UW)
Section Item/Display Content
Transport/ PFM Transport motor
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( process RRM Registration motor
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
+/B80 +/B86
+/B8: POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
FUM Fusing motor
CPFM Tray paper feed motor
OSM Shifter motor
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch 1
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
PSPS Separation solenoid
Paper feed CLUM1 Tray 1 lift-up motor
CPUC1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch
(;(&87(
CLUM2 Tray 2 lift-up motor
CPUC2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
5-3 MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
Purpose Operation test/check MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner

lamp and the control circuit.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Section Scanner (reading) )(('287387&+(&.

3)0 550 320) 3205
Operation/Procedure
)80 &3)0 260 &3)&
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
&3)& 3636 &/80 &38&
key.
&/80 &38& 038& 03)6
03*6
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Display Content
OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp (;(&87(
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp

6-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&. Purpose Operation test/check
2&&23</$03 '63)&23</$03
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
and its control circuit.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
(;(&87(
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method:
7-6
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation Purpose Setting
sound. Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
cycle.
POFM12 Paper exit cooling fan motor 12
Section
OZFM Ozone fan motor Operation/Procedure
PSFM Power cooling fan motor 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor key.
RDCFM Suction fan motor 2) Press [OK] key.
POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
MFP FAN (CPUFM) Controller fan motor
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
)$1/2$'6(783
32)0 2=)0

36)0 /68)0 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5'&)0 32)0
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
0)3)$1&38)0
$˖ ˖&<&/(ǂ7,0(˄6(&˅
$˖
˷̚˹
$// (;(&87(
2.
7
7-8
7-1 Purpose Information display/print
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Section Fusing
aging.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key. warm-up is displayed
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. 7(67 &/26(
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$*,1*7(676(77,1*
$*,1* ,17(59$/ 7-12
0,6)(('ǂ',6$%/( )86,1*ǂ',6$%/(
:$5083ǂ',6$%/( '9ǂ&+(&.ǂ',6$%/( Purpose Operation test/check
6+$',1*ǂ',6$%/( &&'ǂ*$,1ǂ)5((
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
setting (for aging operation)
Operation/Procedure
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range: 0 - 255)
(;(&87(
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
8-2

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment
25,*,1$/66(77,1*
$˖ ˖25,*,1$/6 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
$˖ the main charger grid voltage in each
˷̚˹
printer mode and the control circuit.
Section Photo-conductor
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
2.
saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.
Setting Default
8 Item/Display Content
range value
A GB_K K charging/grid bias set value 0 - 850 650
8-1

Purpose Adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of

0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖*%B.
the developing voltage in each print mode $˖
and the control circuit. ˷̚˹
Section Toner supply, developing

Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
saved.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
tion is terminated.
Setting Default
range value
A DVB_K K developing bias set value 0-700 496
8-6

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖'9%B. Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
$˖ the transport voltage and the control circuit.
˷̚˹
Section Transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
tion is terminated.

range 36 PPM MODEL 45/50 PPM MODEL
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/White Standard Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX paper mode Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
D TC HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 113 129
F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 - 255 113 129
G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 161 161
H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 161 161
I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 - 255 113 129
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;

'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
$'86(1625&+(&.
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
'6:B$'8 $33' $33'
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.
8-17
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of

the separation bias voltage and the control
circuit. 9-3
Section Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key. the paper reverse section (duplex section)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. and its control circuit.
Enter the default value specified on the following list. Section Duplex
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
set value is output for 30 sec. key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion is terminated. The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
Setting Default
Item/Display Content tion is terminated.
range value
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
(Front surface)
ADUM_U ADU motor upper
B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
(Back surface)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'8/2$'&+(&.
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$'80B/ $'80B8 $'8*6 㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘
$˖ ˖3/9)$&(
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&.
˷̚˹
(;(&87(
(;(&87( 2.
9 10
9-2 10-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the sensors Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
and detectors in the switchback section supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the
(duplex section) and the control circuit. related circuit.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport Section Toner supply, developing
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
played.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
are highlighted.
tion is terminated.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges 7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing

unit, resulting in over toner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
tridge installed, the over toner state may be canceled by
making several background copies.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(5&/87&+$&7,9$7,21
7'6& 710B& 710B0 710B<
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
15
15--
Purpose Cancel

(;(&87(

Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trou-
ble.
Section LCC
13 Operation/Procedure
13-- 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Purpose Cancel

Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
Section MFP (ICU) PWB

Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
16
16--
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
14 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
14--
Purpose Cancel
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" 87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
trouble.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
17 22
17-- 22-1
Purpose Cancel Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Function (Purpose) Used to display the print count value of
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport each section and the operation mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
Display
Target Default range/

Display Content
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
counter value No. of
7(67 &/26(
3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
quantity (BW) quantity of black
and white
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use 0 Max. 8
quantity quantity of black
and white
TOTAL (COL) Total use 0 Max. 8
quantity of color
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
copy counter
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
filing document filing
21 print counter
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
other counter
21-1 Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 Max. 8
Purpose Setting counter ALL counter (Total)
Fuser unit FUSER WEB Fuser web 0 0-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
SEND cleaning send 65535
Section counter
Operation/Procedure FUSER WEB Fuser web print 0 Max. 8
UNIT counter
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 - 740
panel.
DAY web unit
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) meter number of drum (%) (1%
rotations (K) unit)
Default Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
Item/Display Content Setting range
value life meter number of (%) (1%
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 150K/ developer unit)
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 200K rotations (K)
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free

Default value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Item &2817(5',63/$<
Group A Group B 727$/287%:
A 150 200 727$/%:

727$/&2/
&23<%:
Group Destination 35,17%:
Group A Japan – – – – '2&),/%:ǂ

27+(5%:
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch AB_B Europe 0$,17(1$1&($//
U.K. AUS. AB_A China – )86(5:(%6(1'
)86(5:(%81,7
)86(5:(%'$<

'580/,)(.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( '(9(/,)(.

0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783
$˖ ˖0$,17(1$1&(ǂ&2817(5˄727$/˅
$˖ %˖
˷̚˹
2.
22-2

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Information display
7(67
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/
Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of total mis- )/))
feed and the number of troubles. )/))

))+(
Section 8)/(
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter

TROUBLE Trouble counter
22-5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$< Purpose Information display
0$&+,1(-$0
563)'63)-$0 Function (Purpose) Used to display the ROM version of each
7528%/( unit (section).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.

S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December
are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
22-3 ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
Purpose Information display LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position and PCU PCU
the number of mis-feed at the position. SCU SCU
Section SPF DSPF
Operation/Procedure FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one DESK Desk unit
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher

PUNCH Punch unit
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( NIC NIC
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
POWER-CON Power controller
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1 E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&& WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6
ESCP ESCP font ROM
)'230)7
PDL PDL font ROM
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section)
ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
61
,&80$,1 1,&
,&8%227 32:(5&21
/$1*8$*( (0$18$/
22-4
*5$3+,& :$7(50$5.
3&8 (6&3
Purpose Information display 6&8 3'/

63) $&5(0$,1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the trouble (self diag) his- )$;0$,1121( $&5('$7$
tory. )$;0$,1121(

'(6.121(
Section /&&
Operation/Procedure ),1,6+(5
381&+
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22-6
Purpose Information print
Function (Purpose) Used to print information on various set-
tings, adjustments, counters, controls, and
versions.
Section
Operation/Procedure
22-9
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. Purpose Information display
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) Function (Purpose) Used to display the print quantity of each
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. paper feed section.
Print list
Item/Display Print content Operation/Procedure
mode
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version, counter data, etc. The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
2 —
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
3 Data related to the process control
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
1). TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)

MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
'$7$35,1702'(
$˖ ˖'$7$3$77(51 MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
$˖ LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
˷̚˹
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$<
75$<
75$<
75$<
75$<
(;(&87( 2. 0)7727$/
0)7+($9<
0)72+3
0)7(19
22-8 /&&
$'8

Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of operations
(the counter value) of the finisher, the
DSPF, and scanning (reading).
Section
22-10
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
Function (Purpose) Used to display the system configuration
related counters are displayed.
(options and internal hardware).
SPF Document feed quantity Section
SCAN Number of times of scan Operation/Procedure
STAPLER Staple counter
The system configuration is displayed.
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter (The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter played.)
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
Device Model name Content
COVER Cover open/close counter
MACHINE MX-M283N Main unit
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
MX-M363N
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
MX-M423: (Japan)
(* hour * minutes)
MX-M423U:
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section
(Except Japan)
(* hour * minutes)
MX-M423F
MX-M453N
MX-M453U
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$< MX-M503N
63)
MX-M503: (Japan)
6&$1
MX-M503U:
67$3/(5
381&+(5
(Except Japan)
67$03 MX-M503F
6$''/(67$3/(5 SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
6$''/(9)2/'
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
&29(5
+3B21 DESK MX-DEX8 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer

2&/$037,0( MX-DEX9 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
'63)/$037,0(
LCC MX-LCX1 A4 Large capacity tray (side LCC)

Device Model name Content
22-11
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module
MX-PNX1B
MX-PNX1C Function (Purpose) Used to display the use frequency of send/
MX-PNX1D receive of FAX.
MX-PNX5A (Only when FAX is installed.)
MX-PNX5B Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
MX-PNX5C
Operation/Procedure
MX-PNX5D
MX-PNX6A The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
MX-PNX6B
are displayed.
MX-PNX6C
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
MX-PNX6D
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
MX-FN11 Finisher (4K)
SEND TIME FAX send time
FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
FAX MEMORY AR-MM9 FAX extension memory (8MB)
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
NETWORK MX-NSX1/ Network scanner expansion kit
SCANNER STANDARD
MX-NSX2 Network scanner expansion kit
(Japan only) (Network Scan Tool Lite) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)$;&2817(5',63/$<
PRINTER MX-PB10/ Printer expansion kit )$;ǂ287387
STANDARD )$;ǂ6(1'
MX-PB11/ Printer expansion kit with hard )$;ǂ5(&(,9('

6(1'ǂ,0$*(6
STANDARD drive 6(1'ǂ7,0(
PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit 5(&(,9('ǂ7,0(
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit $&5ǂ6(1'
SECURITY MX-FR14 Data security kit (commercial

version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity

NIC STANDARD NIC
22-12
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
FONT AR-PF3 PCL kanji font kit Purpose Information display
(Japan only) Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position of the
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit DSPF and the number of mis-feed at the
ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication position.
("STANDARD" for module
North America)
EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module Operation/Procedure
VENDOR CV-1SA Coin-vendor The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one
(Japan only) (for serial communication) up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
CR-1 (Japan only) Prepaid-vendor * For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in
ACRE MX-EBX3 Enhanced compression kit [6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE.
(ACRE)
(*): Displayed in the OSA model only.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$&+,1(6<67(0
0$&+,1( 0;01 36 0;3.;
63) 67$1'$5' ;36 0;38;
67$03 $568 6(&85,7< 0;)58

'(6. 0;'(; $,0 0;$0;

/&& 0;/&; 6'5$06<6 ˆˆˆˆˆ0%

381&+(5 0;31;$ 6'5$0,&8 ˆˆˆˆˆ0%

),1,6+(5 0;)1; +'' ˆˆˆˆˆ0%

)$; 0;);; 1,& 67$1'$5'

)$; 121( %$5&2'( $53)

)$;0(025< $500 )217 121(

+$1'6(7 121( ,17(51(7)$; 0;):;
1(7:25.ǂ6&$11(5 0;16; $&0 0;$0;

35,17(5 0;3% ($0 0;$0;
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use quantity of the pro-
cess section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) 22-90
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) Purpose Information print
(K)
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K Section
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) Operation/Procedure
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
1) Change the display with [] [] key.
(cm) (K)
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST

PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$< PS FONT LIST
'580&75*.
PS KANJI FONT LIST
'5805$1*(.
'5807851.
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
'580'$<.ǂ NIC PAGE
'(9(&75*.ǂ Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
'(9(5$1*(.
list (*) GROUP LIST
'(9(7851.
'(9('$<.
PROGRAM LIST
721(502725. MEMORY BOX LIST
721(57851.
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
22-19 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
Function (Purpose) Used to display various counter values ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
related to scan - image send. Receive YES/NO ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
number table
Section
Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
Operation/Procedure allow address
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner domain table
Change the display with [] [] key. To network INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
counter (B/W scan job) Transfer list
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
counter (Color scan job) Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
OUTPUT * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page model, this setting is invalid.
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
RECEIVE /,6735,17
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send $//&867206(77,1*/,67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send 3&/,17(51$/)217/,67 3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67

36)217/,67 36.$1-,)217/,67
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 36(;7(1'(')217/,67 1,&3$*(
SMB SEND Number of SMB send ,1',9,'8$//,67 *5283/,67
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 352*5$0/,67 0(025<%2;/,67

$//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) $'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) $'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
$//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67 $17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67
$17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$<
1(76&125*B%:
1(76&125*B&/
,17(51(7)$;287387
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
,17(51(7)$;6(1'
0$,/&2817(5
)73&2817(5
60%6(1'
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% &
6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/

23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Information print Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
paper jam and mis-feed. ble counter.
Section Section
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The target counter is cleared.
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'(
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
SPF DSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
0$&+,1( 63) 7528%/(
(;(&87(
23-80
Purpose Information print
Function (Purpose) Used to output the operation data of paper
feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
transport section.
24-2
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear/Reset
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
in the paper feed and transport section. Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the Operation/Procedure
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- 3) Press [YES] key.
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
operation or load operation name) TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
STANDARD Standard value (ms) TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
final paper TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
on the final paper MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list ADU ADU paper feed counter
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
75$< 75$< 75$< 75$<
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)7(19
/&& $'8
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

(;(&87(
24-3 24-5
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.
scan (reading) unit counter. Section Toner supply, developing
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared. NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically.
SPF DSPF document feed counter
SCAN Scan counter Developer cartridge print counter (K)
STAPLER Staple counter Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
PUNCHER Puncher counter Number of day that used developer (Day) K
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter

SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
COVER Cover open/close counter '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
& 0 <
HP_ON HP detection count .
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time

DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
+3B21 2&/$037,0( '63)/$037,0( $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-6
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( Section
Operation/Procedure
24-4 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Purpose Data clear/Reset 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the 3) Press [YES] key.
printer counters of the transfer unit and the The target counter is cleared.
fusing unit.
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
Section
Operation/Procedure

1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. &23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25
3) Press [YES] key.

MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)

FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web send counter
FUSER WEB Fuser web print counter
FUSER WEB DAY Fuser web unit use day
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5
0$,17(1$1&($// )86(5:(%6(1' )86(5:(% )86(5:(%'$<
)86(581,7/ ( )86(5'$<8 )86(5'$</ (
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-7 FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)
Purpose Data clear/Reset FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter.
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
Section Photoconductor SEND TIME FAX send time
Operation/Procedure RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications

3) Press [YES] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The target counter is cleared. )$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;ǂ287387 )$;ǂ6(1' )$;ǂ5(&(,9(' 6(1'ǂ,0$*(6
Drum cartridge print counter (K) 6(1'ǂ7,0( 5(&(,9('ǂ7,0( $&5ǂ6(1'
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)

Number of day that used drum (Day) K

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'580&75*&2817(5&/($5
. & 0 <
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-15
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( scan mode and the image send.
Section
24-9 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear/Reset 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter. 3) Press [YES] key.
Section The target counter is cleared.
Operation/Procedure NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. counter (B/W scan job)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR scan job)
3) Press [YES] key.
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
The target counter is cleared. OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) SEND OUTPUT
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( SEND
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5
35,17%: 27+(5%:
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
,17(51(7)$;ǂ287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'ǂ287387
24-10 ,17(51(7)$;ǂ5(&(,9( ,17(51(7ǂ)$;ǂ6(1'

0$,/&2817(5 )73&2817(5
Purpose Data clear/Reset 60%6(1' 86%&17
75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B%:
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. 6&$172+''B&/
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

3) Press [YES] key.
24-30 TCD_K Toner density detection level K
Purpose Data clear/Reset TCV_K Toner density sensor output voltage level K
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass- NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
word. simulation.
Section If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
Operation/Procedure installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble.
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is 7&'B.
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin" 7&9B.
(default).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
/2: 0,''/( (;(&87(
25-2
Purpose Setting
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
24-31 matic adjustment)
Purpose Data clear/Reset Section Toner supply, developing
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode (Web Operation/Procedure
page) password. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
Operation/Procedure
displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
2) Press [YES] key.
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
The service mode password is initialized. trol level.
If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
set the password to "service" (default).
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( erence toner density level is not set normally.
Do not execute this simulation unless new Developer material has
6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
been installed. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over-

tone may occur, causing a trouble.
Adjustment result data display
AT DEVE ADJ _K Toner density adjustment value
AT DEVE VO _K Toner density sensor control voltage level
Data display during execution

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
TCD_K Toner density sensor detection level K
TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
25
Display in case of an error
25-1 Error display Content Details of content
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77, or
sensor control voltage level over 207
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177, or sensor
oping section, and to display the toner den- control voltage level less than 52
sity detection level. EE-EC EC abnormality The sampling level in the automatic
Section Toner supply, developing toner density adjustment is outside of
128 10.
Operation/Procedure
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 6,=(6(783
$7'(9($'-B. /&& ˖ h $ %
$7'(9(92B. */%66(7 ˖ *5$0 /%6
. & 0 < (;(&87(

26-3
26 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
26-1 (Japan only)
Purpose Setting Section Auditor
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit operation from Operation/Procedure
the right side. Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Section Paper exit section
Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content
value
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
EC1 EC1 mode operation
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
Item/Display Content AUDITOR vendor is used.
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can be
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
controlled.)
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode communicating

with the parallel I/F (for
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( DocuLyzer) (Japan only)
5,*+775$<6(783
$˖ ˖<(612 VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
$˖ (*1)
˷̚˹ VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
P OTHER NOT USED
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print
2. PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
performed in the duplex print
mode.
If the remaining money
26-2 expires during continuous
Purpose Setting printing, the sheets in the
machine are discharged
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper type and the weight
without being printed on the
type. back surfaces.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport OFF Continuous printing is not
Operation/Procedure performed in the duplex print
mode. (The remaining
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel. amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
LCC 0 8.5 x 11 the printing process.)
1 A4 If the remaining money
2 B5 expires during printing, the
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM sheet is discharged without
1 LBS printing on the back surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
Default
Item/Display Content 26-5
value
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_ Purpose Setting
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x
sensor. 17") print.
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear
Section
sensor. Operation/Procedure
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
passes the paper exit sensor
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
in the main unit, the right tray,
and the after process unit. 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF 3) Press [OK] key.
CONTROL the image send mode. The set value in step 2) is saved.
OFF There is no restriction in the
image send mode. Item/Display Content Default value
PRINTER MODE1 PRINTER CONTROL MODE A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
CONTROL MODE1 (All the items of 1 B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
OUTSIDE AUDITOR can be C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
selected.)
MODE2 PRINTER CONTROL
MODE2 (The item of
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
OUTSIDE AUDITOR must 7(67
$h&281783
be the value of "P VENDOR $˖ ˖727$/%:
1" and the other buttons are $˖ %˖ ˖0$,17(%:
gray out.) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'(9%:
MODE3 PRINTER CONTROL

MODE3 (The item of
OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
be the value of "P OTHER"
and the other buttons are
gray out.)
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.

2.
(*2) Details of the vendor mode

Completion of Insufficient Completion of
the specified money during the specified 26-6
VENDER quantity. copy job quantity.
Purpose Setting
MODE (Money No money (No money
remaining) remaining remaining) Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the desti-
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 nation.
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 Section
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation/Procedure
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 3
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Operation 1: 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, The selected set content is saved.
which can be changed in the system setting.
Operation 2: U.S.A. United States of America
Auto clear is not made. CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations
Operation 3:
JAPAN Japan
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
EUROPE Europe
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( U.K. United Kingdom
$8',7256(783
AUS. Australia
%8,/7,1$8',725 ˖ 3 (&
2876,'($8',725 ˖ 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
327+(5 9(1'25(; 9(1'25(;08/7, CHINA China
6B9(1'25
'2&$'- ˖ 21 2))
3)$'- ˖ 21 2))

9(1'2502'( ˖ 02'( 02'( 02'( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2817837,0,1* ˖ )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287 '(67,1$7,216(783
,06&21752/ ˖ 21 2)) 86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
35,17(5&21752/ ˖ 02'( 02'( 02'(

$%B% (8523( 8. $86
$%B$ &+,1$

(;(&87(

26-10 26-30
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
scanner. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
Section standards).
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
0 Control allowed
1 Control inhibited
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) 2) Press [OK] key.

* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783 to the power frequency, etc.
$˖ ˖75,$/02'(˄<(612˅
$˖ U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
˷̚˹
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
2. $˖ ˖<(612
$˖
˷̚˹
26-18
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Section 2.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-35
3) Press [OK] key. Purpose Setting
The set value in step 2) is saved. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble history display
mode.
Default
Item Display Content Section
value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited. Operation/Procedure
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
0 0 Only once display.
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
1 Any time display.
2) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(56$9(02'(6(783 The set value in step 1) is saved.
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5<(612
˷̚˹

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
$˖ ˖21&($1<
$˖
˷̚˹
2.
2.
26-38

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
$˖ ˖<(612
Function (Purpose) Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" $˖
when the maintenance timing is reached or ˷̚˹
the consumable part life is over.

Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
2.
Default
value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
26-49
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0 Purpose Setting
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
1: STOP) (Print Continue) mode.
1 Continue/Stop setting of print
Section
when the fusing web is end
(Print Stop) Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)

When the setting is changed, the paper feed interval in print or
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is
(1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1*
$˖ ˖0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
changed accordingly.
$˖ %˖ ˖)86(5:(%(1'˖&217,18(˖6723
LOW: The paper feed interval is long. (Normal mode)
˷̚˹
HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. (when a paper jam occurs,
the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW
mode.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23<63(('02'(6(783
3267&$5' ˖ /2: +,*+
2.
26-41
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-50
Purpose Setting
0 AMS Disable Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation specifications
1 AMS Enable and functions.
2) Press [OK] key. Section
The set value in step 1) is saved. Operation/Procedure
<Default value of each destination> 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
Default
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) Item/Display Content
value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
limited. to *2
1 Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A

Destination Item A ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
USA 1 )81&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖%:5(9(56(<(6
CANADA 1 $˖ %˖ ˖),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
INCH 1 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)(('75$<&2/25<(6
JAPAN 1
AB_B 1
EUROPE 1
UK 0
AUS 1
AB_A 1
CHINA 1
2.
(*2)
Target Target paper setting
26-52
paper 0 1
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation Purpose Setting
saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are is stopped Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
stitch discharged continuously. When, when the (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
finisher however, different kinds of paper exit tray or not.
sheets are mixed and full, 500
discharged and less than 30 sheets, or Section
sheets of a kind are 94mm height Operation/Procedure
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is
operation is performed similarly detected.
to that of setting value "1".
0 Count up
Label The operation is stopped when
1 No count up
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When, 2) Press [OK] key.
however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and The set value in step 1) is saved.
discharged and less than 100
sheets of a kind are Destination Default
continuously discharged, the U.S.A 0 (Counted)
operation is performed similarly CANADA 0 (Counted)
to that of setting value "1". INCH 0 (Counted)
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are is stopped AB_B 0 (Counted)
discharged continuously. When, when the EUROPE 0 (Counted)
however, different kinds of paper exit tray U.K. 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
discharged and less than 10 sheets, or
AB_A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are 33.5mm
continuously discharged, the height of CHINA 0 (Counted)
operation is performed similarly paper exit is
to that of setting value "1". detected.

Label The operation is stopped when ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are $%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783

$˖ ˖<(612
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When, $˖
however, different kinds of ˷̚˹
sheets are mixed and
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is performed similarly
to that of setting value "1".
4K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation
finisher envelope 100 sheets of a same kind are is stopped
discharged continuously. When, when the 2.
however, different kinds of paper exit tray

discharged and less than 100 sheets, or 26-53
sheets of a kind are 94mm height Purpose Setting
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is
operation is performed similarly detected.
Function (Purpose) Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto
to that of setting value "1". calibration (gradation, density adjustment)
Label The operation is stopped when in the copy mode.
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are Section
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
Operation/Procedure
however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
sheets of a kind are 0 Inhibit (Default)
continuously discharged, the 1 Allow
operation is performed similarly
to that of setting value "1". 2) Press [OK] key.
26-69
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21 Purpose Setting
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
˷̚˹ toner near end.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
2. The set value in step 2 is saved.
Setting Default
range value
26-65
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
Purpose Setting PREPARATION message is
Function (Purpose) Used to set the limit of the staple process. (0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
1 The toner preparation
Section message is not
Operation/Procedure displayed.
Use the touch key to set. B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1
END message is
[Target paper size]
(0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
<LIMIT SHEETS> 1 The toner near end
A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR message is not
<LIMIT SHEETS(L)> displayed.
C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2
(A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8K) TONER END
* When mixed sizes of a same width are loaded, the setting con- 2 Operation STOP in
forms to the LIMIT SHEETS(L) setting. TONER END
3 Operation STOP in
Set Setting Default TONER END
Item Content
value range value D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 3
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of stapling: 30 or 50 50 COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
SHEETS Max. 30 Enable after TONER
50 Number of sheets of stapling: NEAR END.
Max. 50 E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
LIMIT ON Inner finisher: ON or ON ALART status send of E-mail
COPIES 30 copies for all sizes OFF alert
1K saddle finisher: When the toner
50 copies for all sizes preparation message
4K finisher: A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K is displayed (in near
 100 copies near toner end)
Other than the above 1 Condition for Low
 50 copies status send of E-mail
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Not alert
Limited When near toner end
LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of stapling: 25 or 30 25
SHEETS Max. 25 <List of Default values and set values for each destination>
(L) 30 Number of sheets of stapling:
Set value
Max. 30
Destination Toner preparation
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON Toner near end message
message
COPIES saddle staple: Limited (*1) OFF
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
OFF Number of sets loaded in the
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
saddle staple: Not Limited
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
* LIMIT SHEETS: The 4K finisher is fixed to 50 sheets. JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
* LIMIT SHEETS(L): Valid only for the 1K saddle finisher. AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
The 4K finisher is fixed to 30 sheets. EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
*1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) /
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
10-15 sheets (10 sets)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7 (Contents of set items)
/,0,76+((76 ˖
/,0,7&23,(6 ˖ 21 2)) A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
/,0,76+((76˄/ ˖ when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
6$''/(&23,(6 ˖ 21 2))
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
the setting value.

D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets) '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the $˖ %˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%. ˷̚˹
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper

size and the print ratio.)
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed

1: Print Disable after toner near end
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
3: 50 sheets print Enable after toner near end 2.

26-74
NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
Purpose Setting
printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D Section
is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this Operation/Procedure
case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
2) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 Setting Default
7(67 &/26(
721(51($5(1'6(77,1* range value
$˖ ˖721(535(3$5$7,21<(612
$˖ A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
%˖ ˖721(51($5(1'<(612
MODE OSA trial mode.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖721(5(1'
'˖ ˖721(5(1'&2817
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
(˖ ˖721(5(0$,/$/$57 canceled.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
$˖ ˖26$75,$/02'(˄<(6˖12˅
$˖
˷̚˹
2.
26-73
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
removal amount) in the poster, the continu-
ous enlargement copy, the card scan, and 2.
the A3 wide copy mode.

Section 26-78
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. operation panel mode.
3) Press [OK] key.
Section
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
Operation/Procedure
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
Setting The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
Item/Display Content Default value
range
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(M) (shade delete amount: 2) Press [SET] key.
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment 7(67
523(3$66:25'6(77,1*
(S) delete quantity) amount: 35(6(17˖
adjustment 0.1mm/step) ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7
27-2
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
27-1
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Purpose Setting ber. (FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- Section
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Operation/Procedure [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
0 Not detection
1 Detection The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [OK] key. USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
The set value in step 1) is saved. SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
HOST may be continuously made every time when
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/( the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
$˖ ˖',6$%/(<(6
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
$˖ HOST.
˷̚˹

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
35(6(17˖
ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7
86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
2.
3$86(
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send 0-3 0 1
in NE-B mode
NEB2 Send/Receive in 1
NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for send 2
in NE-F mode
NFB2 Send/Receive in 3
NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0

27-7
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
)66)81&7,216(783
$˖ ˖)66ǂ02'(1(%
$˖ %˖ ˖5(75<B%86<
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7,0(50,187(B%86< (FSS function)
'˖ ˖5(75<B(5525
(˖ ˖7,0(50,187(B(5525
Section
)˖ ˖721(5ǂ25'(5ǂ7,0,1*. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
2.
A FSS 0 FSS function enable

FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
27-5 B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
Purpose Setting 1 Alert call disable
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. *1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
(FSS function) Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
Section *2 Alert send timing
Operation/Procedure
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. Service call When pressing Service call.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. reached.
2) Press [SET] key. Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7$*6(77,1*
35(6(17˖

ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
$˖ ˖)81&7,21<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖$/(57<(612
˷̚˹
2.
27-6
Purpose Setting
27-9
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
(FSS function) Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
Operation/Procedure
gain adjustment retry number.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. (FSS function)
0 Allow (Default) Section
1 Inhibit Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
3) Press [OK] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783
$˖ ˖<(612
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
$˖ transport time between sensors
˷̚˹ (Main unit) (50: Default)
B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(DSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
RETRY adjustment retry number
(11: Default)
2.
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
27-11
occurrence of continuous jams
Alert judgment threshold value for Purpose Information display
occurrence of continuous jams Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
(Setting of the number of times of
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
continuous jams as the alert for
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
continuous jams) (Default: 10
times) Section
Operation/Procedure
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
Display Item
Occurrence Retry Content

Item name
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
date (Display) number
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17 LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial communication
$˖ ˖)(('7,0( 99:99:99 retry number history
$˖ %˖ ˖)(('7,0(
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits display
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖*$,1$'-8670(175(75<
99:99:99 * For DSPF1/DSPF2,
'˖ ˖-$0$/(57
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits only the DSPF model
99:99:99 is displayed.
DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF1 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF2 99/99/99 8 digits
2.
99:99:99
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
27-10 FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history ADJ1 99:99:99 adjustment retry history
information. (FSS function) SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ2 99:99:99
Section
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
Operation/Procedure ADJ3 99:99:99
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
2) Press [YES] key. ADJ4 99:99:99
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
ADJ5 99:99:99
Target history Serial communication retry number history DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits DSPF gain adjustment
ADJ1 99:99:99 retry history
High density process control error history
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits (Only the DSPF model is
Half tone process control error history
ADJ1 99:99:99 displayed.)
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only)
ADJ2 99:99:99
Paper transport time between sensors
ADJ3 99:99:99
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ADJ4 99:99:99
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5
ADJ5 99:99:99

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
'$7(5(75<
/68
/68
'(6.
'(6.
),1,6+(5
),1,6+(5
'63)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( '63)
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-

27-12

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Information display 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
'$7((5525&2'(
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density and the +9B(55
+9B(55
half-tone process control error history. (FSS +9B(55
+9B(55
Function) +9B(55
+B721((55
Section +B721((55
+B721((55
+B721((55
Operation/Procedure +B721((55
The high density and the half-tone process control error history are
displayed.
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1

H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
27-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] key.
Code Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time passing
sensors time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
DSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)

27-14

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32'
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection 32' 7)' 7)' +326
test mode. '6:B5 '6:B& '6:B) 71)

71%2;
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
2) Press [OK] key.
30-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
)667(6702'(6(783
&/26(
$˖
$˖ ˖&211(&7,217(6702'(212))

˷̚˹
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
Operation/Procedure
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
2.
lighted.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection

* For setting the FSS function connection test mode, only DIS-
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection
ABLE to ENABLE can be made. (ENABLE to DISABLE cannot
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
be made.)
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
30 CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3
30-1 CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
sors and the detectors in other than the CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1
paper feed section and the control circuits. CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3
Operation/Procedure CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
played.
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
lighted. MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
PPD1 Resist pre-detection

PPD2 Resist detection

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
POD1 Fusing rear detection 75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
&66 &66 &66 &66
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection &66 &66 &66 &66
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection 03)' 03/' 0723 0723
03('
HPOS Shifter home detection
DSW_R Right door open/close detection
DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
TNF Waste toner full detection
TNBOX Waste toner near end detection

33 The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
33-1 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card 5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
reader sensor and the control circuit. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Others The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
Operation/Procedure 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
played. The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
lighted. displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
CARD Card Yes/No detection MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
DATA Card number signal detection P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&$5' '$7$ &/2&.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

(;(&87(
33-2
Purpose Data clear/Reset 40-7
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Purpose Setting
card.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
Section Others manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Operation/Procedure Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
2) Press [YES] key. 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
The ID (IDM) information of Felica card in the HDD is deleted. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( The set value in step 2) is saved.
&$5',''$7$&/($5
Default
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231
(A4)
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1*
$˖ ˖0$;326,7,21
$˖
40
%˖ ˖3326,7,21
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3326,7,21
'˖ ˖0,1326,7,21
40-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport 2.
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
41-3
41
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
41-1
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
Operation/Procedure
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
Section Others sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
played. Item/Display Content Detection level range
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
lighted. PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
Close: Highlighted PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
sensor status Document present: Highlighted PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3' 3'6(1625',63/$<
2&6:
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @

41-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor 43
detection level.
Section Others 43-1
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without Function (Purpose) Used to make the fusing reference temper-
place a document on the document table. ature setting 1 in each operation mode.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
Section Fusing
2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
Operation/Procedure
[EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
3) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
(;(&87(
Default value
Setting 36 PPM MODEL 45/50 PPM MODEL
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
B HL_US READY TH_US set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_UM set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_US set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation start 30 - 200 155 155 165 165 165 165 175 175
TH_UM set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 255 5
complete time
G WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 17
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 195
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 190 195
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 180
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 180
L HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195
M HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 195
N HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
O HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
P PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set 30 - 200 165 165 185 185 175 175 195 195
value
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
R HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
S LO_WARMUP_TIME Q - R applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
U HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
V HI_WARMUP_TIME T - U applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
<Code descriptions>

TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(036(783)253$3(5

$˖ ˖+/B80ǂ5($'<
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B865($'<
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:
'˖ ˖+/B863/$,13$3(5%:
<List of destination groups> (˖ ˖:$5083)8021+/B807

)˖ ˖:$5083)802))+/B807
Group Destination *˖ ˖:$5083(1'7,0(
Group A Japan China AB_B +˖ ˖+/B80+($9<3$3(5
,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<3$3(5
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+33$3(5
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe .˖ ˖+/B862+33$3(5
/˖ ˖+/B80(193$3(5
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m 2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each operation mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
3) Press [OK] key. trouble may be occur.
Default value
Setting 36 PPM MODEL 45/50PPM MODEL
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white plain paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white heavy paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(036(783)253$3(5

$˖ ˖+/B80ǂ3/$,13$3(5%:'83
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B863/$,13$3(5%:'83
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17

'˖ ˖+/B80ǂ+($9<3$3(5%:'83
<List of destination groups> (˖ ˖+/B86+($9<3$3(5%:'83
)˖ ˖+($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m 2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
43-20
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
range Group A Group B
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80 80
H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
L HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
M HL_US ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
N HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
O HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
P PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(03$'-8670(17//

$˖ ˖+/B805($'<//
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B865($'<//
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%://

'˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%://
<List of destination groups> (˖ ˖:$5083)8021+/B86ǂ7ǂ//
)˖ ˖:$5083)802))7ǂ//
Group Destination *˖ ˖:$5083(1'7,0(//
+˖ ˖+/B80+($9<//
Group A Japan China AB_B ,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<//
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+3//
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe .˖ ˖+/B862+3//
/˖ ˖+/B80(19(/23(//
2.
43-21
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
B HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
C HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
G WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
H HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
I HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
J HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
K HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
L HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
M HL_US ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
N HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
O HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
P PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $˖ ˖+/B805($'<++
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B865($'<++
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%:++

'˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%:++
<List of destination groups> (˖ ˖:$5083)8021+/B807++
)˖ ˖:$5083)802))7++
Group Destination *˖ ˖:$5083(1'7,0(++
+˖ ˖+/B80+($9<++
Group A Japan China AB_B ,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<++
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+3++
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe .˖ ˖+/B862+3++
/˖ ˖+/B80(19(/23(++
2.
43-22
Purpose Setting
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%:'83//
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%:'83//
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3/$,1%:'83$33&17//

'˖ ˖+/B80+($9<%:'83//
<List of destination groups> (˖ ˖+/B86+($9<%:'83//

)˖ ˖+($9<%:'83$33&17//
Group Destination

2.
43-23
Purpose Setting
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 45 40
HH environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 45 40
HH environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50
under HH environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under HH environment
<Code descriptions> <List of destination groups>

Group Destination
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%:'83++
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%:'83++
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3/$,1%:'83$33&17++

'˖ ˖+/B80+($9<%:'83++
(˖ ˖+/B86+($9<%:'83++
)˖ ˖+($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under NN 1 - 99 55
environment, common to items HL_UM and HL_US.) (when duplex)
B LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under LL 1 - 99 60
C HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under HH 1 - 99 50
D NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 1 - 60 5
E LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 1 - 60 10
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 1 - 60 5
G COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (heavy paper mode) 1 - 60 1
H COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP mode) 1 - 60 30
I COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool down time (envelope mode) 1 - 60 40
J FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval 1 - 20 8
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change

* Time setting: 1 count = 1sec change
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(035(6(7

$˖ ˖11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖//BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86

'˖ ˖11BB)86B'83B&17
(˖ ˖//BB)86B'83B&17
)˖ ˖++BB)86B'83B&17
*˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B+($9<
+˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B2+3
,˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
-˖ ˖)8602725
2.
Setting Default
43-31 Item Display Item
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C JOB END Number of forcible 1-5 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing COMP ACT operations of the fusing
web cleaning motor. CNT web motor when job end
Section Fusing

Operation/Procedure ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. -2%(1':(%&/($1,1*&2038/625<&+(&.

$˖ ˖-2%(1'&203$&7&+(&.˖<(612
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. $˖ %˖ ˖-2%(1'&203$&7,17(59$/
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed,

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖-2%(1'&203$&7&17
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an ǂ

Fusing web unit 2.
installation detection Operation Remark

state
Fusing web unit Not operate * During this operation,
installed the fusing web cleaning
Fusing web unit not 10sec continuous feed counter is not 44
installed rotation counted up.
* The fusing web unit is used by installing to the fusing unit. For 44-1
checking the fusing web cleaning motor rotation, remove the Purpose Setting
whole fusing unit and check with the door open. Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Section Process
)86(5:(%&/($1,1*&+(&.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-

cially required.
(;(&87(
Setting Default
43-32 range value
HV Enable/Disable setting of Normal Enable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup the high density process (Disable:
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the control in normal 1: NO)
forcible operation of web cleaning when job operation Reverse
end. HT Enable/Disable setting of (Enable: Enable
the medium density 0: YES)
Section Fusing process control in normal
Operation/Procedure operation
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. TC Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the transfer output
correction
3) Press [OK] key. MD VG Enable/Disable setting of Enable
The set value in step 2 is saved. the membrane decrease
grid voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of Enable
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- the membrane decrease
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a laser power voltage
trouble may be occur. correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Setting Default the membrane decrease
Item Display Item
range value environment grid voltage
A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1 correction
COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1 TN_HUM Enable/Disable setting of Enable
CHECK operation the toner density
condition when humidity correction
job end TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of Disable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity 1 - 200 110 the toner density area
COMP ACT of compulsory action of the correction
INTERVAL fusing web motor at job end
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of Normal Disable
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor 1 - 255 21
the toner density life (Disable:
sensitivity (light quantity)
correction 1: NO)
adjustment value
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of Reverse Enable
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor 0 - 255 0
the toner density print (Enable:
dark voltage
ratio correction 0: YES)
C PCS_K GRND Belt surface detection 0 - 255 0
TN_PROCON Enable/Disable setting of Enable
level when the
the toner density process
adjustment of item A is
control correction
completed
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of Disable
D PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
MAX detection level Max.
environment correction
value
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of Enable
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
detection level Min. value
correction unconditional
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
supply
detection level differential
TN_SPEND Enable/Disable setting of Disable
(Item D - Item E)
toner compulsory
consumption mode
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Error name Error content
the half-tone process Sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
control printer correction abnormality The adjustment target level is not reached by
feedback three times of retry operations.
TN_INTERMITTENT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Surface scanning PCS_K GRND error
the intermittent supply abnormality The difference between the max. value and
TN_ABSOLUTE Enable/Disable setting of Enable the min. value of the OPC drum surface
the unconditional supply detection level is out of the specified range in
TN_PROFIT_RETURN Enable/Disable setting of Enable detection of one circle of the OPC drum
the differential return surface.
correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the environment laser ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
power correction for the 352&21*$,1$'-8670(17

3&6B./('$'-
OPC drum membrane
3&6B.'$5.
decrease correction 3&6B.*51'
MD LD HV Enable/Disable setting of Enable 3&6B.'5800$;
the process control laser 3&6B.'5800,1
power correction 3&6B.'580',)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
02'(6(77,1*
+9 +7 7& 0'ǂ9*
(;(&87(
0'/' 0'(9 71B+80 71B$5($
71B/,)( 71B&29 71B352&21 71B(19
71B'5,3 71B63(1' 357B+7 71B,17(50,77(17

44-4
71B$%62/87( 71B352),7B5(7851 0'/'(9 0'/'+9
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
sity process control operation.
(;(&87(
Section Process

Operation/Procedure
44-2 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
density sensor. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Section Process ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- Setting Default
matically. range value
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 210
sensitivity adjustment
played.
target value
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. B LED_K OUTPUT Initial current level black 1 - 255 21
sensor LED light emitting
quantity set value in the
image density sensor
adjustment
Setting Default
range value
C PCS ADJSTMENT Adjustment error 1 - 255 10 Purpose Operation test/check
LIMIT allowance level in the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sensor sensitivity control forcibly.
adjustment
D DRUM GROUND The difference between 0 - 255 128
Section Process
DIF the max. value and the Operation/Procedure
min. value of the OPC Press [EXECUTE] key.
drum surface detection
level is in the allowable
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
range in detection of one In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
circle of the OPC drum (Refer to the table below.)
surface.
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
E BIAS_BK Developing bias 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference value in the Result display Content description
high density process
COMPLETE Normal complete
control
ERROR Abnormal end
F BIAS PATCH Patch-forming developing 1 - 255 45
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
INTERVAL bias voltage interval
(voltage difference) in the
high density process Details of error display Content description
control BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
G K_PAT TARGET Toner patch density target 1 - 255 50 error
ID value (black) in the high K_HV_ERR Density process control operation error
density process control TIMEOUT_ERR Density process control operation time-out
H HV BK_GROUND Error judgment criterion 1 - 255 29
LIMIT for the difference between
the max. level and the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
min. level of the OPC 7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
drum surface detection 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783
$˖ ˖3&6B.7$5*(7
$˖ %˖ ˖/('B.287387
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3&6$'-670(17/,0,7

'˖ ˖'580*5281'',)
(˖ ˖%,$6B%.67$1'$5'',)
)˖ ˖%,$63$7&+,17(59$/
*˖ ˖.B3$77$5*(7,'
+˖ ˖+9%.B*5281'/,0,7 (;(&87(
2.
44-9
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/ P BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
PRN (PROCON) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
N BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Actual operation mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer voltage correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer voltage correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer voltage correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer voltage correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER DRUM MD K STEP OPC drum membrane decrease correction STEP number display 0-4 0
(K)
MD K DRUM COUNTER OPC drum membrane decrease correction counter (rotation 0 - 20 0
distance)
VG MD K REVISE(VG) Display of MC correction voltage for OPC drum membrane 0 - 255 0
decrease
LD MD K REVISE(LD) OPC drum membrane decrease laser power correction display 0 - 255 0
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) Display of drum membrane decrease environment laser power -128 - 128 0
correction
LD HV MD K REVISE(LD HV) Display of high-density process control laser power correction -128 - 128 0
LD ALL MD K REVISE(LD ALL) Display of laser power total correction amount -128 - 128 0
HV MD K REVISE(HV) OPC drum membrane environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CP MD K REVISE(CP) OPC drum membrane / Environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination data stored in the PCU PWB of the machine
MODEL TYPE Model type of the machine 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K Crum destination data
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Half-tone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999 0

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/
%/$&.B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B1*%B'9B
&3<351 27+(5
44-12
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$<
$'.B6/.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the $'.B,17.
high density process control and the image 7$5*(7.
density sensor.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
Display Default
range value
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+
ADK_SL (K) Development characteristics -9.99 - 0
gradient coefficient (High density 9.99
process control operation)
ADK_INT(K) Development characteristics -999.9 - 0 44-14
intercept level (High density process 999.9
control operation 0V)
TARGET (K) High density process control target 0.00 - 0 Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
density level (K) 255.00 perature and humidity sensor.
n-1 High density process control nth 0 - 255 0 Section
time patch density level 1 (n=1-5)
Operation/Procedure
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
n-3 Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0 The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0 temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
• BK only
Item/Display Content Display range
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
main A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
• BK only
sub A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermistor Temperature:
A/D value, temperature -40.0 - 60.0C (0.1C)
(for process control) AD value: 0 - 1023
Item/Display Content Display range Setting Default
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor A/D Humidity: range value
value, humidity (for 5.0 - 90.0% (0.1%) AREA VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
process control) AD value: 0 - 1023 voltage correction value for the 127
temperature and the humidity
HUD VO Toner density sensor control

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
voltage correction value for a
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725 change in the temperature and
7+B80GHJ;;;
the humidity
7+B86GHJ;;;
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
PRINT RATE VO Toner density sensor control
+80,',7<;;; voltage correction value for the
document print ratio
PROCON VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
high density process control
result
LIFE VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
developer life
SENSITIVITY VO Toner density sensor sensitivity 1 - 999 500
correction control voltage
44-16 correction value
ENV VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
Purpose Information display voltage correction value for the 127
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control environment with a high humidity
data.
Section Toner supply, developing Setting Default
range value
Operation/Procedure
AUTO DEVE Area in the Display of the 1 - 14 8
1) The toner density control data are displayed. AREA auto humidity area when
development SIM25-2 is executed
Setting Default adjustment
range value AREA Current area Current humidity
TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129 area display
output value (final value)
TONER DEN_ST Current toner density control 128
reference value display (the

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
value including all the correction 721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$<
values) 721(5'(1B/7
721(5'(1B67
Setting Default
range value
AUTO DEVE Toner density sensor output 1 - 255 128
value when SIM25-02 is
executed and completed.
ALL Actual toner density control value
(including all the correction
factors)
. & 0 < 1(;7
AREA Toner density control correction -127 - 0
value for the temperature and the 127

humidity
HUD Toner density control correction 44-21
value for a change in the
Purpose Registration
humidity
PRINT RATE Toner density control correction Function (Purpose) Used to register the target value of the half-
value for the document print ratio tone process control.
PROCON Toner density control correction Section Process
value for the result of the high
Operation/Procedure
density process control
LIFE Toner density control correction Press [EXECUTE] key.
value for the developer life The half tone process control target is set and the operation data
SENSITIVITY Toner density sensor sensitivity 1 - 999 500 are displayed.
correction value
Display Content
Setting Default COMPLETE Normal complete
Item/Display Content ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
range value
AUTO DEVE VO Toner density sensor control 1 - 255 128 ADJUSTMENT error
voltage value when SIM25-02 is [K] High density process control error
executed and completed. OTHER Other errors
ALL VO Actual toner density sensor
control voltage value (including
all the correction factors)
Category Item/Display Content

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 control correction value
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process
DITHER_VALUE] control reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density
HT_VALUE] adjustment correction value
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process
correction value control value

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
(;(&87( >/2:),(/'@$%&
>0,'),(/'@$%&
44-22
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
level in the half tone process control opera-
tion.
Section Process 1(;7
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.
The toner patch density level made in the half tone process 44-25
control operation is displayed. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
correction value for the half tone process
BASE_n Belt substrate data (n = 1 - 6)
control.
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 6)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
37. 37. touch panel.
%$6( ,'
%$6(
%$6( 3) Press [OK] key.
%$6(
%$6(
%$6( individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
,' ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
,'
,'
,'
Setting Default
,'
range value
A HIGHTLIGHT Correction point in the 1 - 17 7
POINT low density area
B MID FIELD POINT Correction point in the 1 - 17 12
44-24
medium density area
Purpose Information display C LOW FIELD Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and DITHER DEF the low density area
the correction level in the half tone process D MID FIELD DITHER Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
control operation. DEF the medium density area
E LOW POINT COEF Correction amount low 0 - 100 100
Section Process density point correction
Operation/Procedure coefficient
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. F MID POINT COEF Correction amount 0 - 100 100
medium density point
Category Item/Display Content correction coefficient
Coefficient [LOW FIELD] Coefficient value of the
approximate equation in the

low density area ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
[MID FIELD] Coefficient value of the +$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<

$˖ ˖+,*+7/,*+732,17
approximate equation in the $˖ %˖ ˖0,'),(/'32,17
medium density area ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/2:),(/'',7+(5'()
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control '˖ ˖0,'),(/'',7+(5'()
value reference value (˖ ˖/2:32,17&2()
)˖ ˖0,'32,17&2()
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value
2.
44-26 44-27
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con- Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
trol compulsory. tone process control.
Section Process Section Process
Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data 2) Press [YES] key.
are displayed. The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
ADJUSTMENT error ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
[K] High density process control error +$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
OTHER Other errors

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(;(&87(
44-28
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
clearing shut-off.) BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can BK process control Enable 2
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item I.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
ON the power and after passing TIME. BK process control Enable 2
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only during a BK process control Enable 2
setting job for every 2hours (set by item N).
When the changes in the temperature
and the humidity are greater than the
specified level (the set value of item L) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the OPC drum unit reaches a certain Inhibit 1
level after supply the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the BK position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
a certain level after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REFRESH YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation display YES 0-1 0 1
MODE NO manual process control key by key Key operation display NO 1
operations
Process control I DAY When the next warm-up if there is no job 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
conditions after a job after passing the specified days judgment
setting days from execution of the previous 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 1 - 999
process control passing
J PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
K INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
L HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
M HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of 1-9 2
the previous process control of "HUM”
N BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK position 1 - 999 30
OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
O HT_DIF Bias variation difference value used for HT process control execution 1-255 60
judgment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖,1,7,$/<(6
$˖ %˖ ˖6:21
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7,0(
'˖ ˖+80B/,0,7
(˖ ˖+80
)˖ ˖5(9<(6
*˖ ˖5(9B%.<(6
+˖ ˖5()5(6+02'(
,˖ ˖'$<
-˖ ˖3,;B5$7,2B%.
.˖ ˖,17(59$/7,0(
/˖ ˖+80+285
2.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. +$/)721(6(77,1*
3) Press [OK] key. $˖

$˖ ˖&23<+9ė3+7
%˖ ˖35,17(5+9ė3+7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;+9ė3+7

Default '˖ ˖6(/)35,17+9ė3+7
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A COPY During copy job 0-2 0: No execution 2
B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
C FAX During FAX print 2: HV  HT 2
job
D SELF PRINT During self print 2
HV: High density process control 2.
HT: Half tone process control
44-37
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Purpose Setting mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
tion level in the continuous printing opera- adjustment value.
tion. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Section Toner supply, developing increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
Operation/Procedure sity is decreased.
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. Setting Default
2) Select a target item with [] [] buttons. range value
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
NOTE:
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
tion, this simulation is used.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
Item/ Default Variable
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display value range
Current DV less than 300[v] A 0 0-5 E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Bias voltage (*1) Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
300[v] or more, less B 0
than 450[v] F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
450[v] or more C 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
Time (T) from Less than 10 [sec] & D 0 0-12 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
termination of after process control (*2) HIGH 1 - 99 50
continuous JOB H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
outputs to start 10 [sec] or more, less E 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
of the next than 60 [sec]
output 60 [sec] or more, less F 0
operation
than 240 [sec] ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
240 [sec] or more G 0 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖
<Use example> %˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
(*1) The default of A/B/C is "0" and this function is set to OFF. '˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
When 10 sheets are printed in the multi copy and the 10th output is
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
lighter than the first sheet, set the values of 1 - 5. *˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
The greater the value is, the darker the density of the 10th sheet or +˖ ˖0$3
later.
(*2) The correction amount is adjusted by the length of the leaving time.
When (*1) is 1 - 5, the greater the value of (*2) is, the greater the
density of printing is.
/2: +,*+ 2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
$˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
46-4
$˖ %˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
Purpose Adjustment
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
'˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
(˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B send mode (color mode).
)˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B
*˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B Section

Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
. & 0 < 2.
* When the   key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
46 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
46-2
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in each A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
monochrome copy mode. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Section
PHOTO
Operation/Procedure D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
panel. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@ area and the high density area.
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 target color is increased, and vice versa.
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272
Default
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ Item/Display Content
value
*˖ ˖0$3
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50

2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'(
$˖ ˖/2:ǂ'(16,7<ǂ32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖+,*+ǂ'(16,7<ǂ32,17
˷̚˹
46-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode (monochrome mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch % * 5 2.
panel.
46-9
Purpose Adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image
density (copy, image send mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] keys
range value
on the touch panel.
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
panel.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 * When the   key is pressed, the setting value of each
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@ increased, and vice versa.
$˖ ˖$8727(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
Setting Default
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 Item Button Display Content
range value
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
(˖ ˖35,17('3+272 A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ SIDEA: LOW exposure
*˖ ˖0$3 adjustment
(Low density side)
adjustment
2. (Low density side)
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
adjustment
46-8 (Low density side)
Purpose Adjustment D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: HIGH exposure
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color adjustment
balance RGB. (High density side)
Section E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
Operation/Procedure adjustment
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch (High density side)
panel. F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch HIGH exposure
adjustment
panel.
(High density)
Setting Default Item Content
range value PHOTO Photograph
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 MAP Map
SIDEB: LOW exposure
adjustment
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value
(Low density side)
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
adjustment C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
LOW exposure F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
adjustment G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
SIDEB: HIGH exposure J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
adjustment
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
(High density side)
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
adjustment N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
(High density side) O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
HIGH exposure Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
adjustment
(High density)

G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
SIDEB: R balance R (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50 $872 $872 7(;7 7(;73573+272
SIDEB: G balance G 7(;73+272 35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3

SIDEB: B balance B

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2: (;(&87(

˖&23<6,'($˖+,*+

(˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+
)˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+
46-16
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density manually.
2& '63)
Section
2.
Operation/Procedure
46-10 panel.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density (in each * When the   key is pressed, the setting value of each
copy mode). item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
2) Select 600dpi or 1200dpi with the resolution select button. (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
* When the   key is pressed, the setting value of each Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
increased, and vice versa. E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
Item Content I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
AUTO1 Automatic 1 J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
AUTO2 Automatic 2 K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
TEXT Text L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width.

This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖
$˖ ˖32,17
46-23
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 Purpose Setting

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
)˖ ˖32,17 high density section (High density tone gap
*˖ ˖32,17
supported).
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17 Section
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
Operation/Procedure
/˖ ˖32,17 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(;(&87( 2.
0 Enable
1 Inhibit
46-19
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of doc- Setting Default
ument density scanning (copy, image send range value
mode). A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
Section Scanner 1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
Operation/Procedure correction mode: Disable
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set item A
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is to "0".
saved.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
Item/Display Content Set value Default value
gap is better.
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 * To increase the density in the high density area further, set item
MODE2 A to "1".
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP The tone gap may occur in high density part.
Stop (for copy) STOP
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON

Stop (for FAX) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP $˖ ˖(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(
Stop (for scanner) STOP $˖
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL ˷̚˹
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
2.
$(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
$(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
46-24
$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
$(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy and printer density adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE:
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MODE 2 Normal gamma The automatic adjustment of copy and printer density is exe-
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is cuted, and then the adjustment result pattern of the copy mode
scanned, and the output image density is determined as well as that of the printer mode is printed.
according to the scanned density. (The output image density
is even for all the surface.) 3) Press [OK] key.
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned The half tone correction target registration is processed.
sequentially, and the output image density is determined 4) The half-tone correction execution menu is displayed. Press
according to the density in each area of document. (The [EXECUTE] key.
output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
Half-tone correction is executed. When [RESULT] button is
pressed after completion of correction, the data of the half-tone
correction can be checked.
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality $˖ ˖&23<˖2&
ADJUSTMENT $˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
[K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
'˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
OTHER Other errors
(˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&

+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
2.
46-37
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the
(;(&87(
scan image color document (copy, image
send mode).
Section

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
4) Press [YES] key.
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel-
low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.
Setting Default
(;(&87( range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 303
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 697
46-32 * B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
Purpose Adjustment the formula below.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
document background density in the auto- When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
matic copy mode. values (default).
Section When the adjustment values of items A and B are decreased, the
Operation/Procedure copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment
values are increased, the density is decreased.
panel. When the adjustment value of item A is decreased and the adjust-
ment value of item B is increased, the copy density of red images is
increased. When the adjustment value of item A is increased and
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) the adjustment value of item B is decreased, the copy density is
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the decreased.
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
$˖ ˖55DWLR
Setting Default $˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
range value ˷̚˹
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196

B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface) '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196

(SIDE2) back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
46-39

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Adjustment 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;$//
$˖ ˖(;32685(/(9(/$//
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send $˖
images. ˷̚˹
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire. (;(&87( 2.
Setting Default
range value 46-41
A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF
Purpose Adjustment
B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
OFF half tone OFF (Normal)
C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 Section
ON half tone ON
D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Operation/Procedure
OFF half tone OFF 1) Set the original on the original table.
E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ON half tone ON
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 and the scanned document image is outputted.
ON half tone ON
Setting Default
H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 Item/Display Content
range value
OFF half tone OFF
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50

E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17 F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
$˖ %˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖h>'3,@21
'˖ ˖h>'3,@2)) EXP2 Exposure 2 3

(˖ ˖h>'3,@21 EXP3 Exposure 3 4
)˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
*˖ ˖h>'3,@21
+˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
,˖ ˖h>'3,@21
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/
46-40 $˖ ˖$872
$˖ % ˖ ˖(;32685(
Purpose Adjustment
˷̚˹ & ˖ ˖(;32685(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. ' ˖ ˖(;32685(
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) (˖ ˖(;32685(
)˖ ˖(;32685(
Section * ˖ ˖(;(&87(02'($872
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the original on the original table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key (;(&87( 2.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set

and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all
the modes)
46-42
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment
7(67
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
$˖ ˖$872
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. $˖ % ˖ ˖(;32685(
(Fine) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
Section '˖ ˖(;32685(

(˖ ˖(;32685(
Operation/Procedure )˖ ˖(;32685(
* ˖ ˖$872+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table. +˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ,˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(

-˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key .˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set /˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
and the scanned document image is outputted. (;(&87( 2.
Setting Default
range value
46-43
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 (Super Fine)
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Section
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone 1) Set the original on the original table.
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Half tone 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Half tone
Setting Default
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
Half tone
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Fine/ 3 F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Fine/ 4 /Auto/Half tone
Exposure 3 H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Fine/ 5 H_TONE /Half tone
Exposure 4 I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Fine/ 6 H_TONE /Half tone
Exposure 5 J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
AUTO Fine/ 7 H_TONE /Half tone
H_TONE Automatic/ K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
halftone H_TONE /Half tone
EXP1 Fine/ 8 L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 1 H_TONE /Half tone
/Half tone
EXP2 Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
EXP3 Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO) 4
EXP1 Super Fine 2 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
/Exposure 1 5
EXP2 Super Fine 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50
/Exposure 2 tone
EXP3 Super Fine 4 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
/Exposure 3 1/Half tone
EXP4 Super Fine 5 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Super Fine 6 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
AUTO Super Fine 7 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Auto 4/Half tone
/Half tone L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP1 Super Fine 8 5/Half tone
H_TONE /Exposure 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
/Half tone MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP2 Super Fine 9 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
H_TONE /Exposure 2 Exposure 1
/Half tone EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
EXP3 Super Fine 10 Exposure 2
H_TONE /Exposure 3 EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
/Half tone Exposure 3
EXP4 Super Fine 11 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
H_TONE /Exposure 4 Exposure 4
/Half tone EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
EXP5 Super Fine 12 Exposure 5
H_TONE /Exposure 5 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
/Half tone H_TONE Auto/Half
tone
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure
1/Half tone
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
H_TONE Exposure 2
7(67
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1( /Half tone
$˖ ˖$872
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
$˖ % ˖ ˖(;32685(
H_TONE Exposure 3
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
'˖ ˖(;32685(
/Half tone
(˖ ˖(;32685( EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
)˖ ˖(;32685( H_TONE Exposure 4
* ˖ ˖$872+B721( /Half tone
+˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
,˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
-˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
H_TONE Exposure 5
.˖ ˖(;32685(+B721( /Half tone
/˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
(;(&87( 2.
46-44
Purpose Adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. $˖ ˖$872
$˖ 㪙˖ ˖(;32685(
(Ultra fine)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
Section '˖ ˖(;32685(

(˖ ˖(;32685(
1) Set the original on the original table. 㪞˖ ˖$872+B721(
+˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key -˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
.˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
1
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
2
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
3
46-45
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Adjustment 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;'3,
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. $˖

$˖ ˖$872
% ˖ ˖(;32685(
(600dpi). ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
Section '˖ ˖(;32685(

(˖ ˖(;32685(
* ˖ ˖$872+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table.
+˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
-˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key .˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 46-47
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Purpose Setting
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 and scan images (JPEG).
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Section
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
/Half tone 1 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
/Half tone
3) Press [OK] key.
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
/Half tone The set value is saved.
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
/Half tone Operation Setting Default
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 mode range value
/Half tone (COLOR) A COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 (Document (C) com-
/Half tone filing (COLOR pression
mode)) (Color)
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE mode 600dpi/ 12 (AUTO) MIDDLE Medium 1
EXP1 2
com-
Exposure 1
pression
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
(Color)
Exposure 2
HIGH High 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
com-
Exposure 3
pression
EXP4 600dpi/ 5 (Color)
Exposure 4
LOWER Super 3
EXP5 600dpi/ 6 low com-
Exposure 5 pression
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7 (Color)
H_TONE Half tone COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 (GRAY) (G) com-
H_TONE Exposure 1 (Copy/ pression
/Half tone Document (Gray)
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 filing MIDDLE Medium 1
H_TONE Exposure 2 (Monochrome com-
/Half tone half-tone pression
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 mode)) (Gray)
H_TONE Exposure 3 HIGH High 2
/Half tone com-
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 pression
H_TONE Exposure 4 (Gray)
/Half tone LOWER Super 3
EXP5 600dpi/ 12 low com-
H_TONE Exposure 5 pression
/Half tone (Gray)

Operation Setting Default 600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
Item/Display Content line images is increased.
mode range value
PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0 1200dpi mode: Line images are reproduced finer than 600dpi
(COLOR) (C) 1 com- (MIDDLE mode.
(Scanner (*1) pression 1)
(Color mode)) mode 1 Button Default
Low Item Content
display value
com- AUTO 600DPI Automatic 600DPI
pression
1200DPI
MIDDLE Medium 1
TEXT 600DPI Text 600DPI
2 com-
1200DPI
pression
mode 2 TEXT PRT 600DPI Text printed photo 600DPI
Medium 1200DPI
com- TEXT PHOTO 600DPI Text photograph 1200DPI
pression 1200DPI
MIDDLE Medium 2 PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI Printed photo 1200DPI
3 com- 1200DPI
pression PHOTO 600DPI Photograph 1200DPI
mode 3 1200DPI
High
MAP 600DPI Map 600DPI
com-
1200DPI
pression
PUSH SCAN D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
(GRAY) (G) 1 com- (MIDDLE
(Scanner (*1) pression 1) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Monochrome mode 1 )81&7,216(77,1*)25&23<287387

$872 ˖ '3, '3,
half-tone Low 7(;7 ˖ '3, '3,
mode)) com- 7(;7357 ˖ '3, '3,
pression 7(;73+272 ˖ '3, '3,
MIDDLE Medium 1 35,17('3+272 ˖ '3, '3,

3+272 ˖
2 com- '3, '3,
0$3 ˖ '3, '3,
pression
mode 2
Medium
com-
pression
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 com-
pression
mode 3 46-51
High
com- Purpose Adjustment
pression Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com- mode heavy paper mode and the image
pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode. process mode (manual adjustment).
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity Section
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how- Operation/Procedure
ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably 1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
reduced. [PAPER/DITHER].
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( touch panel.
&23<䊶6&$1䊶0)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&23<&/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<*/2:
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1&0,''/(
'˖ ˖6&$1*0,''/( When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
putted.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
2. the image density.
46-48 HEAVY Heavy paper
Purpose Setting 600ED Error diffusion (600dpi)
1200ED Error diffusion (1200dpi)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the output resolution in each
DITH1 600dpi Dither For PRINTED PHOTO/
copy mode.
PHOTO MODE
Section DITH2 1200dpi dither For TEXT PRINTED PHOTO /
Operation/Procedure TEXT PHOTO / PRINTED
PHOTO MODE
1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key.
DITH3 1200dpi dither For PHOTO MODE
In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change
this setting.
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range HEAVY 600ED 1200ED DITH1 DITH2 DITH3
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 500 507 500 517 514
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 501 526 499 523 525
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 501 537 499 525 527
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 502 564 498 533 531
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 503 579 498 540 532
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 508 594 498 549 529
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 513 579 508 526 506
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 489 522 519 481 473
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 465 451 532 459 491
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 451 398 528 483 522
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 437 357 546 492 555
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 416 325 567 474 543
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 410 306 558 449 511
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 408 303 536 425 477
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.

46-52
3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
to the default values.)
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
Section tial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key. Setting Default
range value
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot
3) Press [YES] key. SCR]
B SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen
C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( SWITCH [SMALL Dot in a small area
&23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5
SCR]
+($9<3$3(5 (' (' ',7+
D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
',7+ ',7+
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment:
Black text 1
E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment:
Color text 1
F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [BK TXT 2, adjustment:
$5(<28685("
CL TXT 2] Black text 2, Color
$// <(6 12 (;(&87(
text 2

G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3

46-61 ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment:
Chroma/Achroma
Purpose Adjustment judgment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
tion level in the image send mode (color, ADJUST [TXT ON adjustment:
gray, auto exposure mode). BG] Text on background
I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
Section ADJUST [SCR] adjustment:
Operation/Procedure Dot
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
3) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0: Error diffusion process 1: Dither pattern process
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@
Setting Default
$˖ %˖ ˖6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@ Item/Display Content
range value
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@
'˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@
A TEXT/PRINTED Text print 0-1 0
(˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@ PHOTO
)˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@ B PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0-1 1
*˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
C PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 0-1 1
+˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@
,˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@
D TEXT/PHOTO Text photograph 0-1 1
E TEXT/PRINTED Text print: Toner save 0-1 0
PHOTO (TS)
F TEXT/PHOTO (TS) Text photograph: 0-1 1
2.
Toner save

46-63 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment
+$/)721(6(/(&7',7+(5('
$˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
$˖
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den- %˖ ˖35,17('3+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3+272*5$3+

sity area of a scan image. '˖ ˖7(;73+272
Section (˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+27276
)˖ ˖7(;73+27276
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. 2.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the

background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background 46-90
and the low density image is decreased.
Purpose Adjustment
Setting Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
range value compression PDF images.
A COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 Section
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (Color PUSH) 1-9 3
Operation/Procedure
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) [BG LAYER] keys.
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5 2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key.
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
E COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text photograph 1-9 3
PHOTO (Color PUSH) 4) Press [OK] key.
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (Color PUSH) 1-9 5 The set value is saved.
G COLOR PUSH: AUTO Automatic 1-9 5
(Color PUSH) Setting Default
range value
A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0

SENSITIVITY selection
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17 B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
$˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272 FINDLINES selection
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25386+35,17('3+272
'˖ ˖&2/25386+3+272*5$3+
FINDLINES SW SW (H)
(˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;73+272 D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
)˖ ˖&2/25386+0$3 FINDLINES SW SW (V)
*˖ ˖&2/25386+$872
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL number
adjustment SW
F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
2.
A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
46-64 INTENT selection
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
Purpose Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the image process mode in D R-RATIO Gray scale 0- 299
each copy mode. ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R) 1000
Section E G-RATIO Gray scale 0- 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) 1000
Operation/Procedure
A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
1) Select a target mode of setting with [] [] key on the touch LAYER INTENT 1 setting
panel. B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. INTENT 2 priority setting

48-5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
&203$&73')6(77,1*6
&/26(
Purpose Adjustment
$˖
$˖ ˖*/<3+6(16,7,9,7<
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
%˖ ˖%*6:)25),1'/,1(6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+25),1'/,1(66:

cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
㪛䋺㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪇 ˖9(57),1'/,1(66:
Section Scanner
(˖ ˖)*&2/25,1'(;,1*6(/
)˖ ˖)*&2/25,1'(;,1*$'- Operation/Procedure

panel.
3) Press [OK] key.
7(;7 &2/25 %*/$<(5 2. The set value is saved.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
48 this adjustment.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
48-1 change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Purpose Adjustment is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction Setting Default
and the sub scanning direction). range value
Section Scanner A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
(Reference speed)
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
panel. D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (High speed)
3) Press [OK] key. E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(Reference speed)
The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C or E corre- 0272563(('$'-8670(17

$˖ ˖05+,
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. $˖ %˖ ˖050,'
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖05/2
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. '˖ ˖63)+,

(˖ ˖63)0,'
Setting Default
range value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 2.
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
surface magnification ratio 48-6
adjustment (Main scan) Purpose Adjustment
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
motor.
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50 Section
surface magnification ratio Operation/Procedure
adjustment (Main scan)
panel.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 3) Press [OK] key.
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68% The set value is saved.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
Setting Default
range value
A RRM Resist motor correction value 1 - 99 47
B DVM_K Developing K motor correction 1 - 99 41
2. (DM) value
C FSM (FUM) Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 58
Setting Default Item/Display Content
range value 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
D PFM Paper transport motor correction 1 - 99 50 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
value 4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section
E POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 51 4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section
F FUSER Fusing speed select timing 1 - 99 50 1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
SETTING 1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
G RRM RRM speed increasing start 0 - 255 0 4KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
START timing
4KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
H RRM END RRM speed increasing end timing 0 - 255 38
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
cially required. DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
quality trouble may occur.
ESCP_FONT ESC/P font

PDL_FONT PDL font
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ANIMATION Animation data
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17
IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
$˖ ˖550
$˖ %˖ ˖'90B.'0 WEB HELP WEB help
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)60)80 UNICODE UNICODE table
'˖ ˖3)0
ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section
(˖ ˖320
)˖ ˖)86(56(77,1*
ACREM (MAIN) ACRE Main section
*˖ ˖55067$57 ACRE_DATA ACRE table
+˖ ˖550(1'
List of error displays in case of abnormal end
&2/25 0212 +($9< 2.
CONF Configuration data
ICUM ICU Main section former half
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
LANG Language support data program
49 (General term)
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
49-1 SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU Boot section
Purpose Version upgrade
PCUM PCU Main section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. DESKB Desk unit BOOT section
Section DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section
Operation/Procedure
LCC4M Side LCC (A4) main section
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
FINB Inner finisher BOOT section
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the FINM Inner finisher MAIN section
operation panel section.) FIN1B 1K finisher Boot section
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. FIN1M 1K finisher Main section
4) Select a target firmware. FIN4B 4K finisher Boot section
FIN4M 4K finisher Main section
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
1PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
1PUNM Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
6) Press [YES] key. 4PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
The selected firmware is updated. 4PUNM Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is SCUB SCU Boot section
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- SCUM SCU Main section
played. DSPFB DSPF Boot section
DSPFM DSPF Main section
Item/Display Content FAXB FAX1 Boot section
CONFIG Configuration data FAXM FAX1 Main section
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half ESCP ESC/P font
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main PDL PDL font
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ANIME Animation data
LANGUAGE Language support data program IMGDT Image ASIC data
(General term) WEBHP WEB help
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD UNICD UNICODE table
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD ACREB ACRE Boot section
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section ACREM ACRE Main section
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section ACRED ACRE table
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@ :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0

49-3
Purpose Install 50
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the Operation
Manual data stored in the HDD. 50-1
Section Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. ment
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- Section
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
Operation/Procedure
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
panel.
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
active from gray out.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
updated. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Setting Default
range value

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@ edge edge reference
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( adjust- position (OC)
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
',5!0$18$/
value motor Tray
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper
feed

loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
49-5 I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
Purpose Install J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the watermark area adjustment
data stored in the HDD. K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
REAR void area
Section
adjustment
Operation/Procedure L Off- OFFSET OC document off- 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. center _OC center adjustment
adjust-
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
ment
update.
M Magnifi- SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. cation _SPEED scanning
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. ratio _OC magnification ratio
correc- adjustment (CCD)
5) Press [YES] key.
tion
The selected watermark is updated.
Setting Default L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
Item/Display Content scale.
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
scanning correction value edge.
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 L1
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 Paper lead
value edge
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 66
value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step) L2
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When 400% enlargement copy
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi-
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) Fig. 1
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step) 5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted. Setting Default
Item/Display Description
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. range value
(0.1mm/step) A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
measurement image lead edge to
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
value the scale of 10mm.
step) (Platen 400%,
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. 0.1mm increment)
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0
step) paper lead edge to
the image lead edge
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. (0.1mm increment)
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) area setting loss amount setting
value (When the

adjustment value is
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( increased, the image
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
loss is increased.)
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 D SIDE Side edge image 0 - 99 20
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 loss amount setting
'˖ ˖55&%/&& (When the
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
adjustment value is
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
increased, the image
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
loss is increased.)
,˖ ˖'(1$ E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
-˖ ˖'(1% adjustment adjustment (When
.˖ ˖)52175($5 the adjustment value
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
is increased, the
2.
void is increased.)
F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment (When
50-2 the adjustment value
is increased, the
Purpose Adjustment void is increased.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
the image loss (simple adjustment). REAR amount adjustment
(When the
Section adjustment value is
Operation/Procedure increased, the void
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0. is increased.)
2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust- paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
adjustment values of L1 and L2.

50-5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&
&/26(
Purpose Adjustment
$˖
$˖ ˖/
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
%˖ ˖/
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'

position. (PRINTER MODE)
'˖ ˖6,'(
Section
(˖ ˖'(1$
)˖ ˖'(1% Operation/Procedure

*˖ ˖)52175($5
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
(;(&87(
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.02.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 66
adjustment correction
value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
%˖ ˖'(1%
$˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 $˖
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
%˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6 -˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
(;(&87( 2.
2.
50-6
Purpose Adjustment 50-7
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and Purpose Adjustment
the image loss (DSPF mode). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
Section the image loss (DSPF mode) (simple
Operation/Procedure adjustment).
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch Section
panel. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) panel.
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
range value
DSPF duplex mode.
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan 4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
position surement value of distance a (DSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of
adjustment (CCD) 0.1mm.
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 (Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
document scan
L4: Distance a (DSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
position
adjustment (CCD) L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
amount setting Distance "a"
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
surface document
off-center
adjustment
Setting Default
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
front surface
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
magnification ratio
0.1mm unit) from the front
adjustment (Sub
surface image lead edge to
scan)
the scale of 10mm.
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
is delayed. 0.1mm unit) from the back
surface image lead edge to
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss the scale of 10mm.
is increased. C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge, (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Setting Default

range value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20 /($'('*($'-8670(1763)&$/&
(SIDE1) loss amount setting $˖ ˖/

$˖ %˖ ˖/
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting '˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 30 (˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting )˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(

G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss (;(&87(
is increased.
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06. 50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image off-center posi-
tion. (The adjustment is made separately
for each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Large capacity tray)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.

50-27
ǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment
7(67
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 of scanned images in the FAX or image
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 send mode.
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
Section
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
Operation/Procedure
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
-˖ ˖68%&6 key.
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&& 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
(;(&87( 2. panel.
50-12
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center FAX A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 30
position adjustment. (The adjustment is send loss (OC) edge (3mm)
made separately for each scan mode.) amount image loss
setting amount
Section OC setting
Operation/Procedure B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 20
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch _REAR (OC) image loss (2mm)
panel. amount
setting
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 20
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) (OC) edge (2mm)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is image loss
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is amount
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. setting
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 20
1step = 0.1mm loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (2mm)
amount lead edge
Setting Default setting image loss
range value SPF amount
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 SIDE1 setting
center adjustment E FRONT Front 0 - 100 20
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 _REAR surface (2mm)
center adjustment (SPF_SIDE1) side image
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 loss
center adjustment amount
setting

F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 30
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (SPF_SIDE1) surface (3mm)
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 rear edge
$˖
$˖ ˖2&
image loss
%˖ ˖63)6,'(
amount
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
setting
FAX G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 30
send loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (3mm)
amount lead edge
setting image loss
SPF amount
SIDE2 setting
H FRONT Back 0 - 100 20
2. _REAR surface (2mm)
(SPF_SIDE2) side image
loss
amount
setting
I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 20
(SPF_SIDE2) surface (2mm)
rear edge
image loss
amount
setting
Setting Default
range value
When A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 0 Purpose Adjustment
image loss (OC) edge (0mm) Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image
send amount image loss loss, void area, image off-center, and image
mode setting amount
magnification ratio.
(Except OC setting
for FAX B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 0 Section
and _REAR(OC) image loss (0mm) Operation/Procedure
copy) amount
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
setting
SIM50-28.
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 0
(OC) edge (0mm) * Print image magnification ratio adjustment
image loss (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
amount * Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
setting
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm) * Scan image off-center adjustment
amount lead edge * Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
setting image loss * Copy image position, image loss adjustment
SPF amount
SIDE1 setting
E FRONT Front 0 - 100 0
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
_REAR surface (0mm)
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
(SPF_SIDE1) side image
mode)
loss
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
amount
adjustment
setting
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
(SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
rear edge SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
image loss paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
amount RESULT Adjustment result display
setting DATA Adjustment operation data display
G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image
amount lead edge magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
setting image loss 1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
SPF amount 2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
SIDE2 setting
print.
H FRONT Back 0 - 100 0
_REAR surface (0mm) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
(SPF_SIDE2) side image 4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
loss
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
amount
setting 6) Press [OK] key.
I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0 (2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
(SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm) 1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
rear edge
image loss 2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
amount print.
setting 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is 4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
increased. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
1step = 0.1mm 6) Press [OK] key.
(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖
$˖ ˖/($'B('*(2&
2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1 (Front surface) or SIDE 2
%˖ ˖)5217B5($52&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖75$,/B('*(2&

(Back surface) or ALL (Both modes).
'˖ ˖/($'B('*(63)B6,'( 3) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
(˖ ˖)5217B5($563)B6,'(
print.
)˖ ˖75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
*˖ ˖/($'B('*(63)B6,'( 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
+˖ ˖)5217B5($563)B6,'(
,˖ ˖75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures
)$; 6&$11(5 2. 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back surface.
7) Press [OK] key.
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center
(Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel. $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust- 63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes). 5(68/7 '$7$
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
(Two or more trays can be selected.)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the proce-
dure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pat-
tern printed with each paper.

7) Press [OK] key.
RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again. 51
RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
51-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF resist roller.
Operation/Procedure
1) (When DSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [REG1] or [REG2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN _ HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size)
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
J ENGINE MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 70
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 70
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 30
<Small size, Large size>

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$˖ %˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
'˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B/2:
(˖ ˖5$1'20B3/$,1B+,*+
)˖ ˖5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
*˖ǂ ˖5$1'20B7+,1B+,*+
+˖ǂ ˖5$1'20B7+,1B/2:
5(*, 5(*, (1*,1( 2.
53
53-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
DSPF document width.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. 2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
The maximum width detection level is recognized. 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed. (;(&87(
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
53-7
shifted by 0.1mm.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
width sensor. 63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17

$872 0$18$/
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value

A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
55

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
&/26(
55-1
$˖
$˖ $'B0$;
Purpose Setting
%˖ $'B3
˷̚˹ &˖ $'B3 Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
'˖ $'B0,1
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
ǂ
Operation/Procedure

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(62)76:6(77,1*
2. 6:1R 䋺 6:1R
'$7$ 䋺

53-8
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
erence and the DSPF mode document
scan position.
Section Automatic document feeder (;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment> 55-2
(Auto adjustment)
Purpose Setting
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
table.
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
2) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.) Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
range value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 - 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1*
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit) 6:1R 䋺 6:1R
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 '$7$ 䋺
reference position
NOTE: The AUTO mode must not be used.
<MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment>

(;(&87(
Setting Default
range value
A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-

tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
55-3 56-2
Purpose Setting Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control- Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
ler operation. (SOFT SW) SRAM, and HDD (including user authenti-
Section cation data and address data) to the USB
memory.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0)362)76:6(77,1* 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
6:1R 䋺 6:1R̚
'$7$ 䋺
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.

<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
(;(&87(
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Machine with the DSK installed)
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
56 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
56-1 From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
Purpose Data transfer <EXPORT>
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the 3) Enter the password with 10-key.
PWB.) 4) Press [SET] key.
Section 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Select a target content of data transfer. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed. <Data list outside the backup targets>
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is (EEPROM/SRAM)
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
PWB Type Content NOTE
ALL  HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. Controller Machine serial No.
HDD  ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the Product key information
memories. Various counter Copy counter/FAX
EEPROM  HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD send counter etc.
HDD  EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM Trouble history
SRAM  HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD. PCU Machine serial No.
(Including the FAX memory) Various counter Maintenance counter
When the FAX memory or an option memory Machine adjustment execute
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the history
memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. Trouble history
HDD  SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
(including the FAX memory) Trouble history
When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the (HDD)
FAX memory are also transferred to HDD.
Classification Content NOTE

Japanese FEP User dictionary
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Job end list Job end list display data
&23<'$7$
(The image send series
$//ė+''
include the preserved job list.)
˖(1$%/(
+''ė$// ˖',6$%/(
((3520ė+'' ˖',6$%/( Log Job log Read from WEB is
+''ė((3520 ˖',6$%/( enable.
New N/A • Print history information
65$0ė+'' ˖',6$%/(
+''ė65$0 ˖',6$%/(
• JAM history information
• Trouble history information
• Same position continuous
jam count value
• Charging information
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
• Life information

Operation E-manual
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. manual
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a Document filing Document filing data
trouble may be generated.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
(;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$ (;3257-2%/2*'$7$
+''(;3257 +'',03257 -2%/2*(;3257
((3520˂65$0(;3257 ((3520˂65$0,03257
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine.

If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
trouble may be generated. 60
56-3
60-1
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
the USB memory.
of the MFP PWB memory.
Section HDD
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Start the test.
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD Result display Description
<EXPORT> OK Success
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE NG Fail
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
INVALID Execution disable
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. SLOT Description
SLOT1 System memory (expansion) DIMM1
SLOT2 System memory (standard) DIMM2

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
SLOT3 Local memory (MFP expansion) DIMM4
7(67
(;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$ SLOT4 Local memory (MX-EBX3 standard) –
'2&),/(;3257 '2&),/,03257

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

56-4
(;(&87(
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory. 60-2
Section HDD Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the MFP
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. PWB on-board SDRAM.
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. Section MFP (ICU) PWB
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is panel.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: Set to the default value.
Setting Default

range value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6'5$06(77,1*
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0 $˖ ˖6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(
ENABLE setting setting $˖ %˖ ˖180%(52)52:%,7
change of On- ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖180%(52)&2/801%,7
flag board '˖ ˖7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
SPD (˖ ˖75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
)˖ ˖75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
ENABLE DDR 1
*˖ ˖75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
setting +˖ ˖7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
of B or ,˖ ˖7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
later -˖ ˖&$6/$7(1&<&/
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2 .˖ ˖727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7(
/˖ ˖180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
2.
13BIT 2
C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
COLUMN 10BIT 2
11BIT 3 61
12BIT 4
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
61-1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2 Purpose Operation test/check
5CLOCK 3 Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2 tion and laser detection.
SETTING 5CLOCK 1
Section LSU
VALUE 6CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SETTING 7CLOCK 1 When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
VALUE 8CLOCK 2 In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4 Display Content
G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
SETTING 3CLOCK 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3

H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
/687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
VALUE - -
20CLOCK 1
3
J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
LATENC CL=2.5 1
Y CL=3 2 (;(&87(
K TOTAL NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1

NUMBER 128M total capacity 1
OF BYTE
61-3
MBYTES 256M 2
ON BYTE Purpose Setting
BOARD
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
DDR
L NUMBER NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1 Section LSU
OF ON 1CHIP bunk number 1 Operation/Procedure
BOARD- SELECT 1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
DDR 2CHIP 2 FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
CS-BANK SELECT
panel.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Setting
Item/Display Content normal display.
range
COPY A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255

600dps (BW1) BW1 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255 +'')250$7
(BW2) BW2
C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255
BW
COPY A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
1200dpi (BW1) BW1
B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
(BW2) BW2
BW
PR600/ A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
FAX (BW1) BW1
B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
(BW2) BW2
C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255 62-2
BW
PR1200 A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255 Purpose Operation test/check
(BW1) BW1 Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255 (partial).
(BW2) BW2
Section HDD
BW Operation/Procedure
Default values for destination/machine type
2) Press [YES] key.
Default value
Category Item
36PPM 50PPM
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
COPY 600dpi A 89 111 7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(673$57
B 89 111
C 0 0
COPY 1200dpi A 89 111
B 89 111
C 0 0
PR600/FAX A 89 111
B 89 111
C 40 40
PR1200 A 89 111
B 89 111
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
C 0 0

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 62-3
/$6(532:(5$8726(783>),(5<@
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$˖ ˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<.
˖/$6(532:(5%: Purpose Operation test/check
$˖ %˖ ˖/$6(532:(5%:
˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<&
˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<0
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/$6(5'87<%:
&˖
'˖ ˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<< (all areas).

(˖ ˖/$6(532:(5/2:),(5<.
Section HDD
)˖ ˖/$6(532:(5/2:),(5<&
*˖ ˖/$6(532:(5/2:),(5<0 Operation/Procedure

+˖ ˖/$6(532:(5/2:),(5<<
,˖ ˖/$6(532:(5+,*+),(5<%:

-˖ ˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<%: 2) Press [YES] key.
.˖ ˖/$6(532:(5/2:),(5<%:
/˖ ˖/$6(5/870,''/(),(5<.
Read/write operations are performed.
&23<GSL &23<GSL 35)$; 35 2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(67$//
62
62-1
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
(except operation manual area).
Section HDD $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
62-6 62-8
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
hard disk. the system area and the operation manual
Section HDD area)
Operation/Procedure Section HDD
1) Select the self diag area. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The self diag operation is performed. 2) Press [YES] key.
NOTE: Used to execute the hard disk format.
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
simulation to cheek the HDD. normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
SHORT S.T Partial area diag
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
NG" is displayed.

normal display. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Normal completion  "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed. +'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
Abnormal end  "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.

* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
6+25767 ˖(1$%/(
(;7(1'('67 ˖',6$%/(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-10
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section HDD
(;(&87( Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
62-7 Used to delete the job log data.
Purpose Operation test/check When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics normal display.
error log.

Section HDD ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure -2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$

ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
normal display.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
60$57(5525/2*35,17287
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-11
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87( 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67

&/26(
63
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5
63-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a mode.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] key on the touch
panel.
62-12
Item/Display Content NOTE
Purpose Setting
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format (odd number)
in a hard disk trouble. GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
(Even number)
Section HDD
OFFSET Offset value
Operation/Procedure ODD (odd number)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. OFFSET Offset value
2) Press [OK] key. EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
The set value is saved.
ODD sampling average
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system value (ODD)
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system SMP AVE Reference plate
data storage area is cleared. EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
A 0 Enable TARGET Target value
1 Disable (Default) VALUE
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ERROR Error code 0 No error
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
CODE (0, 1 - 14) 1 STAGE1: Loop number
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖
(for debug) over
˷̚˹ 2 STAGE2: The target value
is under the specified
value.
3 STAGE3: The gain set
value is negative.
4 END is not asserted.
(Gain adjustment)
5 (reserve)
2. 6 STAGE2: Underflow
7 Black shading error
8 Other error
62-13
Purpose Data clear/Reset (White shading)
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the 10 END is not asserted.
operation manual and watermark area) (Black shading)
Section HDD (Light quantity correction)
Operation/Procedure 12 END is not asserted.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Scan)
13 Register check error.
2) Press [YES] key.
(When booting/Gain)
The operation manual data are deleted. 14 Register check error.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the (Before light quantity
normal display. correction)
DSPF FACE First scan DSPF front

WHITE surface/back surface
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( LEVEL 1ST white reference level
+'')250$70$18$/:$7(50$5.$5($21/<
DSPF FACE DSPF front/back
WHITE surface white reference
LEVEL 2ND level of the second or
later scanning
MAX Max. density judgment
DENSITY value
MAX Max. density position
POSITION
LED DA LED DA adjustment
value
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
LED DA LED DA adjustment After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
MEMORY save value adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
GAIN Gain adjustment save display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
MEMORY value
TARGET Target save value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
MEMORY 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
RATIO White plate scan ratio 2&
BLACK Black offset set value

OFFSET (1-12 area)

1-12
&&&555
000***

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 <<<%%%
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
*$,12''
*$,1(9(1
2))6(72''
2))6(7(9(1 '63) (;(&87(

2&
% * 5
603$9(2''ǂ
603$9((9(1
7$5*(79$/8(
%/$&./(9(/
(5525&2'(
63-4
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/67 Purpose Information display
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/1'
0$;'(16,7< Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
% * 5 2& '63)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
63-2 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
Purpose Adjustment ment table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
Section Scanner 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
1) (When DSPF model) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and the normal display.
press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Select a data display mode.
Used to perform shading.
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the
normal display.
SIT chart scan data
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
the SIT chart scan data
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6(/(&72&6+$',1*'63)6+$',1*$1'35(66(;(&87( Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&

&&&555
000***
2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87( <<<%%%
63-3
Purpose Adjustment % * 5 㪛㪪㪧㪝 (;(&87(
2&
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-

ance and gamma auto adjustment.
63-5
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
balance and gamma default setting.
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table. Section Scanner
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key
formed. 3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the default.
normal display.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
6,'($2& 6,'(%'63)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
64
64-2
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19, 21, 22, 29, 33 - 35) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22,
below.) 29, 33 - 35)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M 1-255 1
parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-9 1 8
(2 - 9 IF A: 15 - 19, 33 - 35) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15 - 19, 33 - 35: 2 - 9 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above:1 - 9) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
AUTO Automatic 9
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern
Content Pattern generating section NOTE
No.
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 Belt print
11 Dot print (sub scan)
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) MFP ASIC • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) • The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
17 Halftone pattern (all over the page) Controller (Memory) -
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) -
19 256 gradations pattern (straight) 600dpi -
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi
33 Halftone pattern 1200dpi (all over the page) Controller (Memory)
34 256 gradation pattern 1200dpi
35 256 gradation pattern (straight) 1200dpi

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$

'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$
(˖ ˖08/7,ǂ&2817
)˖ ˖(;32685(̚,)$̚̚67$1'$5'',7+(5
*˖ ˖3$3(5&6
+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
(;(&87( 2.
64-4
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra fine text 1
F DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2 (CALIB)
CALIB correction Calibration 2
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Half tone pattern (B/W)
3 Dot, background (BW)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
$˖ %˖ ˖'(16,7<
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖08/7,&2817

'˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(˖ ˖48$/,7<67$1'$5'
)˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
64-5
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
%˖ %˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖08/7,&2817

'˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(˖ ˖48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
)˖ ˖721(56$9(02'(2))
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
64-6
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,1736
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
%˖ %˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖08/7,&2817

'˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(˖ ˖48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
)˖ ˖721(56$9(02'(2))
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
65
65-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection coordinates.
(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
65-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Information display 7(67
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&.
&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- 3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(<
play section) detection coordinates.

(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
the touched position is displayed in real time.

;<

67

67-17

Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
65-5 The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
Purpose Operation test/check NIC setting.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
input. normal display.

(Operation/Display control PWB) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on

the screen.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
<Check target key>
8.5 Inch LCD operation panel

JOB STATUS $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
1
2 67-25
3 Purpose Adjustment
4 Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (Manual adjust-
5 ment)
6
7
Section
8 Operation/Procedure
9 1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
AUDIT CLEAR touch panel.
0 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (MONO) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
Setting Default 67-33
Item/Display
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A POINT1 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma and the density
C POINT3 1 - 99 50 in each printer screen.
D POINT4 1 - 99 50 Section
E POINT5 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
F POINT6 1 - 99 50 1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
G POINT7 1 - 99 50
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key.
H POINT8 1 - 99 50
I POINT9 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
J POINT10 1 - 99 50 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
K POINT11 1 - 99 50 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
L POINT12 1 - 99 50 the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
M POINT13 1 - 99 50
N POINT14 1 - 99 50
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
O POINT15 1 - 99 50
P POINT16 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Q POINT17 1 - 99 50 range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128

B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17 E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
'˖ ˖32,17
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
*˖ ˖32,17 I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
+˖ ˖32,17
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
.˖ ˖32,17 L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
/˖ ˖32,17 M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
(;(&87(
. & 0 < 2.
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
67-31 Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value Screen Content
(Half-tone process control data). HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper mode
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit screen
Section
SCREEN2 1200dpi 1 bit screen
Operation/Procedure SCREEN3 Toner Save mode
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<3$3(5
cleared. $˖ ˖32,17
(The printer density correction is canceled.) $˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖32,17
35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. (;(&87( 2.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
67-34 67-70
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
printer high density section. (Support for Section MFP (ICU) PWB
the high density section tone gap)
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
0 Enable When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
1 Disable (Default) the normal display.
NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set to

"0". ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
65$0&/($5
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
gap is reduced.
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set to
"1".
The tone gap may occur in high density part.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ ˖(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
˷̚˹
2.
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
MX-M503N C. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, may not be stopped.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning
࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others - ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-M503N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 6 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan FAST
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print Notification
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption) to host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30,       ✕ ✕ ✕
97, 98)
HDD trouble E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC trouble E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
SCU communication E7 (80) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
trouble A0 (02)
PCU communication E7 (90) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble A0 (01)
ACU communication A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
Controller fan motor trouble L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
External communication U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable (RIC)
Memory error (included not U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕  10
installed the expansion 23, 24)
RAM)
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60, 61, 65) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
detection) A0 (10, 11, 12, 15, 20)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD registration data sum U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
error
Image memory trouble, E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
decode error 09)
Image memory trouble, E7 (42, 46, 48) ✕  11 ✕ ✕ ✕    
decode error (ACRE-
related 1)
Image memory trouble, E7 (49) ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕    
decode error (ACRE-
related 2)
Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
installation trouble
Power controller trouble L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
Special function error U2(60)         
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 21, 28, 29), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
L6 (10) 7
Connection trouble E7 (50, 55) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
(motor, fusing, etc.) F2 (40, 64, 70, 74), 7
H2 (00, 02),
H3 (00, 02),
H4 (00, 02),
H5 (01),
H7 (10, 12),
L4 (02, 03, 04, 11, 31,
32, 34, 43, 58, 59),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) 2    2  2/7  2 
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) 2    2  2/7  2 
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) 2    2  2/7  2 
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) 2    2  2/7  2 
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 2    2  2/7  2 
(09, 20, 21, 22, 51)
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) 8    8  7/8  8 
troubles
Staple trouble F1 (08, 10) 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3 
Saddle stitch section F1 (31, 41, 43, 45, 47) 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3 
trouble
After-process trouble F1 (00, 03, 11, 15, 19, 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3 
20, 21, 22, 23, 32, 33,
34, 36, 37, 38, 39)
Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU)         
Process control trouble F2 (31, 39, 58)         
(PCU detection) 9

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan FAST
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print Notification
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption) to host
Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(SCU detection)
SCU color system troubles UC (02) 6 6 6 6   6  
(SCU detection)
Anti copy system UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
EEPROM faction U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
Scanner section troubles L1 (00), L3 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
etc.)
DSPF/DF trouble U5 (00, 16, 40) 4 4 4 4   4  
General troubles in the E6 (10, 11, 14) 5 5 5 5   5  
DSPF back surface
scanning section
 : Operation enabled, ✕ : Operation disabled

 2 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
* However, it is valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
 5 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode and the simplex scanning mode.
 6 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
 7 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
 8 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
 9 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
 10 : In case of U2-22, the trouble cannot be notified. In case of U2-23, if either of the FAX soft SW data or the FAST data cannot be restored,
the trouble cannot be notified.
 11 : Execution of a job is enabled only for the format other than the high-compression PDF related ones.
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when on, check is made in each
initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence) sim task
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

(To the corre-
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel sponding block)
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel is initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
Main Sub Trouble code content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection nism
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble PCU 
E6 10 DSPF (CIS) shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 DSPF (CIS) shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CIS-ASIC error SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
03 HDD trouble MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
05 Standard/Extension memory R/W error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
06 Image data decode error MFP 
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
09 Standard/Extension memory size (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error PCU 
21 LSU laser deterioration trouble PCU 
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU 
42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
49 Water Mark data error MFP 
50 Engine connection trouble PCU 
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU 
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP 
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP 
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP 
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP 
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - 178) PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble PCU 
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU 
22 Finisher assist motor trouble PCU 
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU 
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU 
32 Finisher - Punch unit communication error PCU 
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU 
34 Punch operation trouble PCU 
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU 
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU 
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU 
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU 
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU 
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 
F2 31 Image density sensor trouble PCU 
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio abnormality)
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
F6 00 MFP-FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch FAX 
30 Access error to 1-chip microprocessor on the FAX board (FAX detection) FAX 
97 The FAX PWB does not match with the machine model. FAX 
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX destination information and the FAX 
machine destination information.
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
12 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_US) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Drum motor trouble PCU 
11 Shift motor trouble PCU 
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP 
31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1/2) trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU 
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3) trouble PCU 
58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU 
59 Suction fan trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFP PWB/Mother board MFP 
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP 
10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP 
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP 
23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP 
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
50 HDD registered data check sum error MFP 
60 Water Mark check error MFP
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU 
40 Document feed unit installation trouble SCU 
U6 00 Communication error of PCU PWB/Desk paper feed unit PCU 
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU 
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU 
09 LCC lift trouble PCU 
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU 
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU 
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU 
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
UC 02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error SCU 
20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error SCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP 
04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner expansion kit is installed) MFP 
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP 
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP 
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) MFP 
15 DSK BOOT version disagreement MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
3. Details of trouble code
C1-10 Main charger trouble E7-01 MFP image data error
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause The main charger unit is not installed properly. Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. MFP PWB trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
MC/DV high voltage PWB trouble. of the MFP PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB E7-03 HDD trouble
connector. /Replace.
Replace the MC/DV high voltage PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
E6-10 DSPF (CIS) shading error PWB and HDD.
HDD error file management area data abnormality
(Black correction) (FAT breakage).
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Detail SCU of the MFP PWB and HDD.
Cause Installation error of the CIS unit harness. Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the
CIS unit trouble. HDD.
DSPF PWB trouble. Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CIS
unit.
Check the CIS unit.
Check the DSPF PWB. E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content
E6-11 DSPF (CIS) shading error Detail MFP
(White correction) Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CIS unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the reference white plate.
E7-05 Standard/Extension memory R/W
CIS unit trouble. error (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading adjustment error
Trouble content Memory access is disabled.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CIS unit.
Detail MFP
Clean the reference white plate.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Check the CIS unit.
Garbled memory data.
Check the DSPF PWB.
The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of
E6-14 CIS-ASIC error the memory.
Replace the expansion memory.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the DSPF PWB.

E7-06 Image data decode error E7-14 CCD-ASIC error

Detail MFP Detail SCU
Cause Compressed image data abnormality. Cause SCU PWB trouble.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed. Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Image data compression/transfer data garble. Replace the SCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job,
check the FAX PWB. E7-20 LSU laser detection error
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error Cause Optical axis shift.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
(MFP PWB) (Local memory) trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
Trouble content PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
MFP memory slot. LSU.
DIMM trouble. Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM.
Replace the DIMM.
E7-21 LSU laser deterioration trouble
E7-09 Standard/Extension memory size Trouble content

(MFP PWB) (Local memory) Detail PCU
Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration.
Harness and connector disconnection/insertion
Trouble content
trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control
Detail MFP PWB.
Cause A DIMM which is not 512MB is inserted. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
DIMM trouble. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
Insufficient memory size. LSU.
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM. Replace the LSU.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error

Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
scanner lamp is turned OFF. PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Improper connection of the communication connector
CCD unit abnormality. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
SCU PWB abnormality. (interface PWB).
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
Check the CCD unit. control PWB (interface PWB)
Check the SCU PWB. PCU PWB or LSU control PWB (interface PWB)
trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
E7-11 Shading error (White correction) between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
(interface PWB).
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. Trouble content
CCD unit abnormality. Detail PCU
SCU PWB abnormality. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
unit. Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
plate.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.

E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) E7-60 Combination error between the MFP
PWB and other PWB, firmware
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause Image transfer trouble. Detail MFP
Detail Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
connector. machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Compression data abnormality.
E7-61 Combination error between the MFP
Garbled data are produced in image compression/ PWB and the PCU PWB
transmission.
ACRE ASIC PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB.
Detail MFP
Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB.
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC)
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
the PCU PWB.
Detail MFP Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble.
DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
Check & Remedy DIMM trouble. E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
Replace the PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
E7-49 Water Mark data error Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Trouble content Malfunction due to noises.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Cause Watermark data trouble Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error
E7-50 Engine connection trouble Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported SCU PWB mother board connection trouble.
by the machine specifications is detected in the PCU SCU PWB trouble.
PWB. MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Mother board trouble.
LSU trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. and the mother board.
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary. Check the ground.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary. Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
E7-55 PWB information sum error
(Engine detection) E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error Trouble content
Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error. Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble.
PCU EEPROM trouble. PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Mother board trouble.
Replace the PCU EEPROM. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
and the mother board.
Check the ground.
Replace the mother board.

EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ operation trouble
139 - 178)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Detail PCU
adjustment is outside of 128 10. Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the developing unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment

error (Over toner) F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Trouble content
adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 Detail PCU
or above.
Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Detail PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment F1-10 Staple operation trouble

error (Under toner)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Detail PCU
adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is Cause Staple motor trouble.
51 or less. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner motor.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. Replace the staple motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble

F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Grip motor trouble.
Detail PCU
Grip arm trouble.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor.
Replace the grip motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Replace the grip arm.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
trouble
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.

Detail PCU
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
tray lift motor.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.

F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Cause Motor lock trouble.
Motor speed abnormality. Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Over-current to the motor. Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the saddle motor with SIM3-3.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
alignment motor F. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication

F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble error
R
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. disconnection between the finisher and the punch
Motor speed abnormality. unit.
Over-current to the motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Malfunction due to noises.
alignment motor R. The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Replace the paper alignment motor R. finisher and the punch unit.
F1-21 Finisher fan trouble Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
Trouble content
F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher fan motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Trouble content
Harness and connector connection trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor. Cause Punch shift motor trouble.
Check connection between the finisher control PWB Finisher control PWB trouble.
and the fan. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the fan. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
shifting.
Replace the punch shift motor.
F1-22 Finisher assist motor trouble Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Motor harness short/open trouble. F1-34 Punch operation trouble
Control PWB trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor Trouble content
with SIM3-3. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Cause Punch motor trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble Check & Remedy Check the punch operation.
Replace the punch motor.
Trouble content Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor
with SIM3-3.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.

F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble

Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble. Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Harness disconnection. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Punch control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
Replace the punch paper edge sensor. alignment motor (FSPAM).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the punch control PWB. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
Trouble content
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the
Malfunction due to noises saddle section.
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Detail PCU
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control Cause Saddle staple motor trouble.
PWB DIP SW adjustment.) Finisher control PWB trouble.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
staple motor.
Trouble content Turn OFF/ON the power.
Detail PCU Replace the control PWB.
Cause Punch control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW
adjustment.)
Trouble content Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the
finisher saddle transport section.
F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error Detail PCU
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble.
Trouble content Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Fuse blown (24V line).
Cause Punch dust sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Harness and connector connection trouble. paper transport motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Punch unit control PWB trouble. Replace the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Replace the sensor.
Replace the punch dust sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
Replace the punch unit control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
trouble model is installed.
Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
the saddle section. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper positioning motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor.

F2-31 Image density sensor trouble F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio
abnormality) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Trouble content
Toner density sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Connector/harness trouble.
Cause Before execution of the process control, a document PCU PWB trouble.
is scanned by the image density sensor and the Toner cartridge trouble.
sensor gain is adjusted so that the output is at a fixed Developing unit trouble.
level. Though, however, the sensor gain is changed, Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
the output does not become a fixed level. Replace the toner density sensor.
Image density sensor trouble Connector and harness check.
Connection trouble of the harness between the PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
PWB and the image density sensor Replace the toner cartridge.
Image density sensor dirt Replace the developing unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-2 to execute the gain adjustment of the
process control sensor.
When there are some troubles, "Error" is displayed.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Check the sensor and the harness at that time.
Trouble content
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Trouble content
specification.)
Detail PCU Toner cartridge trouble.
Cause Process thermistor trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Process thermistor harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB. F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble Trouble content

Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Connector/harness trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
level 34 or less, or 221 or above) Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Connector and harness check.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Harness and connector connection trouble. of LUD1.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the lift-up unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.

F6-00 MFP-FAX communication trouble F6-30 Access error to 1-chip microproces-
sor on the FAX board (FAX detection)
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Protocol error
Trouble content Access error (read/write) to 1-chip microprocessor on
Section MFP the FAX board
Case 1 Cause FAX unit PWB connector connection error Section FAX
Check Check the connector connection between the FAX unit Case 1 Cause Program writing error (or no writing) to the 1-chip
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. microprocessor
remedy
Check Use SIM66-24 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Case 2 Cause FAX unit PWB - MFPcnt PWB harness trouble and program.
Check Check the connector harness between the FAX unit remedy
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Case 2 Cause 1-chip microprocessor trouble
remedy
Check Replace the 1-chip microprocessor chip. When
Case 3 Cause FAX unit PWB mother board connector pin breakage and replacing, use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip
Check Check the machine grounding. remedy microprocessor program.
and Case 3 Cause FAX PWB 1-chip microprocessor access circuit
remedy trouble
Case 4 Cause FAX unit ROM trouble/ROM pin breakage Check Replace the FAX PWB.
Check Check the FAX unit PWB ROM. and
and remedy
remedy
F6-97 The FAX PWB does not match with the

F6-01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error machine model.
Trouble content EEPROM access error (read/write)
Trouble content The FAX PWB identification model does not match
Section FAX
with the machine model.
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Section FAX
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Case 1 Cause An improper type of FAX PWB is installed to the
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
machine.
remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX PWB with a proper one.
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
and
Check Replace the PWB. In this case, not need to execute remedy
and the simulation.
remedy
F6-98 Combination error between the FAX-
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble BOX destination information and the
machine destination information.
Trouble content FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Section FAX Trouble content Combination error between the FAX PWB destination
Case 1 Cause FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble information and the machine destination information.
Check Replace the FAX PWB MODEM chip. Section FAX
and Case 1 Cause Combination error between the destination
remedy information written in EEPROM on the FAX PWB and
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB MODEM chip cannot be accessed. the destination information of the machine (set with
Check Replace the FAX PWB. SIM26-6).
and Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX PWB.
remedy and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
remedy 3) Use a proper combination of the machine and
the FAX PWB.
F6-21 Combination error between the
TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Trouble content
FAX PWB information (soft switch)
Detail PCU
Section FAX
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Case 1 Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB differs.
PCU PWB trouble
Check Check the destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
and
Fusing unit not installed.
remedy
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB information (soft switch) differs.
Check Check the FAX PWB information (soft switch). Check connection of the connector and the harness.
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
remedy

H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
Fusing unit not installed.
power relay.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Thermistor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Heater lamp trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature HL PWB trouble.
trouble (TH_UM) Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the heater lamp.
Trouble content Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the thermostat.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Thermistor trouble. Replace the HL PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the interlock switch.
Connection trouble of the fusing section connector Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
and the harness. heater lamp.
HL PWB trouble. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
Replace the thermistor.
trouble (TH_US)
Replace the HL PWB. Trouble content
Detail PCU
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature level within the specified time from turning ON the
trouble (TH_US) power relay.
Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
Trouble content PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU Thermostat trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Thermistor trouble. HL PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Interlock switch trouble.
HL PWB trouble. Fusing section connector Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
connection trouble. Replace the heater lamp.
HL PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Replace the thermostat.
heater lamp. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the HL PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness. Replace the interlock switch.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit section. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
(When the lamp is ON:) Check the HL PWB and the heater lamp.
PCU PWB lamp circuit. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermistor, the HL PWB, and the PCU
PWB.
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
jam
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. L3-00 Scanner return trouble
(TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail PCU Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified
time.
Scanner unit trouble.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
SCU PWB trouble
to fall in the fusing temperature.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Thermistor trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Scanner motor trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
HL PWB trouble. Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the HL PWB.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
heater lamp.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Cause A lock signal is detected during ON period of the
(TH_US) paper feed motor in warming up or canceling a jam.
Paper feed motor trouble.
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified motor.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due Replace the paper feed motor.
to fall in the fusing temperature. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Thermistor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
HL PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Trouble content
Replace the heater lamp. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Replace the thermostat. the fusing motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Fusing motor trouble.
Replace the HL PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the PCU PWB trouble.
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.
Replace the Fusing motor.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
L4-04 Drum motor trouble
time.
Scanner unit trouble. Trouble content
SCU PWB trouble Detail PCU
Scanner control PWB trouble. Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Harness and connector connection trouble. the drum motor.
Scanner home position sensor trouble. Drum motor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble. Drum unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the scanner unit. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the SCU PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the drum
Replace the scanner home position sensor. motor.
Replace the scanner motor. Replace the drum motor.
Replace the drum unit.

L4-11 Shift motor trouble L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble

Cause No change in the shifter home position sensor signal Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. operation signal is not detected within the specified
Shift motor trouble. time.
PCU PWB trouble. LSU cooling fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Shifter home position sensor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter Replace the LSU cooling fan.
home position sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the shift motor. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the shifter home position sensor.
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3)
trouble
L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail MFP
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause Fan motor trouble.
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector
Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the fan motor. Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
L4-58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble

L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1/2)
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Detail PCU specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation. PCU PWB trouble.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. power.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the Replace the PCU PWB.
fan. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
L4-59 Suction fan trouble
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Detail PCU specified time in the suction fan operation.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Suction fan trouble.
specified time in the power cooling fan operation. PCU PWB trouble.
Power cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. power.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Replace the suction fan.
Replace the power cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check/replace the connector or the harness.

L6-10 Polygon motor trouble U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall.

Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 8 sec Cause Battery life
after starting rotation of the polygon motor. Battery circuit abnormality
Polygon motor trouble. Check & Remedy Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
LSU control PWB trouble. 2.0V or above.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU. Trouble content
Replace the LSU control PWB. Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Detail PCU Check the power environment.
Cause No full wave signal is detected.
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble. U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
inconsistency
Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
L8-02 Full wave signal error before turning OFF the power is installed.
HDD trouble.
Trouble content MFP PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
cloning), import it.
detected. (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or
above, or 45Hz or less.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. U2-10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. index check sum error
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Detail MFP
Check the power waveform. Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
L8-20 Communication error of MFP PWB/
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Mother board Transfer the user index information data in the HDD
to the SRAM.
Detail MFP
Cause Mother board PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
Mother trouble. sum error
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the
MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Check the ground of the main unit.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the mother board. Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

U2-22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum U2-50 HDD registered data check sum error
error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Cause The identifier which controls the communication
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX
soft switch is not detected correctly. Check & Remedy Initialize the data (one-touch, group, program, etc.)
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. related to the check sum error by turning OFF/ON the
MFP PWB trouble. power.
Strong external noises. Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are
Replace the HDD.
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted
data again individually.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
U2-60 Water Mark check error
U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual Trouble content

data check sum error Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum
error.
Detail MFP
Cause The check sum value for individual data of the
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
communication table and the sender registration
does not match. Trouble content
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. Detail SCU
MFP PWB trouble. Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Strong external noises. SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related EEPROM socket contact trouble.
to the content of check sum error. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register Replace the SCU PWB.
the deleted contents again. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Replace the MFP PWB. simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
and the adjustment values.
U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user
authentication counter check sum
error U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
MFP PWB trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
manufacturing No. data inconsistency simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before Trouble content
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. Detail PCU
MFP PWB trouble. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. PCU PWB trouble
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was EEPROM socket contact trouble.
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
on the new PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Replace the PCU PWB. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data

U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble

Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Cause DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. when lift-up operation.
PCU PWB trouble DLUD1 sensor trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Lift unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. PCU PWB trouble
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data Replace the desk control PWB.
and the adjustment values. Replace the lift unit.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
U5-00 Document feed unit communication

error U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
when lift-up operation.
SCU PWB trouble.
DLUD2 sensor trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the DSPF PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
U5-16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Fan motor trouble. U6-09 LCC lift trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check the operation. Trouble content
Check the DSPF PWB and the driver PWB
Detail PCU
connection of the connector and the harness.
Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is
detected within the specified time after outputting the
lift motor ON signal.
U5-40 Document feed unit installation The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the
trouble lift motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble
Trouble content
Lift mechanism trouble.
Detail SCU Lift motor trouble.
Cause When two or more document feed units are detected. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
Document feeder trouble. sensor and the lift motor.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the lift motor rotation sensor.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the lift mechanism.
U6-00 Communication error of PCU PWB/ Replace the lift motor.
Desk paper feed unit
Trouble content
Detail PCU U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
Cause Error when testing the communication line after motor trouble
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Desk control PWB trouble. Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble Detail PCU
Strong external noises. Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel. rpm abnormality, over-current to the motor).
Check the connector and the harness in the Desk control PWB trouble.
communication line. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the desk control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
Replace the PCU PWB. transport motor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.

U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble

Cause Error when testing the communication line after Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. LCC.
LCC control PWB trouble. LCC control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC. U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication error
communication line.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the
Replace the PCU PWB. serial vendor.
Detail MFP
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine
U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble specifications (SIMI26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
sensor signal is detected within the specified time
Check the connector and the harness in the
after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
communication line. Change the specifications of the
The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the LCC control
varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
PWB.
Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble.
Mechanism trouble.
Paper transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. U7-51 Vendor machine error
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper
transport motor. Trouble content
Replace the paper transport motor. Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Replace the LCC control PWB. Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Replace the mechanism. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the paper transport motor.
Check & Remedy "Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
code.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit UC-02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error
to the LCC.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Trouble content
LCC control PWB trouble. Detail SCU
Power source unit trouble.
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
line.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
UC-20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble Trouble content

Detail SCU
Trouble content Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
desk.
Desk control PWB trouble. A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
Replace the desk control PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
Replace the ROM.

A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
operation, etc.
and the EEPROM data version.
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
Replace the ROM.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner
expansion kit is installed) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause The firmware update is failed because of turning OFF
the power during the firmware update operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to execute update of the firmware.
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Replace the ROM. version (SCU)
Trouble content
A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version
Trouble content and the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency

(MFP - PCU)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
the PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
PCU.
A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency

(MFP - SCU)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
the SCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
SCU.
A0-15 DSK BOOT version disagreement
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and
the BOOT.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the
BOOT.

4. Paper JAM code list
A. Paper JAM judgment conditions
JAM detection method Basic JAM margin JAM detection
JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
[mm] *1 [mm] *1 [mm] *1
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM CPUC2 ON CPFD2 ON 95.1 65.0 160.1
(CPFD2 not-reached JAM)
CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 23.6 65.0 88.6
(Desk 1 feed paper) start command from DESK
(The paper lead edge is at
45mm from the last roller of
DESK1.)
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 23.6 65.0 88.6
(Desk 2 feed paper) start command from DESK
45mm from the last roller of
DESK1.)
TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM CPUC1 ON CPFD1 ON 95.1 65.0 160.1
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM CPFD2 ON CPFD1 ON 109.6 65.0 174.6
(Cassette 2 feed paper)
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed MPUC ON MPFD ON 52.7 65.0 117.7
JAM (MPFD not-reached)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM CPFD1 ON PPD2 ON 193.6 65.0 258.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM MPFD ON PPD2 ON 161.1 65.0 226.1
(Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD2 ON 196.8 65.0 261.8
(LCC feed paper) start command from LCC
29mm from the LCC paper
feed port.)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM APPD2 ON PPD2 ON 186.7 65.0 251.7
(ADU refeed paper)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM RRM ON POD1 ON 234.7 50.0 284.7
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM POD1 ON POD2 ON 93.2 65.0 158.2
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM Reversing start POD3 ON 104.2 65.0 169.2
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM Reversing start APPD1 ON 133.3 65.0 198.3
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM APPD1 ON APPD2 ON 269.9 65.0 334.9
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM CPUC2 OFF CPFD2 OFF 135.2 65.0 200.2
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 68.3 65.0 133.3
(Desk 1 feed paper) end command from DESK
(The last rear edge roller
position of DSEK1)
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 68.3 65.0 133.3
(Desk 2 feed paper) end command from DESK
(The last rear edge roller
position of DSEK1)
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPUC1 OFF CPFD1 OFF 135.2 65.0 200.2
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPFD2 OFF CPFD1 OFF 109.6 65.0 174.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM MPUC OFF MPFD OFF 52.1 65.0 117.1
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 193.6 65.0 258.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)

JAM detection method Basic JAM margin JAM detection
JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
[mm] *1 [mm] *1 [mm] *1
(Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM MPFD OFF PPD2 OFF 139.0 65.0 204.0
(Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD2 OFF 235.2 65.0 300.2
(LCC feed paper) end command from LCC
(Transport sensor "LTD" in
LCC is OFF.)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM APPD2 OFF PPD2 OFF 186.7 65.0 251.7
(ADU refeed paper)
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM PPD2 OFF POD1 OFF 297.3 65.0 362.3
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM POD1 OFF POD2 OFF 93.8 65.0 158.8
(When left paper exit)
POD2 remaining JAM Reversing start POD2 OFF after starting Paper 65.0 Paper transport
(When reversing (when ADU/ reversing transport direction length
right paper exit)) direction - 6.8
length - 6.8 + 65.0
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting POD3 OFF 111.0 65.0 176.0
reversing
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting APPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
reversing
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM APPD1 OFF APPD2 OFF 269.2 65.0 334.2
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the – – –
(Image preparation wait IMAGE_PREPARE END_IMAGE_PREPARE
time-out) command from PCU to ICU command from ICU
(for 30 sec or more)
CPFD2_DESK CPFD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the preliminary – – –
(Desk communication preliminary paper feed paper feed start command
abnormality detection) request command from from DESK to PCU
PCU to DESK (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the preliminary Reception of the preliminary – – –
paper feed start command paper feed end command
from DESK to PCU from DESK to PCU
Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper feed – – –
feed request command from start command from DESK to
PCU to DESK PCU (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the paper feed Reception of the paper feed – – –
start command from DESK to end command from DESK to
PCU PCU (for 30 sec or more)
PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the preliminary – – –
(LCC communication preliminary paper feed paper feed start command
abnormality detection) request command from PCU from LCC to PCU
to LCC (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the preliminary Reception of the preliminary – – –
paper feed start command paper feed end command
from LCC to PCU from LCC to PCU
Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper feed – – –
feed request command from start command from LCC to
PCU to LCC PCU (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the paper feed Reception of the paper feed – – –
start command from LCC to end command from LCC to
PCU PCU (for 30 sec or more)
PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper – – –
(Finisher communication attribute data command from interval data command from
abnormality detection) PCU to FINISHER FINISHER from PCU (for 30
sec or more)
*1: The distance (length) divided by the process speed is the time.
Process speed 28/36 PPM Model 175mm/sec
45/50 PPM Model 225mm/sec

B. Option paper JAM judgment conditions
JAM detection method
JAM code Content
JAM detection timer start trigger JAM judge detector
FIN PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached 1K POD2 ON PDPPD1 does not turn ON within the specified
JAM time.
4K POD2 ON FJPID does not turn ON within the specified
time.
PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining 1K PDPPD1 ON PDPPD1 does not turn OFF within the
JAM specified time.
4K FJPID ON FJPID does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached 1K PDPPD1 ON PDPPD2 does not turn ON within the specified
JAM time.
4K FJPID ON FJPOD does not turn ON within the specified
time.
PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining 1K PDPPD2 ON PDPPD2 does not turn OFF within the
JAM specified time.
4K FJPOD ON FJPOD does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached Inner POD2 ON FED does not turn ON within the specified
JAM time.
1K PDPPD2 ON FPPD1 does not turn ON within the specified
time.
4K FJPOD ON FED does not turn ON within the specified
time.
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining Inner FED ON FED does not turn OFF within the specified
JAM time.
1K FPPD1 ON FPPD1 does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
4K FED ON FED does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM 1K Starting the switchback operation to the FPPD2 does not turn ON within the specified
saddle transport section time.
FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM 1K FPPD2 ON FPPD2 does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM Inner Starting the bundle exit operation FSTPD does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
1K 1) Bundle exit operation start 1) FATPD does not turn OFF within the
2) – specified time.
2) FPDD turns OFF (when the bundle exit
operation is ended.)
FSTPLJ Staple JAM Inner FSHPD OFF FSHPD does not turn ON within the specified
time.
1K 1) FSHS OFF 1) FSHS does not turn ON within the
2) FSSHS OFF (Saddle) specified time. (It is, however, limited to
3) – the case when FSHS turns ON by the
reversing operation after that.)
2) FSSHS does not turn ON within the
specified time. (It is, however, limited to
the case when FSSHS turns ON by the
reversing operation after that.)
3) After stapling operation, cuing of staples
is disabled. (including the saddle)
4K FSHPD OFF FSHPD does not turn ON within the specified
time. (It is, however, limited to the case when
FSHPD turns ON by the reversing operation
after that.)
FPNCHJ Punch JAM 1K – FPCHPS OFF (when punching is ended.)
4K Punching operation start (FPNM (punch FPE does not turn ON/OFF within the
motor) drive start) specified time (the specified number of times).
FDOP Finisher door open JAM Inner – FDSW ON (during JOB)
4K – FFDD ON or FCD ON or FJPDD ON (during
JOB)
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching Inner FED ON (front paper) FED turns ON earlier than the specified timing.
JAM (detection paper)
1K POD2 ON (front paper) POD2 turns ON earlier than the specified
timing. (detection paper)
4K POD2 ON (front paper) POD2 turns ON earlier than the specified
timing. (detection paper)
FIN_PAOF Paper attribute data reception 1K – Reception of paper attribute data exceeds the
overflow allowable buffer limit (16 sheets).
FPATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM 1K Folding transport start (The paper lead FSATPD does not turn OFF within the
edge is at 18.2mm after passing the saddle specified time.
exit roller.)

JAM detection method
JAM code Content
JAM detection timer start trigger JAM judge detector
FIN FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached 1K 1) Pushing operation start after 1) FPPD3 does not turn ON within the
JAM completion of paper transport to the specified time.
saddle process tray (FSDM (saddle 2) FPPD3 turns OFF. (When the paper lead
motor) drive start) edge reaches 18.2mm after passing the
2) – saddle exit roller.)
FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining 1K Folding transport start (The paper lead FPPD3 does not turn OFF within the specified
JAM edge is at 18.2mm after passing the saddle time.
exit roller.)
FSSMJ Stapler shift motor JAM 1K – Stapler shift motor trouble detection (during
JOB)
FPDMJ Paper exit motor JAM 1K – Paper exit motor trouble detection (during
JOB)
FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM 1K – Saddle motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FGMJ Gripper motor JAM 1K – Gripper motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor 1K – Saddle paper transport motor trouble detection
JAM (during JOB)
FHS_N Paper exit not-reached JAM 4K FED ON FPDD does not turn ON within the specified
time.
FHS_S Paper exit remaining JAM Inner FED OFF FSTPD does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
4K FPDD ON FPDD does not turn OFF within the specified
time.
DESK TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed DPUC1 ON (paper feed start) DPFD1 does not turn ON within the specified
JAM time.
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk DPFD2 ON DPFD1 does not turn ON within the specified
2 feed paper) time.
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 DPFD1 ON DPFD1 does not turn OFF within the specified
feed paper) time.
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 DPFD2 OFF DPFD1 does not turn OFF within the specified
feed paper) time.
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 DPFD2 ON DPFD2 does not turn OFF within the specified
feed paper) time.
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed DPUC2 ON (paper feed start) DPFD2 does not turn ON within the specified
JAM time.
LCC LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM LPFC ON (paper feed start) LPFD does not turn ON within the specified
(LPFD not-reached) time.
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC LPFD ON LPFD does not turn OFF within the specified
feed paper) time.

[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
*Firmware types
1. Outline
Flash ROM CONTENTS
A. Cases where update is required MAIN BODY ALL The following All the contents
ROM update is required in the following cases: ICU (PROG 1) CONFIG
XIO FONT
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
GRAPHIC
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the CNUPDATE
machine. BOOT MAIN
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for LANG
repair to the machine. PDL
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be WEBHELP
repaired. ANIME
ICU (PROG 2) MAIN (NIC)
B. Notes for update UNI CODE
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update ESCP FONT
SCU SCU (MAIN)
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
PCU PCU (MAIN)
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
SPF DSPF (MAIN)
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
FAX1 FAX1 (MAIN)
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware OPTION 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K (MAIN)
INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER (MAIN)
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
LCC A4 LCC_A4 (MAIN)
1) Update method using SIM 49-1
DESK DESK (MAIN)
2) Update method using FTP PUNCH PUNCH (MAIN)
3) Update method using the Web page 4K FINISHER 4KFIN (MAIN)
4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three 4K PUNCH 4KPUNCH (MAIN)
methods.) ACRE ACRE (MAIN)
Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for
storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-M503N FIRMWARE UPDATE 7 – 1

The firmware update executes by SIM49-01.

1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
into the main unit. ),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
2) Enter the SIM49-01. ,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
the update screen. /$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
'(6.%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
'(6.0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* The number of key changes according to the number of the
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
displayed.
appears.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
played.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @ &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.

4) Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are
cessfully.
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and
played.
cannot be pressed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
&21),* ,&803&806&8%
˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
* Press the selected key again to release the selection.

* Press [ALL] key to select all items.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
firemware.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-M503N
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm- The firmware update method using the MFP PWB ROM slot of the
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro- MFP PWB is called "CN update."
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." a. Function
appears. There are the following five functions in the CN update mode.
1) ROM copy function 1
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in
details in this manual.)
2) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.

If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the d. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the To enter the CN update mode, set DIP-SW1 and DIP-SW2 on the
normal boot program. MFP PWB as shown below:
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality DIP-SW1 ON: CN update mode
in the boot program (Program ROM 1).
DIP-SW2 OFF: OFF in the normal mode
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal- NOTE: Keep DIP-SW2 at OFF. DIP-SW2 is used to enable the
ity in the main program (Program ROM 2). USB port on the front side or the USB port on the rear side.
When it is set to OFF, the USB port on the front side is
3) ROM copy function 2
enabled. When it is set to ON, the USB port on the rear
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in side is enabled.
details in this manual.)
When the keyboard is installed to the machine, an exclu-
4) Firmware version check function sive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 disabled.)
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this When terminating the CN update mode, reset DIP-SW1 to
manual.) OFF (normal mode).
5) ROM making function
NOTE: When using the USB port, be careful of the total current
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in consumption not to exceed 500mA.
this manual.)
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this
Upper: DIP-SW1
method can be used to update the firmware. Lower: DIP-SW2
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the When tilted forward, OFF.
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the When tilted toward the PWB, ON.
normal boot program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced
with a new one having the normal boot program.
c. ROM slot used in the CN update mode
The following ROM slots are used in the CN update mode.
e. Keys used in the CN update mode
The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
ROM slot numbers
used in the CN
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
update mode normal mode.
CN12 slot UP key DOWN key

CN11 slot
CN10 slot
CN9 slot
MENU key BACK key OK key
Key name Functions in the CN update mode

[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.

f. Kinds of Flash ROM a-2. Procedures
There are following kinds of Flash ROM used in this machine. 1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the rear cabinet and the
Take care that a different model number of Flash ROM cannot be MFP PWB cover.
used. 2) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to ON. (Tilt it to the PWB side.)
The Flash ROM model number is marked on the semiconductor 3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
chip on the Flash ROM.
The number of semiconductor chips differs depending on the Flash
ROM model number: 1, 2, and 4.
This also helps identifying the model number of Flash ROM.
Kinds of Flash ROM
Normal Number of
Flash ROM
Kinds installing semiconductor
model number
position chips
MFP (PROGRAM1) MFP PWB LHF64FK4 2
ROM CN12 slot
MFP (PROGRAM2) MFP PWB LHF64FK4 4
ROM CN11 slot
PCU ROM PCU PWB LHF00L28 1
SCU ROM SCU PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
PTTL90 USB port
DSPF ROM DSPF PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
USB memory installing position
PTTL90
FAX1 ROM / FAX1 PWB / LH28F800BJE - 2
4) Turn ON the power.
FAX2 ROM FAX2 PWB PTTL90
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
(2) Operating procedures more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
a. Firmware update function
This function is used to copy the firmware data from a USB mem- Update Program Init
ory or the PC which is connected with a USB cable to the MFP
PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, or various
Please wait
options to update the firmware.
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected. Version Check
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
Conf : 00050000
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update. Display when booting is completed
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this 6) Select the firmware update mode.
method cannot be used. On that case, the Program ROM 1
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot pro-
gram.
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section Firm Update
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this method From USB Memory
can be used to update the firmware. If, however, an abnormality
occurs in the boot program, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced Display of the firmware update mode
with a new one having the normal boot program.
7) Press [OK] key.
When the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality
in the boot program (Program ROM 1). The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the main program (Program ROM 2). Firm Update
a-1. Necessary items
> F 0100P000.sfu
1) Machine (Insert the MFP (PROGRAM1) ROM into CN12 slot,
and insert the MFP (PROGRAM2) ROM into CN11.)
Display of file selection
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it. (Save the
firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower direc- 8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
tory.)
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
minute.
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
firmware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Display of the firmware update result
OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to OFF. (Set the DIP-SW to the
normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the rear cabinet.
NOTE: If the CN update function does not work normally, refer to
"Check items when the CN update function does not work
normally" and fix the abnormal points.

[8] MAINTENANCE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with "" in the table below.)
When repairing (replacing consumable parts) / maintenance When repairing

When When After (without
JOB When
No. Work item Simulation replacing replacing cleaning the Periodic replacement of
No. Installation replacing
the OPC the fuser scanner maintenance consumable
developer
drum web roller (read) section parts) / inspecting
1 — Toner 25-2 
concentration
reference control
level setting
2 — The photo- 24-7 
conductor
counter is
cleared.
3 — Clear the fuser 24-4 
web cleaning
send counter.
4 ADJ12A Copy/Printer 46-24     
image quality
check and
adjustment
• The JOB No. indicates the title number of the adjustment item described in the chapter of the adjustments.
• Refer to the details based on this number according to necessity.
C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing

Item Simulation
The paper jam / trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch are cleared. 24 3
The maintenance counter is cleared. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL) 24 4
The list of setting values and adjustment values is printed. 24 6
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 1
2. Contents of the maintenance codes (Relationship between various counters values
and display messages)
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified value.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and counters are as shown below.
A. Maintenance counter C. Fusing section counters

Message when near end over Message when near end over
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Near end Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name Counter name
conditions “0” “1” conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop Print Enable Print Stop
Maintenance 90% of Sim.21-1 Message (1) Fusing unit print No criteria
counter (Total) set value counter
Fusing unit usage No criteria — —
days
Message when end over
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
“0” “1” Message when not installed
Print Enable Print Stop Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Unit name Not installed
Maintenance Sim.21-1 set value Message (1) Message (2) “0” “1”
counter (Total) Print Enable Print Stop
Fusing unit Judged by the Message (7) Message (7)
signal level of the
Message Print job
Message fusing thermistor
No. Enable/Disable
Fusing web unit No criteria
(1) Maintenance required.Code: TA Enable
(2) Maintenance required.Code: TA Disable
(With parentheses) Message when end over
Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
• After completion of maintenance, clear the maintenance counter Counter name End conditions
“0” “1”
of SIM24-4. Print Enable Print Stop
Fusing web print 200,000 [sheets] Message (5) Message (6)
B. Transfer unit section counters counter
Fusing web Judged by the Message (5) Message (6)
Message when near end over
cleaning feed fusing web life end
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name counter detection signal,
conditions “0” “1” not by the fusing
Print Enable Print Stop web cleaning feed
Transfer unit print counter.
counter Fusing web usage 740 [days] — —
Transfer unit — — days
accumulated
traveling distance Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the fusing web print
Transfer unit — — counter or the web life end detection.
usage days
Waste toner Twice ON of Message (3) Message (3) Message Print job
Message
200ms or above of No. Enable/Disable
waste toner near (5) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Enable
end detection (6) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Disable
signal (Displayed with parentheses)
(7) Install the fusing unit. Disable
Message when end over (Displayed with parentheses)
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions • After completion of maintenance, clear the fusing unit counter of
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop SIM24-4 (the fusing unit print counter, and the fusing unit usage
Waste toner Twice ON of Message (4) Message (4) days).
200ms or above of
D. OPC drum section counters
waste toner end
detection signal
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name
Message Print job conditions “0” “1”
Message
No. Enable/Disable Print Enable Print Stop
(3) Please replace the toner collection Enable Drum cartridge No criteria
container. (with OK key) print counter (K)
(Displayed with parentheses) Drum cartridge No criteria — —
(4) Please replace the toner collection Disable accumulated
container. (Displayed with parentheses) traveling distance
(K)
• After completion of maintenance, clear the transfer unit counter Drum cartridge No criteria — —
of SIM 24-4-1 (the transfer unit print counter, the transfer unit usage days (K)
accumulated traveling distance, and the transfer unit usage
days).
Message when end over
F. Toner cartridge section counters
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions Toner preparation message
“0” “1”
Sim.26-69A
Print Enable Print Stop Near end Sim.26-69A
Sensor name “1”
Drum cartridge 200,000 [sheets]* Message (8) Message (8) conditions “0”
Not
print counter (K) Displayed
displayed
Drum accumulated 930K rotations Message (8) Message (8)
Toner remaining Detected by the Message (10)
rotation number (K)
quantity sensor toner motor
Drum cartridge 9999 days — — (K) accumulated
usage days (K) rotation time.
(Equivalent to
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum cartridge print
25% or less of
counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter. toner remaining
quantity)
Message Print job
Message
No. Enable/Disable Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
(8) Maintenance required.Code: DK Enable
• After completion of maintenance, clear the drum counter of Sim.26-69B
SIM24-7 (the drum print counter and the drum accumulated trav- Near end Sim.26-69B
Sensor name “1”
conditions “0”
eling distance). Not
Displayed
displayed
E. Developer section counters Toner remaining When a low toner Message (12)
quantity sensor state continues for
Message when near end over (K) more than the
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A specified time (*1)
Counter name
conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print stop Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
Developer No criteria
cartridge print Message when end over
counter (K) Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Developer No criteria — — “0” “1”
cartridge Print Enable Print Stop
accumulated Toner remaining When the pixel Message (11) Message (11)
traveling distance quantity sensor count value
(K) (K) reaches the
Developer No criteria — — specified level
cartridge usage from the near end
days (K) condition. (*2)
Message when end over Message Print job

Message
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A No. Enable/Disable
“0” “1” (10) K Toner supply is low. Enable
Print Enable Print Stop (11) Change the toner cartridge. K Disable
Developer 200,000 [sheets]* Message (9) Message (9) (Displayed with parentheses)
cartridge print (12) K Toner supply is low. Enable
counter (K)
Developer 930K rotations Message (9) Message (9) *1
accumulated • Near end conditions
rotation number (K)
(1) When the toner density sensor output continues 0.14V
Developer 9999 days — —
greater than the toner density reference value for 30 sec.
cartridge usage
days (K) (2) When the toner density sensor output continues 1.00V
greater than the toner density reference value for 2.5 sec.
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print
(3) When the toner density sensor output continues greater than
counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter.
the toner density reference value and smaller than the
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum reference value + 0.14V for 120 sec.
motor rotation number.
*2
Message Print job • End conditions
Message
No. Enable/Disable When the specified toner consumption count value is reached
(9) Maintenance required.Code: VK Enable from the near end state.
After replacement of developer, use SIM25-2 to set the toner den- The specified value is determined by the setting of SIM26-69D.
sity control level. By this setting, the developer counters (the devel- 1 0 sheet
oper print counter and the developer accumulated traveling 2 25 sheets
distance counter) are cleared. 3 50 sheets (Default)
4 100 sheets
5 200 sheets
(The above numbers of sheets are based on A4 and 6% conver-
sion.)
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Photo- Drum –             Replace even at the
conductor specified RPM.
section Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
Cleaner blade –             Replace at 200K of the
drum counter or 2 years
of use.
Toner reception seal –            
Toner reception side –            
sheet F/R
Toner reception –            
lower molt
Side seal F/R –            
Drum separation –            
pawl unit
MC unit ✕            
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
Developing Developer –             Replace even at the
section specified RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
DV seal –             Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
DV side seal F/R –            
Toner filter –             Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
supply Replace after 2 years of
section use.
LSU Dust-proof glass  ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Transfer Transfer roller ✕             Replace at 200K or 2
section years of use.
Discharge plate ✕            
Transfer roller –            
bearing F and R
Transfer roller collar –            
Transfer rear star – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
ring
Transfer gear ✕            
Pre-transfer paper             
guide
Process control ✕             Air cleaning
sensor
Fusing Lower heat roller ✕             Replace with the lower
section heat roller unit. / Replace
at 200K or 2 years of use.
Lower heat roller ✕             Replace with the lower
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
grease (JFE552) when
assembling to the heat
roller.
Upper separation ✕             When a foreign material
pawl is attached, it must be
Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ cleaned away.
Lower separation ✕            
pawl
Web pressure roller ✕            
bearing
Web pressure roller ✕            
Web roller ✕            
Web 45T gear ✕            
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Fusing Fusing paper exit ✕            
section roller
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Paper guides             
Upper heat roller ✕             Replace with the upper
heat roller unit. / Replace
at 200K or 2 years of use.
gear heat roller unit.
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
Upper heat roller ✕             grease (JFE552) when
heat-insulation bush assembling to the heat
roller.
Filter Ozone filter ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller ✕             Replacement reference:
section Paper feed roller ✕             Replace according to
Separation roller ✕             each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
100K
Manual feed: 100K
Transport rollers ✕            
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper             
guides
Paper Resist roller (Idle) ✕            
transport Paper dust             
section removing unit
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper             
guides
Duplex/ Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
paper exit Transport rollers ✕            
section Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Transport paper             
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
section Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ the necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanner Mirror/Lens/             
section Reflection sheet/
CCD
Table glass/SPF             
glass
Scanner lamp ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the LED
(LED PWB) section
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
DSPF Paper feed roller              Replacement reference:
section Pickup roller              Replace according to
Separation roller              each paper feed counter
value.
SPF section roller:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to
Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ each paper feed counter
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
limiter: Replace at 400K
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers             
No. 1 scanning plate             
No. 2 scanning             
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning             
section, white
reference glass
CIS unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
Paper exit roller             
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC mat             
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Option
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Inner Transport rollers ✕            
finisher/ Transport paper ✕            
Punch unit guides
for Inner Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
finisher the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Knurling belt ✕             Replacement reference:
Paddle ✕             Replace at every 1000K
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Saddle Transport rollers             
stitch Transport paper             
finisher guides
(1K)/Punch Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
unit for the necessary positions.
Saddle Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
stitch
Knurling belt ✕             Replacement reference:
finisher
Replace at every 1000K
(1K)
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(For saddle finisher)
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Finisher Transport rollers             
(4K)/Punch Transport paper             
unit for guides
Finisher Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
(4K) the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Paper Transport rollers             
pass unit Transport paper             
guides
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
A4 large Pickup roller/ ✕             Replacement reference:
capacity Paper feed rollers Replace according to
tray each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
value.: 100K
Transport paper             
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕             Replacement reference:
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller ✕             Replace according to
Separation roller ✕             each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
value.: 100K
Transport paper             
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
A. Photo-conductor section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
1 Drum –             Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 Cleaner blade –             Replace at 200K of the drum
counter or 2 years of use.
3 Toner reception seal –            
4 Toner reception side –            
sheet F/R
5 Toner reception –            
lower molt
6 Side seal F/R –            
7 Drum separation –            
pawl unit
8 MC unit ✕            
9 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
6
2
5 4
6 5
8
7
1
7
3
4
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) [Countermeasures]

1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
[Note] perform the following countermeasures.
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum 1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.) 2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.
• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the [Check method]
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet. Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both ing method.
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to • Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade 8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
may flip.) the image.
5mm 2. Prior exposure prevention
[Note]
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
5mm • Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
(1) Waste toner box replacement 4) Remove the blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and
1) Open the front cover. hold the handle to remove the unit.
(3) MC unit replacement

2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it. 1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the MC unit.
Maintenance: Replace the waste toner box with a new one Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
every time when it is full (By the user). Check it every-time NOTE: When inserting the MC unit, be careful not to scratch the
when a serviceman calls. (Replace it in advance if necessary.) drum.
(4) Drum replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and rotate the fixing shaft to remove.
Slide the drum to the front side to remove.
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
NOTE: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
(2) Photo-conductor unit removal drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
1) Remove the toner cartridge.
[Refer to "C. Toner supply section."]
2) Remove the developing unit.
[Refer to "B. Developing section."]
3) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
(5) Drum separation pawl unit replacement (8) Side seals F and R replacement
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the drum separation pawl 1) Remove the side seals F and R.
unit. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
NOTE: Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the tip of the separa- the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
tion pawl. ment.
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
0mm
F 0.3mm R
0.3mm
0mm
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
2) After replacement of the side seals F and R, apply stearic acid

(6) Toner reception seal, toner reception side sheets F (UKOG-0309FCZZ) evenly to the side seals F and R by using
and R replacement the micro-spatula (UKOG-0311FCZZ).
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the toner reception seal.
NOTE: Be careful not to apply excessively to the parts on the
Remove the toner reception side sheets F and R from the
periphery.
toner reception seal.
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
57mm
57mm
A and B.
NOTE: Attach the toner reception side sheets F and R according to F R
the reference.
B (9) Cleaner blade replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and slide the cleaner blade to the rear
side to remove.
A NOTE: Before removing the cleaner blade, remove the side seals
F and R in advance. When, therefore, the cleaner blade is
Plate edge reference replaced, replace the side seals F and R with new ones as
0mm 0mm well.
If this note is ignored, a trouble such as improper cleaning
or toner leakage may occur.
0.3mm 0.3mm
NOTE: Be careful not to touch or scratch the tip of the cleaner
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm blade.
Duplex tape reference Duplex tape reference NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
A  B  C.
(7) Toner reception lower molt replacement

1) Remove the toner reception lower molt.
NOTE: Attach with the edges of the side seals F and R as the ref-
erence so that there is no clearance with the side seals F
and R.
C
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
0mm 0mm B
F R
A
0.3mm 0.3mm
B. Developing section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Developer –             Replace even at the specified
RPM.
2 DV seal –             Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
3 DV side seal F/R –            
4 Toner filter –             Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
5 Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5
3
2
1
(Note for servicing the DV roller) [Check method]

1. Prevent roller contamination Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
[Note] dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method.
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface. • Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
• When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section 8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
to rotate it. the image.
(1) Developing unit removal
1) Remove the waste toner box. [Refer to "A. Photo-conductor
section."]
2) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "C. Toner supply sec-
tion."]
3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
(Note for cleaning the developing unit) 2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the
If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower unit.
with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit.
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign mate-
rial from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the
magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling
the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)
3) Supply new developer.

NOTE: When supplying developer, use care not to spill it. Espe-
cially, take a great care not to spill developer on the drive
section.
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.
(2) Developer replacement

NOTE: Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover.
NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
engaged with the frame pawl.
(3) Toner filter replacement

1) Remove the toner filter.
(4) DV seal replacement
1) Remove the DV seal.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
0.5mm 0mm
0mm
0.5mm
(5) DV side seal F and R replacement

1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
0.5mm 0.5mm
F R
0mm 0mm
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
C. Toner supply section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
(1) Toner cartridge replacement 2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove.
1) Open the front cover. Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the
user)
NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and

inset it slowly.
NOTE: Shake the toner cartridge several times.
D. LSU section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Dust-proof glass  ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(1) LSU removal NOTE: Lift the LSU tip and insert it so that the LSU boss comes in
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2. the frame hole. After insertion, remove the toner cartridge
and check.
2
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
(2) Dust-proof glass cleaning

1) Clean the dust-proof glass.
C Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
B NOTE: Do not touch the dust-proof glass with bare hands.
A 4
1 3
3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

LSU.
E. Transfer section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transfer roller ✕             Replace at 200K or 2 years
of use.
2 Discharge plate ✕            
3 Transfer roller bearing –            
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar –            
5 Transfer rear star ring – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Transfer gear ✕            
7 Pre-transfer paper guide             
8 Process control sensor ✕             Air cleaning
5 4
6
5
5
5
3
5
5
2
43
7
(1) Transfer unit removal (2) Pre-transfer paper guide and process control
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. sensor cleaning
1) Remove the pre-transfer paper guide. Clean the pre-transfer
paper guide and the process control sensor.
Maintenance: Clean at every 200K. (Clean the process control
sensor by blowing air.)
NOTE: When installing, engage the boss in the rear side, and then
engage the boss in the front side.
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
(3) Transfer roller, transfer roller bearing F and R, (4) Discharge plate replacement
transfer roller collar, and transfer roller gear 1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the discharge plate
replacement holder. Remove the discharge plate.
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the transfer roller. Remove NOTE: When installing, insert the discharge plate into the boss
the transfer roller bearing R, the transfer roller collar, and the and check to confirm that it is securely on the ground elec-
transfer roller gear from the transfer roller. trode.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing R and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller
gear and the transfer roller collar.
2) Remove the transfer roller collar and the transfer roller bearing
F from the holder.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing F and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller col-
lar.
F. Fusing section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Lower heat roller ✕             Replace with the lower heat
roller unit. / Replace at 200K or
2 years of use.
2 Lower heat roller ✕             Replace with the lower heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease
(JFE552) when assembling to
the heat roller.
3 Upper separation pawl ✕             When a foreign material is
4 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ attached, it must be cleaned
5 Lower separation pawl ✕             away.
6 Web pressure roller ✕            
bearing
7 Web pressure roller ✕            
8 Web roller ✕            
9 Web 45T gear ✕            
10 Fusing paper exit roller ✕            
11 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
12 Paper guides             
13 Upper heat roller ✕             Replace with the upper heat
roller unit. / Replace at 200K or
2 years of use.
14 Upper heat roller gear ✕             Replace with the upper heat
roller unit.
15 Upper heat roller ✕             Replace with the upper heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease
16 Upper heat roller heat- ✕             (JFE552) when assembling to
insulation bush the heat roller.
3
13 15
4 16
3 14
4
1
5
8
15
16
2
17
9
11
6
11 6
7
11 Grease Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease 11
UKOG-0012QSZZ
12
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
11
Grease 10
UKOG-0235FCZZ
12
(1) Fusing unit replacement 2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. fusing unit.
(2) Fusing paper exit roller cleaning (4) Web roller/Web 45T gear removal
1) Clean the fusing paper exit roller. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the web roller bearing.
Maintenance: Clean at every 200K.
2) Remove the left and the right springs, and remove the web
operation shaft.
(3) Web pressure roller bearing and web pressure

roller replacement
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the harness. Remove the blue screw, and
remove the web unit.
2) Remove the web spring, and remove the web pressure roller
bearing. Remove the web pressure roller 3) Remove the web roller (on the winding side).
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
* When installing, check to confirm that there are one concave
section on the front side and two concave sections on the
rear side, and be sure to engage them securely.
* When installing, engage the concave section (one position)
on the front side with the spring pin and two concave sec-
tions on the rear side with the web roller (on the feed side).
4) Remove two web tension shafts. [Note for installation]
* When installing, insert the rear side first. Note that the front Turn the gear (B) in the arrow direction, and set so that the lead
side (gear side) of the shaft is narrower. edge of the green line (A) of the web roller can be seen.
B A
(5) Thermistor replacement

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness. Remove
the screw, and remove the thermistor.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert into the thermistor boss.
5) Remove the web roller (on the feed side) and the web 45T
gear.
* When installing, fit the concave section and the convex sec-
tion of the gear on the front side to engage securely.
(6) Upper separation pawl replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the upper separation
pawl unit. Remove the upper separation pawl.
[Route diagram]
(7) Lower separation pawl replacement (8) Lower heat roller and lower heat roller bearing
1) Lift the lever to cancel the pressure of the heat roller. Remove replacement
the blue screw, and open the fusing unit. 1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove the lower heat
roller bearing from the lower heat roller.
2) Open the paper guide. Disengage the spring hook from the (9) Upper heat roller, upper heat roller gear, upper
paper guide rib, and remove the lower separation pawl. heat roller insulation bush, and upper heat roller
Remove the spring from the lower separation pawl. bearing replacement
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
NOTE: When installing the spring, pass the spring hook through
the hole in the lower separation pawl.
NOTE: When installing the lower separation pawl, first install the
shaft which is not provided with the spring to the paper
guide.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw, and

remove the fixing plate. Remove the heater lamp.
3) Remove the blue screw, the ground plate, and the paper guide
unit.
4) Remove the upper heat roller unit.

NOTE: When installing, put the flange of the upper heat roller bear-
ing on the outside of the frame.
5) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller, and
remove the upper heat roller gear, the upper heat roller insula-
tion bush, and the upper heat roller bearing.
G. Filter section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Ozone filter ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
(1) Ozone filter replacement

1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the ozone
filter.
Maintenance: Replace filter at every 400K.
When installing the filter, be careful not to turn out the periph-
eral molt and to insert the filter straight.
H. Paper feed section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Paper pick-up roller ✕             Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕             Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕             paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: Replace
at 100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers ✕            
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
7 Transport paper guides             
1
2
4
5 6
6
6 6
6
3
2
6 6
1 5
1
6 6
5 2
6
4 4
6 6
3 3
5 5
(1) Manual paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper 2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
feed roller, and separation roller replacement the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
1) Remove the pickup cover.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
1
3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.
3
4
5
1
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
(2) Manual paper feed unit torque limiter replacement

5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector. 9) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
2
6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual 10) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
feed tray unit.
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit. 11) Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
1
3
2
8) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.

(3) Tray paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper feed
roller, and separation roller replacement
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2) Remove the paper guide. (4) Tray paper feed unit torque limiter replacement
1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
3) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
a
1
2
4) Remove the separation roller.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front.
4) Remove the right lower door unit. 7) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
5) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
8) Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper

feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pres-
sure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
1
2
6) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.

3
9) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
counter.
3 2
1 4
I. Paper transport section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Resist roller (Idle) ✕            
2 Paper dust removing unit             
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3
1
4
4
3
(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller

cleaning
1) Open the right door.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
B C
J. Duplex/Paper exit section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
3 3
Grease 1
UKOG-0307FCZZ
3 3
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
(1) Each transport roller cleaning 4) Open the right door.
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
2) Open the ADU open/close door.
5) Remove the reverse PG unit.
6) Clean the transport roller 13 (Drive).

3) Clean the transport roller 10 (Drive) (A), and the transport
roller 11 (Drive) (B).
K. Drive section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
1
Grease 2
UKOG-0299 Grease
FCZZ UKOG-0012QSZZ
3 1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
L. Scanner section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Mirror/Lens/             
Reflection sheet/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass             
3 Scanner lamp ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the LED section
(LED PWB)
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
5 Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 4
2
2
4
5
6
5
5
1
M. DSPF section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Paper feed roller              Replacement reference:
2 Pickup roller              Replace according to each
3 Separation roller              paper feed counter value.
SPF section roller: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to each
5 Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ paper feed counter value.
(for PIC) SPF section torque limiter:
Replace at 400K or 2 years of
use.
6 Transport rollers             
7 No. 1 scanning plate             
8 No. 2 scanning section,             
scanning glass
9 No. 2 scanning section,             
white reference glass
10 CIS unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
11 Paper exit roller             
12 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
13 OC mat             
14 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
14 14
5
2
4
1
3
6
10
13
7
6
8
9
11
12
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.
(3) Torque limiter SPF replacement

1) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
counter.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide. Remove

the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
(4) Take-up torque limiter replacement

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring.
Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing, the holder, and the
take-up torque limiter.
counter.
(2) Separation roller replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover.
N. Inner finisher/Punch unit for Inner finisher
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
– Transport paper guides ✕            
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Knurling belt ✕             Replacement reference:
Finisher count value of
1000K.
3 Paddle ✕            
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 200K stapling.
7 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 1000K punching.
8 Staple cartridge User replacement for every use of 5,000 pcs.
1
1
1
1 1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4 4
4 4
4
4 4 4
4 4
4
5
3
2
3
3
5
3 6
5
3 8
3
2
O. Saddle stitch finisher (1K)/Punch unit for Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
– Transport paper guides             
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Knurling belt ✕             Replacement reference:
Replace at every 1000K of
the finisher paper exit count
value.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
5 Stapler unit for saddle Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
6 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
7 Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000pcs.
8 Staple cartridge for saddle User replacement for every 2000pcs.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 6
7
2 2
2 2
1
2
2
2 7
2 1
2
2 1
2 4
2 2 5
8
2 2
3
2 2 1
2
1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P. Finisher (4K)/Punch unit for Finisher (4K)
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
4 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
– Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
1 1 1 1 3 1 1 4
2
2
2 2
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2 2
Q. Paper pass unit
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
– Transport paper guides ✕            
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
R. A4 large capacity tray
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Pickup roller/ ✕             Replacement reference:
Paper feed rollers Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
100K
5 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6
6
2
3
6
1
1 6
6 5
1
S. Paper feed tray (Desk)
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Pickup roller ✕             Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕             Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕             paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
100K
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1
5
4
2
3
5
4
5
3
2
1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. HDD partition and data contents

A. HDD map
offset
(GB) 0 1 2 3 4
Outer
tracks 0 Image file system 1 (ERDH/Temporary storage) 12GB
10
15 Image file system 2 (Document filing) 38GB
20
25
30
35
40
45
System storage data Printer spooler General-purpose file General-purpose file
1GB 2GB system 1 system 2
50 1GB 1GB
General-purpose file system 3
55 2GB
Unassigned area
60
65
General-purpose file system 4 General-purpose file system 5
70 2GB 5GB
Inner
tracks 75
B. HDD storage data
Description of the area Capacity Stored data

Image file system 1 12 [GB] Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage)
Image file system 2 38 [GB] Image data (Document filing)
System storage data 1 [GB] Image-send-related data such as an address book, FSS data
Printer spooler 2 [GB] Spool area for printer
General-purpose file system 1 1 [GB] User authentication data, FEP learning dictionary, download font, user profile
General-purpose file system 2 1 [GB] Job log, job completion list
General-purpose file system 3 2 [GB] Application work area
General-purpose file system 4 2 [GB] Data escape area during transition of DSK
General-purpose file system 5 5 [GB] e-manual
MX-M503N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 9 – 1

2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼䋩㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㪽㪽㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫅㪼㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷
㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪥㪦
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷
㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪈㪀㪖
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷
㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪥㪦
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㫊㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪉㪀㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪰㪜㪪
㪈㪉㪊
㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪈㩷㩽㩷㪉㪕㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪊㪕
㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫂㪼㪼㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㪹㫌㫋㩷
㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪅㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪺㪸㫅㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㪃㩹㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤
㩷㩷㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋
㪈㩷㩷㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼
㩷㩷㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪁㩷㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㪃㩷㪹㫃㪸㫅㫂㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪜㪯㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫋㫆㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪅
㪉㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪠㪤㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤
㩷㩷㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪈㪅
㩿㪈㪀㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫉㫆㫇㫉㫀㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪺㫆㪻㪼㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪍㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪼㫊㩷㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㪝㪘㪯㪀㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫊㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㪸㫏㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪉㪀㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪎㪄㪎㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪪㪛㪩㪘㪤㪅
㩿㪊㪀㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩹㩷㪸㫋㩷㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩹㩷㫆㫇㪼㫅㩷㩹㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩹㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㪋㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪙㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㫀㫅㪺㪿㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷㪠㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫋㫆㫉㪸㪾㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㪀㩷㫆㫉㩷㪻㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪺㫃㫆㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪀㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪽㪸㫀㫃㫌㫉㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㪸㫊㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be
generated.

B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
1) HDD storage data and backup
2) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
3) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
4) Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
5) Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be b. Work contents and procedures
backed up
When a new HDD
a. Work contents and procedures (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
When a new HDD is normal but a program model) is used *
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD error occurs in it is used.
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
is normal but a program model) is used * and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
error occurs in it is used.  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. performed.
(Servicing) Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup is displayed.  Cancel
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB with SIM16.
memory.)
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
is no need to perform
authentication data))
formatting procedure with SIM.
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
Step 4 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
or servicing)
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Step 3 Replace the HDD. Fax models.)
Step 4 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex Step 5 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
 Formatting is automatically machine.
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
performed.
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
Step 5 The trouble code, U2-05, machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
is displayed.  Cancel
with SIM16. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 6 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format shipping.
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
is no need to perform (4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD
formatting procedure with SIM. storage Operation Manual data
Step 7 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The 1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not the web site (Tech-DS home page).
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Fax models.) the file hierarchy.
Step 8 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD. (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
Step 9 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
Step 10 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
are copied.)
to import. NOTE:
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
authentication data))
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
Step 11 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use • The file size is different.
macro • The time stamp is different.
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
imported.)
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
data cannot be backed up due to breakdown ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 12

7(67 &/26(
a. Display when HDD breakdown (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@

',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
is popped up. ',5!0$18$/
In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
must be replaced.


3) Insert the USB memory into the machine. 2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
1. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen ',5!:0
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case

of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed. 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
(5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures • When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
1) Obtain the watermark data. ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
site (Tech-DS home page). 1.
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing 4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the file hierarchy. Or copy the watermark data from the acces- the watermark data install menu.)
sory CD-ROM to the USB device. The current version and the update version are displayed.
NOTE: 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are are changed from gray-out to active display.
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which 6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD. are installed.
• The file size is different. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
• The time stamp is different. of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
3. Counter list
SIM
Display item Descriptions Count-up
Setting Display Clear
condition setting
MAINTENANCE COUNTER Maintenance preset counter (Total) 21-01 –
(TOTAL)
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black and white 22-01 –
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black and white 22-01 – 26-5
COPY(BW) Black and white copy counter 22-01 24-06
84
PRINT(BW) Black and white print counter 22-01 24-09
84
DOC FIL(BW) Black and white document filing print counter 22-01 84
OTHER(BW) Black and white other counter 22-01 24-09
84
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) 22-01 24-04 26-5
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fusing web unit 22-01 24-04
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations K (%) 22-01 –
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations K (%) 22-01 –
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 22-02 24-01
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter 22-02 24-01
TROUBLE Trouble counter 22-02 24-01
SPF Document feed quantity 22-08 24-03
SCAN Number of times of scan 22-08 24-03
STAPLER Staple counter 22-08 24-03
PUNCHER Puncher counter 22-08 24-03
STAMP Stamp counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter 22-08 24-03
COVER Cover open/close counter 22-08 24-03
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection 22-08 24-03

SIM
Display item Descriptions Count-up
Setting Display Clear
condition setting
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 22-09 24-02
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) 22-09 24-02
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) 22-09 24-02
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) 22-09 24-02
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) 22-09 24-02
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) 22-09 24-02
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section) 22-09 24-02
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter 22-11 24-10
FAX SEND FAX send counter 22-11 24-10
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 22-11 24-10
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter 22-11 24-10
SEND TIME FAX send time 22-11 24-10
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 22-11 24-10
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications 22-11 24-10
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) 22-13 24-07
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 22-13 24-07
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 22-13 –
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) (K) 22-13 24-07
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) 22-13 24-05 26-5
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 22-13 24-05
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 22-13 –
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) (K) 22-13 24-05
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K) 22-13 –
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) 22-13 –
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) 22-19 24-15
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job) 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page 22-19 24-15
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send 22-19 24-15
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send 22-19 24-15
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 22-19 24-15
SMB SEND Number of SMB send 22-19 24-15
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 22-19 24-15
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) 22-19 24-15
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) 22-19 24-15
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) 22-19 24-15

[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-M503N 2. Details
Service and operation procedures
Manual
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
1. General exclusively used for the serviceman
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page 1) Boot a browser program.
exclusively used for the serviceman. 2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
Menu/Item Function and content servicing page menu.
Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Default password: "service"
Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
3) Enter the password to log in.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting
contents). Default Password: service
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and
other resources are downloaded to the HDD
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting
information in XML format. By importing the
export file to the other device, the setting values
and setting contents of the device can be
copied to another device. This function is useful
to set the same setting to two or more machines
efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data
in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user
management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the
serviceman. (Select among preset items.)
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version. NOTE:
Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
The password can be optionally changed in the Password Set-
*1 Settings
ting menu.
Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
Settings If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data. reset the password to the default.
Syslog
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
B. Password Setting
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested in order to
troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
file to the client PC.
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
MX-M503N SERVICE WEB PAGE 10 – 1

C. Output of Test Page (3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
1) Click "Initialize" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
(1) Export
1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro
3) Reboot the machine.
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.
The file in the HDD is deleted.

F. Filing Data Backup H. User Control 2
(1) Export Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
1) Select the folder to be backed up. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu. (Example of use)
2) Click "Execute" button. The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
name: *****.bin)
mode for servicing work.
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
I. Job Log
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button. (1) Save Job Log
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.
G. User Control
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

(2) View Job Log K. Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now
processing..." is displayed.

(2) Storage/Send Settings (4) View Syslog
Keep all the items selected.
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.

[11] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-M503N (7) Printable
Service area
Manual
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm
1. Basic specifications A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
A. Base engine A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
(1) Type
A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
Type Desktop Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
(2) Engine composition 16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: 30mm) * The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the A3/
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 11" x 17" page dimension (297 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver.
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush
development Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
Transfer system Transfer roller
8mm or less
Cleaning system Counter blade FR total: 4mm2mm or less
Fusing system Heat roller
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner (8) Engine speed (ppm)
bottle system
a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
(3) Dimension / Weight
36-sheet 45-sheet 50-sheet
Outer dimension (W x D x H) 25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 36-51/64 machine machine machine
Paper size
inch (645 x 695 x 935 mm) Plain Heavy Plain Heavy Plain Heavy
Dimension occupied by the machine 38-13/16 x 27-23/64 inch paper paper paper paper paper paper
(W x D) (986 x 695 mm) A3, 11" x 17", 8K 17 11 20 15 22 15
(When the bypass tray is extended) B4, 8.5" x 14", 20 14 23 17 25 17
Weight Main unit Approx. 209 lbs (95 kg) 8.5" x 13",
(including photoreceptor) 8.5" x 13.4",
(not including consumables) 8.5" x 13.5"
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 25 17 30 21 30 21
(4) Warm-up 16KR
B5R,
Warm-up time 20 seconds or less 7.25" x 10.5"R
Pre-heat Yes A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22 22 22
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 36 30 45 35 50 35
(5) First copy time 16K
Extra, User-Extra: 16 11 19 14 21 14
Engine 36-sheet machine 45/50-sheet machine Paper width
Platen 4.6 second 3.9 second 150mm or less
DSPF 9.5 second 8.8 second Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width over
* Measuring conditions: A4 (8.5" x 11") 150mm
(6) Engine resolution
b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding
Resolution Writing
36-sheet 45-sheet 50-sheet
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi
machine machine machine
600 x 600dpi Paper size
Plain Heavy Plain Heavy Plain Heavy
Print: 600 x 600dpi
paper paper paper paper paper paper
1200 x 1200dpi
Default resolution (Copy) A3, 11" x 17", 8K 17 11 20 15 22 15
• Printed photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph: B4, 8.5" x 14", 20 14 23 17 25 17
1200dpi 8.5" x 13",
• Automatic, Text, Text/Printed photo, Map: 600dpi 8.5" x 13.4",
Gradation Writing 8.5" x 13.5"
Monochrome A4, 8.5" x 11", 32 30 41 35 41 35
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi * 1bit 16K, B5
600 x 600dpi * 1bit B5R, 23 17 30 21 30 21
Print: 600 x 600dpi * 1bit 7.25" x 10.5"R
1200 x 1200dpi * 1bit A4R, 16KR,
* Equivalent to 256 gradation 8.5" x 11"R
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22 22 22
12" x 18", A3W *1 16 11 19 14 21 14
Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width
150mm or less
Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width over
150mm
Envelope – 11 – 14 – 14
Postcard HIGH *2 – 18 – 22 – 22
Postcard LOW *2 – 11 – 14 – 14
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 1
36-sheet 45-sheet 50-sheet (2) Memory, hard disk
machine machine machine Memory capacity, HDD capacity
Paper size
Plain Heavy Plain Heavy Plain Heavy
paper paper paper paper paper paper Copier memory Standard Memory 640MB *1
OHP – 30 – 35 – 35 (Local Memory) Expansion Memory No
(A4, 8.5" x 11") Max. 640MB
OHP – 17 – 21 – 21 Printer memory Standard Memory 1GB
(A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) (System Memory) Expansion Memory 1GB
*1: ppm when exiting to the finisher Max. 2GB
(A3W/12" x 18" cannot exit to the center tray) HDD 80GB *2
*2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low *1: 128MB (on-board) + 512MB
before shipment.
*2: The HDD capacity may vary depending on the production date.
(9) Power source

C. Operation panel
NOTE: Check the shape of the power plug of the machine, and
insert it into a power outlet of the adaptable shape. (1) Display device
a. Color LCD
100V series 200V series
Voltage / Current 100 - 127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A Size/resolution 8.5inch WVGA
Frequency 50/60Hz Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Power source code Fixed type Inlet Display dot number 800 x 480 (WVGA)
(Direct connection) Color Color
Power switch 2 switches LCD drive display area (W x D) 184.8 x 110.88mm
(Primary switch: in the front cover; LCD back-light Fluorescent lamp back-light system
Secondary switch: the operation panel)
LCD brightness adjustment Yes
(10) Power consumption

D. Scanner section
100V series 200V series (1) Resolution/Gradation
Max. Rated Power 1.44kW 1.84kW
Consumption *1 Scanning Platen600 x 600 dpi
TEC value 36-sheet machine: 6.6 kWh Resolution 600 x 400 dpi
45-sheet machine: 9.75 kWh (dpi) 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
50-sheet machine: 11.50 kWh DSPF 600 x 600 dpi
Moving time to Pre-heat 10 minutes (default) 600 x 400 dpi
mode 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
Moving time to Sleep mode 1 minutes (default) In sending Internet Fax /
Scanner Fax
Resolution Direct SMTP
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification (dpi) *1 Standard
heater is OFF. 200dpi x 100dpi
(203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
100dpi x 100dpi (halftone not
(halftone not
allowed)
allowed)
B. Controller board Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
(1) Controller board
Super Fine
300dpi x 300dpi 200dpi x 400dpi
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
CPU Power QUICC II Pro MPC8377E
Ultra Fine
Interface 400dpi x 400dpi 400dpi x 400dpi
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
Ethernet 1 port
600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
Exposure lamp White LED
1000Base-T
Reading gradation 10bits
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/
Protocol SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk Output gradation B/W: 1bit
Grayscale: 8bit
USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each
* Simultaneous connection the rear section cannot be used
is inhibited. The total simultaneously. (Exclusive use)
(2) Document table
current consumption must
not exceed 500mA.
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Scanner expansion I/F Yes
Original standard position Left bottom reference
Memory Refer to the section on “(2) Memory, hard
Detection Yes
disk”.
Detection size Automatic detection
Memory slot 2 slots (one is empty slot)
Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
(Scanner section)
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

Scan speed Monochrome (A4 / 8.5" x 11") Color (A4 / 8.5" x 11")
Copy Single: 70-sheet/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 1bit)
50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1 bit)
36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
Duplex: 70-page/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 1bit)
50-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
36-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit)
Fax / Internet Fax Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Scanner Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Original setup direction Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Original size Standard size: (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed combination
Mix feeding available. (same system, same width)
Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
either A3 or A4 and either B4 or B5; either B4 or B5 and either A4R or A5 and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (19pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600dpi)) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
documents
Transport disable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
document document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/DSPF) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11"
DSPF
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11"
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11"
* 5.5" x 8.5"R, A5R cannot be detected.
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Power source Provided from main unit
Dimensions W23-13/16 x D20-5/64 x H6-3/32 inch (W605 x D510 x H155 mm)
E. Paper feed section (2) Tray 1, 2 (Main unit)

(1) Type Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
Type Standard: 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13",
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R,
feed tray 5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Full option:
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
feed + LCC
heavy paper
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit)
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index
(106 - 209g/m2)
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5" x 11", Tray 2: 11" x 17"
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
detection
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) F. Paper exit section
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (1) Center tray of main unit
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Paper exit section Center section of the Right side paper exit
12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", main unit section of the main
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, unit
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, envelope, 8K, Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system
16K, 16KR Paper exit capacity 400 sheets 100 sheets
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, (When A4, 8.5" x 11") (When A4, 8.5" x 11")
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper:
heavy paper, thin paper, envelope, OHP, weight 13 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2)
label sheet, tab paper Plain paper:
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper: 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
13 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) Heavy paper:
Plain paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Envelope:
Heavy paper: 20 - 24 lb bond (75 - 90g/m2)
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) Shifter function Yes No
Paper exit detection No
(4) Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray) Paper exit full detection Yes
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 (2) Shifter
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", Paper weight 14 lb bond - 55 lb index (56 - 209g/m2)
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11" R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, 8K, Paper size/type Non-offset Size:
16K, 16KR mode A3W and 12" x 18" are not
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, acceptable
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Type:
heavy paper Glossy paper
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: Offset Size:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) mode A3W, 12" x 18", envelope and
Heavy paper: are not acceptable
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) Type:
Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width Thin paper, envelope, OHP, label
shipping paper, tab paper and glossy
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) paper are not acceptable
detection Offset width 30 mm
Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit) Integrity Non-offset Getting out:
Dimensions with 28-22/64 x 11-15/16 inch, * In using the mode It doesn't fall down from tray
(W x D x H) adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm recommended paper, Offset Getting out: within 50 mm
without 24-13/64 x 26-3/8 x 11-15/16 inch, A4/8.5" x 11" mode FR shift: within 10 mm
adjuster 615 x 670 x 303 mm JOB distance: 10 mm or more
(5) Tray 5 (LCC) (3) Paper exit tray
Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray Type Exit tray unit

Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the
Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" system main unit/Paper exits in face-down
Paper size setting Simulation setup Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (When A4/8.5" x 11")
Paper size setting when A4 Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except
shipping type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper.
Paper type setting Yes Shifter function No
Allowable paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Paper exit paper full Yes
and weight for paper letter head, punched paper, colored paper: detection
feed 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
G. Copy functions
Effective height: 385 mm (1) Copy magnification ratio
Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
detection Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio 1: 1 0.8%
Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor) AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
and control PWB are built-in to LCC. 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
Off-center adjustment  3mm 200%, 400%
(Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment) Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
(without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W Zoom 25-400% (DSPF: 25-200%)
Power source 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main Preset magnification 4 (Reduction 2/Enlargement 2)
unit ratio
External dimensions 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 x 20-15/32 inch, XY zoom Yes
(W x D x H) 370 x 550 x 520 mm
Dimensions occupied by 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 inch, 370 x 550 (mm)
Machine (W x D) * Clearance with main unit: 235 mm
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs, 30 kg
Thermal heater Standard equipment: AC power is supplied
from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
OFF operation.
Optional detection Auto detection system
(2) Density/copy image quality process Special functions
Stamp Date print Yes
Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Map Text print Yes
(600 dpi)
Stamp Yes
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph
Page print Yes
(1200 dpi)
User stamp No
Number of manual steps 9 steps
Watermark Yes
Toner save mode Yes
* Available for Automatic (AE), Text/Printed Image edit Photo repeat Yes
Photo Multi-page Yes
enlargement Crop mark printing supported.
(3) Duplex Mirror image Yes
A3 full bleed Yes
System Non stack system Centering Yes
Paper size 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356), B/W reverse Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343), (B/W copy) (UK not supported)
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330), Sharpness Yes
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, Quick file Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
Filing Yes
8K, 16K, 16KR
Proof copy Yes
Type and weight of Plain paper:
Original count Yes
paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
passed Heavy paper: Mixed original Yes
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209 g/m2) Random Yes
Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, MIX Yes
letter head, printed paper, punched paper, Combination with APS Yes
heavy paper Combination with AMS Yes
Slow scan Yes
(4) Copy functions Ignore blank paper No
Repeat layout No
Functions
Chapter inserts No
Automatic paper selection Yes
Book division No
Automatic magnification ratio selection Yes
Move No
Paper type selection Yes
Shading No
Paper type setting Yes
Document control Yes
Auto tray switching Yes (When the Data Security Kit is installed)
Rotation copy Yes
Large rotated copy over A4 width Yes H. Printer function
Electronic sort Yes
(1) Platform
Rotation sort No
Job reservation Yes (99)
• IBM PC/AT
Tray installation priority Yes • Macintosh
Program call / registration Yes (48)
Program name registration Yes (2) Support OS
Document paper size input Yes
Document paper size registration Yes Custom Custom Custom
OS PPD
Indeterminate paper size input Yes PCL6 PCL5e PS
Indeterminate paper size registration Yes Windows 98 / Me Yes Yes Yes Yes
2-sided copy direction switch Yes NT 4.0 SP5 or later Yes Yes Yes Yes
Preview function Yes 2000 Yes Yes Yes Yes
XP Yes Yes Yes Yes
XP x 64 Yes No Yes Yes
Special functions
Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) Yes
Server 2003 x 64 Yes No Yes Yes
Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/side Yes
Server 2008 Yes No Yes Yes
erase)
Server 2008 x 64 Yes No Yes Yes
2 in 1 Yes
Vista Yes Yes Yes Yes
Center binding (Centering provided) Yes
Vista x 64 Yes No Yes Yes
Large volume document mode Yes
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2 No No No Yes
Setting change for each bunch Yes
X 10.2.8 No No No Yes
Tandem copy Yes (via network)
* Available only between MX-M363N/ X 10.3.9 No No No Yes
M453N/M503N series) 10.4.11 No No No Yes
Cover paper insertion Yes X 10.5 - 10.5.5 No No No Yes
Tab paper insertion Yes
* Insertion only Tab copy not allowed.
(3) PDL emulation
OHP insertion Yes
PCL5e compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard.
(Inserted paper is automatically
selected.) PCL XL compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard.
Multi shot (2 in 1 / 4 in 1) Yes PostScript 3 compatibility Compatible with PS3 of Adobe Systems.
Boundary line print Yes
Centering Yes
Page printing per original page Yes
Book copy Yes
Tab copy Yes
Card shot Yes
(4) Font (3) Support image
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font Mode Support image

PCL5e Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code Scanner File format TIFF
compatibility, Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts (Monochrome) PDF
PCL6 Encrypted PDF
compatibility XPS
PostScript 3 – Roman outline fonts File format Color TIFF
compatibility = 136 fonts (Color/Grayscale) JPEG
(Option)
PDF
(5) Print channel Encrypted PDF
XPS
USB USB.1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/ Compression system Non-compression
XP/Vista/server 2008 only (Monochrome) G3 (1-dimensional) = MH
USB2.0 (High Speed): Window 2000/XP/Vista/ (Modified Huffman)
server 2008 only G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
PSERVER / RPRINT for Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be Compression system JPEG
NetWare environment used in netware environment (Color/Grayscale) (High/Middle/Low)
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print High compression PDF
channel (When MX-EBX3 is
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0 installed)
PAP: EtherTalk Print channel to be used for Macintosh Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
(AppleTalk) environment Direct SMTP (Monochrome)
FTP Equipped with the function to print data Compression system G3 (1-dimensional) = MH
received via built-in FTP server (Monochrome) (Modified Huffman)
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
Raw Port (Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported Fax File format
N/A
HTTP (Web Submit (Monochrome)
Print) Compression system MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) (Monochrome)
Conversion for each page to a file (Available to quantity specification)
IPP, HTTP and POP3 support SSL.
(4) Item number of registration items
(6) Environment setting
Item No. of registration items
Setting item General
One-touch/Group 1000 items
Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number
Max. number of registration items for one
of copies and the print direction
group (500 items)
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
Program 48 items
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter /
error, setting of binary data outputting
relay and broadcast: 100 items (Fax)
Sender registration Fax, Internet Fax: 1 item
I. Image send function
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000 items
(1) Mode Transfer table list Fax, Internet Fax: 1 item
Sender selection 18 items
Scanner • Scan to e-mail Item name 30 items
• Scan to Desktop File name 30 items
• Scan to FTP
Polling allow number Fax: 10 items
• Scan to Folder (SMB)
• Scan to USB memory (5) Image processing
• Scan to e-mail with Meta
• Scan to Desktop with Meta
Internet Fax
• Scan to FTP with Meta Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
• Scan to SMB with Meta
Original Black-white Yes Yes Yes
• Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
scanning Grayscale Yes N/A
(Document Admin)
color Full color Yes N/A
Fax • Fax to Fax (Manual)
• Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer) Auto Color N/A
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing) Selection
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin) Halftone Equivalent Equivalent to 256 gradations levels
Internet Fax • Internet Fax to Internet Fax (Manual) reproduction to 256
• Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB gradations
(Inbound routing) levels
• Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB Density Auto Yes Yes
(Document Admin) adjustment (Color/Gray:
Text/Printed
(2) Support system 3)
Manual 5 steps
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Corresponding SMTP POP server
server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server
N/A
SMB ESMTP server
HTTP/HTTPS
Internet Fax Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Direct SMTP
Original Text Yes N/A Direct entry of file Yes N/A
document Text/ Yes N/A name
type Photograph Reply-To Select from the N/A N/A
(Selectable Text/ Yes N/A list/direct entry/
in manual Printed select from
mode) photo LDAP server
Photograph Yes N/A Transmission Yes N/A
Printed Yes N/A message
photo (message body)
Map Yes N/A Transmission Select from the list/direct entry N/A
Magical scan (Area N/A message selection
division + Suppress Number of letters of Max. of 1800 half-width letters. N/A
Background) transmission
Selection of image quality N/A Halftone (Black-white only) message
ON/OFF Preset mail footer *3 Yes N/A
Resolution (depends on 100 x 100dpi 200 x 100dpi Normal text Disable Registering Yes
file format/transmission (Halftone not (203.2 x Destination from
method) allowed) 97.8dpi) Operation Panel
(Halftone not Disable registration Yes
allowed) destination on Web
200 x 200dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine (203.2 x page
195.6dpi) Disable registration Yes N/A
300 x 300dpi 200 x 400dpi Super Fine using the network
(203.2 x scanner tool
391dpi) Disable [Retry] on Yes
400 x 400dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine Fax/Image send
(406.4 x mode
391dpi) Disable selection Yes
600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi N/A from the address
Moire reduction mode Yes N/A book
Disable direct entry Yes
(6) Specification of addresses Disable broadcast No
setting
Internet Fax Disable PC-Internet N/A Yes N/A
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Fax sending
Address setting Setting by one-touch/group/direct address entry, Disable PC-Fax N/A N/A Yes
entry from externally-connected keyboard and sending
selection from LDAP server are available
* Modes for direct address setting is allowed: *1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address.
e-mail / Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/ To transmit data, users only have to set the original and press
Fax/SMB the start key.
Default address Yes N/A *2: Desktop, USB memory, SMB, FTP and broadcast are not
setting *1
included.
Number of one- Total (number of key): Max. 1000
touch address key (Total registrable number for FTP/ SMB/ Desktop is *3: Function to set up a text message that will be added
registration 200 at max.) automatically to the message body upon e-mail transmission.
Number of Group Max. 500 Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
(1 key) address
registration
Number of Group 5000 (Total address number included in 1000 key)
(7) Specification of multiple addresses
key registration of
direct entry Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Program 48 (Group/one-touch)
Broadcast Yes (e-mail/ Yes
Direct entry of Entry using Soft keyboard or an Entry by 10-key,
FTP/Desktop/
addresses external keyboard # key, * key
SMB available)
Directory walking Yes (SMB) N/A
Number of Broadcast 500
(Refer/Search)
destinations (For FTP/SMB/Desktop, max. 200 items)
Chain dial N/A Yes
Request of serial N/A Yes
(by pause key)
transmission
Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses sent as a single
destination. *2
Destination N/A Yes
confirmation
Shortcut for address Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
selection addresses.
(Quick key)
CC/BCC sending Yes N/A
Subject Select from the list /direct entry N/A
Subject registration 30 N/A
Direct entry of Yes N/A
subject
File name Select from the list /direct entry N/A
File name 30 N/A
registration
(8) Transmission functions (9) Reception function
Internet Fax Internet Fax

Mode Scanner Fax Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Direct SMTP
Memory transmission 94 destinations in all Automatic reception N/A Yes
On-hook N/A Yes Manual reception N/A Yes Yes
Quick on-line N/A Yes (Direct SMTP: No) Switching from
transmission manual
Direct transmission N/A Yes reception to
(Switching: Memory automatic
transmission  reception.
Direct transmission) Allowed only
Manual transmission N/A No for France.
setting Switching from N/A Yes
Automatically N/A Yes manual reception to (France only)
reduced transmission automatic reception
Rotated transmission N/A Yes Fixed size reduced N/A Yes
reception
Scaled transmission Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a Specified size scaled N/A No
fixed size to another. reception
Recall mode Error N/A Yes Rotated reception N/A Yes
Busy N/A Yes (Direct Yes Setting of received N/A N/A Yes
SMTP) data print condition
N/A Internet Fax: Yes 2-sided reception N/A Yes
only number is 2 in 1 reception N/A No
set. A3 RX automatic N/A Yes
Direct SMTP: reduce print (Inch
Number/times type and Fax using
set in the destinations only)
System Letter Size RX N/A Yes
Settings. automatic reduce
Long original Yes print (AB type and
transmission Max. of 1000mm (1-side only/black-white binary Fax using
only) destinations only)
Internet Fax, 600x600dpi: Max. of 800mm Allowing Address/ N/A Yes N/A
Scanner, 400dpi or more: impossible Domain setting (50 domains)
Change of the Yes N/A reception
number of pages for Not allowing N/A Yes N/A
each file Address/Domain (50 domains)
Job partition through No N/A setting reception.
recognition of white (To be rejected)
paper. Allowing reception N/A Specified
Ignore blank paper No N/A from a specific numbers only
Restriction on Yes (Direct SMTP doesn’t have No number. (50 numbers/
transmission size limitation) 20 digits)
Drop-out color No N/A Not allowing N/A Specified
Finish stamp function Yes (option) reception from a numbers only
specific number. (50 numbers/
Confidential N/A No
(To be rejected) 20 digits)
transmission (Sharp
mode) Automatic switching N/A No
of phone/Fax.
Relay broadcast N/A No
transmission (Sharp External phone N/A Yes
mode) connection remote
Job build mode Yes Answering phone N/A No
connection
Thin paper scan Yes
mode Dial-in N/A No
Mixed originals Yes (random + MIX) Confidential N/A No
feeder reception
(Sharp mode)
Default date sender N/A Yes
transmission Received data N/A Yes
(ON only) bypass output
Preview Yes Reception N/A Yes N/A
confirmation cycle (Setting by
Edge erase (Edge/ Yes
setting 0-8 hours/
Edge + center/center/
each minute)
side)
(Direct SMTP: No)
Original count Yes
POP3 N/A Yes N/A
Book division No
communications (Setting by
Fax destination N/A Yes time-out setting 30-300/every 30
confirmation seconds)
(Preventing (Direct SMTP: No)
mistarnsmittion)
Index printing N/A No
Body text print setting N/A Yes N/A
Transfer function N/A Yes
during output is (1 transfer receiver can be
disabled. registered each.)
Internet Fax (11) Other functions
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Inbound routing N/A Yes Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
(Internet Fax/Fax 1) Formats can be selected. Direct SMTP
receive data network (PDF/Single TIFF/Multi TIFF/ Time specification Yes
transfer) XPS) Polling reception N/A Yes
2) Destinations: e-mail/FTP/ Bulletin board N/A Yes
SMB/ Desktop transmission Up to 100
3) Information about the MFP registrations
that transfers the data is allowed with
added to the transferred data. bulletin board,
4) Transmission table has confidential
timetable. and relay
5) Transfer by judging the line broadcast all
kind is enabled. combined.
(Fax/Internet Fax) (Free area: 1
Exit tray setting N/A Yes registration)
Insertion of job N/A No Setting of the
Separator sheet number of
Print number setting N/A No Yes transmission:
of received data 1/no limit.
Staple function of N/A Yes Cover sheet function N/A
received data Transmission N/A
Auto wake up print N/A Yes message
Hold Setting for N/A Yes Sender print N/A Yes
Received Data Print Sender selection N/A Yes
(ALL RX data into the Page number print N/A Yes
Memory regardless) Date print N/A Yes
Foot print N/A Yes (Date indication can be
Image Check N/A Yes (Users can check received data changed)
(Preview) before printing it) Polling protection N/A Yes
Alternative reception N/A 100 (Total of Internet Fax and Fax) function
number Page partition Yes
transmission
(10) Report/list function Page connection No
Confidential N/A Yes
Internet Fax transmission (F code
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP method)
Communication Yes Relay broadcast N/A Yes
report table Time-specified output/ Output when memory is instruction (F code
full Transmission method)
Scanner: only manual output
Relay broadcast N/A Yes
* Maximum of 200 reports including both
transmission (Fax to
transmission and reception
e-mail/Internet Fax/
Communication N/A Yes Fax (F code) *
result table
2 in 1 transmission No (Allowed Yes
Address/phone Yes for Fax/
number table Internet Fax
Group table Yes broadcast)
Program table Yes Suppress Yes (Only N/A
Memory box table N/A Yes background color and
(F code) grayscale)
Notification table of No N/A Card shot Yes (Magnification ratio 63-400%)
clearing memory Transmission N/A Yes N/A
(During error) confirmation Time-out time
Communication N/A Yes can be set
original contents print from 1 minute
List of allowed or not N/A Yes - 240 hours by
allowed numbers for each minute
reception (Direct SMTP:
List of allowed or not N/A Yes N/A No)
allowed addresses Forwarding sent and Yes
for reception received data Forwarding data formats can be selected. (Single
Inbound routing No Yes (Document Admin) TIFF/Multi TIFF/PDF/XPS) (Scan to e-mail/FTP/
Table list SMB/Desktop/PC-Internet Fax/PC-Fax/Fax/
Document Admin list Yes Internet Fax are also supported)
All settings list Yes Folder setting by each of send and receive is
supported.
Web setting list Yes
Number of Job status 99
indication
* Function that enables settings of e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax

addresses as destinations of F-code broadcast.
(12) Record size Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Internet Fax Registration of Fax N/A No
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP system number
Maximum record width N/A 293mm (Sharp mode)
Record size N/A A3 - A5/11" x 17" - 5.5" x 8.5" Registration of Fax N/A No
polling approval ID
(13) Registration-related setting number (Sharp mode)
Fax relay ID N/A No
Internet Fax registration (Sharp
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP mode)
One-touch/group *1 1000 destinations LDAP can be used. Quick key (short cut Yes
e-mail/ FTP/ Desktop/ registration) *2 (0001 - 1000)
SMB/ Internet Fax Retrieving/scanning of Yes
(Direct SMTP)/ Fax registered data to (By address book conversion utility)
Maximum registration 500 addresses other model
number per group dial Import/export of Yes
One-touch name 36 characters in full and half size address book (By storage backup)
registration
One-touch dial Up to 64 digits including receiver number, *1: Since scan/Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/Fax uses the
receiver number sub-address and passcode (including “/”). common address book, the number of addresses allowed for
registration (Fax) registration is the sum total of all modes.
Group name 36 characters in full and half size *2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registration
registered number of each address within the book for address
Address book No
selection. Users can select a quick key number.
registration from
Resend screen (14) Sound settings
Default address setup Yes N/A
Desktop registration Yes N/A Internet Fax
Mode Item Scanner Fax
(Registration by using Direct SMTP
Web or NST (network On-hook sound Sound volume N/A Yes*2
scanner tool)) setting
SMB destination Yes N/A Sound volume Sound volume N/A Yes*6
registration (Can be for calling setting
registered on the Ring tone Sound volume N/A N/A
Web.) setting
FTP destination Yes N/A Line monitor Sound volume N/A Yes*6
registration (Can be sound setting
registered on the Reception Sound volume N/A Yes*1 No
Web.) sound setting
Program Addresses 48 Reception Sound volume N/A Yes*6
(One-touch, groups), finish sound setting
settings (density, Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
image quality,
Time setting for N/A Yes*4
resolution, original
communication
setting) and special
ending sound
functions can be
Transmission Sound volume N/A Yes*6
registered in one set.
finish sound setting
Number of memory N/A 100
Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
boxes (Including
bulletin board/ Time setting for N/A Yes*4
confidential/relay communication
broadcast) ending sound
Memory box N/A Up to 18 Transmission Sound volume N/A Yes*6
registration name characters in full and reception setting
and half size error sound Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
Reply-To registration 1000 (user N/A Time setting for N/A Yes*5
registration communication
from Web) ending sound
Number of sender N/A 1 (20 characters) Only one sender Communication Sound volume N/A Yes*1 No
registration is registered, and Internet Fax/Fax error sound setting
addresses or phone numbers are Sound setting Sound volume Yes*1
registered in the name part. for end of setting
(40 characters in half size is original reading
available by soft switch setting) (image send)
Number of sender N/A N/A Total: 18 (20
selection registration characters) *1: Setup by system setting.
(In addition to *2: 9 steps. Setup by system setting.
default, 18 *3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Setup by system setting.
registrations
available) (40 Different sound should be selectable for each of reception/
characters in half transmission success/transmission and reception error.
size is available *4: Setup by system setting. 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds.
by soft switch
*5: Setup by system setting. 2-steps setting by very 0.3 or
setting)
0.7 second.
Registration of polling N/A Yes
approval number 10 numbers/ *6: 10 steps (including no sound). Setup by system setting.
20 digits
(15) Others Sender print Prints always
Preview Yes
Internet Fax Delivery confirmation Yes
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP (Notification to PC by
PC-Internet N/A Yes N/A NJR)
Fax Document filing function Filing
PC-Fax N/A Yes Automatic temporary save
FAST N/A Yes PC-Fax send log Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
(North America
User authentication Yes
only)
Timer No
Network FAST N/A No
Distinctive ring N/A Setting for each K. Document filing function
detection destination
Trial mode Scanner: Yes No N/A (1) Basic function
Meta data: Yes
Linearized PDF Yes Supported N/A Number of files that can 38GB
with Net Scan be saved in the standard • 20,000 pages or 3,000 files (*1)
Tool folder/user folder
Number of files that can 12GB
J. PC-Fax, PC-Internet Fax functions be saved in temporary file • 10,000 pages or 1,000 files (*2)
folders.
(1) Working environment Number of folders that Max. 1,000 folders
can be made as user
OS • Windows 98 folders.
• Windows Me Number of users which Same as that of account users of the main
• Windows NT4.0 Workstation can be registered unit (1,000)
(Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more)
• Windows 2000 (*1): When the standard document (binary) is used.
• Windows XP
(*2): When the standard document (gray) is used.
• Windows XP x 64
• Windows Server 2003
Color Gray Monochrome
• Windows Server 2003 x 64
(Binary mode)
• Windows Server 2008
• Windows Server 2008 x 64 Original gregfruit test sheet C test sheet C
• Windows Vista
• Windows Vista x 64
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
Monitor Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above
Number of colors: 256 colors or above
Memory 64 MB or more
HDD Empty capacity of 50MB or above
Interface USB 2.0
38GB 2,500 5,500 20,000
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T 12GB 800 1,700 10,000
Communication protocol LPR / lp
(2) Data operation by each function
Port9100 (RAW)
IPP
Each folder in the
USB2.0
standard folder Temporary folder
/user folder
(2) Functions Job
Confi- Confi-
Sharing Sharing
PC-Internet Fax send Yes (Internet Fax expansion kit is required) dential dential
storage storage
Internet Fax address: max. 64 digits storage storage
PC-Fax send Yes Copy Yes Yes Yes No
(When Fax is installed) Printer Yes Yes Yes No
Fax number max. 64 digits Direct print (FTP pull) No No Yes No
(including sub-address and passcode) Direct print (FTP push) No No Yes No
Resolution 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi / Direct print (USB pull) No No Yes No
400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi* Direct print (e-mail push) Yes No Yes No
* Internet-Fax/Direct SMTP only Direct print (Web push) No No Yes No
Windows 2000 type is only supported. Direct print (SMB pull) No No Yes No
Send document size A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11" x 17" / 8.5" x 14" / Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes No Yes No
8.5" x 11" / 5.5" x 8.5" / 8.5" x 13" / 8K / 16K
Scan to Desktop Yes No Yes No
Compression system MH / MMR
Scan to SMB Yes No Yes No
Broadcast send Yes (Mix of Fax and Internet Fax is available.
Scan to USB memory No No No No
Max. 500 items)
Scan to HDD Yes Yes No No
F-code send Yes Sub address Yes
Internet Fax reception No No No No
(Max. 20 digits)
Internet Fax send Yes No Yes No
Pass code Yes
(Max. 20 digits) Fax reception No No No No
Telephone book Yes Fax send Yes No Yes No
registration, Send function PC Fax / Yes Yes Yes No
Use of MFP phone book No PC-Internet Fax send
Covering letter Yes (Not allowed for broadcast transmission) Data input Yes No Yes No
attachment function Remote PC Scan No No No No
Covering letter making Yes
function
(3) Data operation contents
User’s selection section
Resend
Operation content WEB Operation panel Mode Job kind Selected color mode
Reprint Yes Printer Printer No selection available N/A
Resend Yes Copy Copy No selection available Yes
Delete Yes Image Scan send Full color Yes: Full color/
send Binary B/W
Shift Yes
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Attribute change (Common/ Yes
Confidential/Protection) Binary B/W Yes:
Binary B/W
Confidential file setting Yes
(Password: max. of 8 digit Internet Fax No selection available Yes
numbers) send
Confidential folder setting Yes Fax send No selection available Yes
(Password: max. of 8 digit Document Scan to HDD Full color Yes: Full color/
numbers) filing Binary B/W
File name change Yes Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Creation of a folder Yes Binary B/W Yes
File transfer to Local PC, Yes No (Send allowed mode)
FTP server (Data backup) Binary B/W No
Backup scheduling setting No (High capacity mode)
Auto backup upon obstruction No
at trouble Functional Basic Format, resolution, image quality,
Machine HDD occupying rate Yes settings function transmission details settings, meta-data input
display for resend Special Time specification, sender print, sender
Preview Preview before N/A Yes modes selection, communication result table
storing in Scan
to HDD L. Ambient conditions
Checking stored Yes
image data (The print data displays only the first
(1) Working environment
page.)
Retrieval Yes (Humidity)
Changing file format Yes 85%
Collective print Yes
Delete with the time specified Yes 60%
Connection of different files No
Multi file selection (print only) Yes
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is

disabled.
20%
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
10 30 35
User’s selection section Reprint (Temperature)
(Monochrome
Mode Job kind Selected color mode
only)
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C
Printer Printer No selection available Yes
conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH
Copy Copy No selection available Yes
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
Image Scan send Full color Yes
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
send Grayscale
Binary B/W Atmospheric 590 – 1013 hPa
pressure (height: 0 – 2000m)
Internet Fax No selection available Yes
send Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
Fax send No selection available Yes
unsealed state
Document Scan to HDD • Full color Yes
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
filing • Grayscale
month under unsealed state
• Binary B/W
(Send allowed mode)
• Binary B/W
(High capacity mode)
Functional Basic Number of copies, finishing, selecting paper,

settings function duplex
for reprint Special Saddle stitch, 2 in 1/4 in1, margin shift, stamp,
modes document control (when data security kit is
installed), tandem print
DSPF UNIT SPPD1 SPED SPLS1
MX-M503N
SCOV SPPD2 SOCD SPLS2

SRRC SPPD3 SPPD4 SPWS
OPTION SPPD5
STMPS DSPFFAN
SPOD CIS UNIT
SPM
SPFM
DSPF DRIVER PWB DSPF CNT PWB

1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
OPTION SCANNER UNIT

CARD READER OPTION
FA X CCD PWB
1
SCN AUDITOR
DERIVERY UNIT PWB PNC
DSW_F OPTION
POD1 POFM1 POM OPTION LED PWB
OPTION MIM
DSW_R PNC MOTHER
POD2 POFM2 ADUMH COIN VENDOR PCU PWB LED DRIVER
ORS_LED
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
POFM3 TNF PWB

TFD2 OSM PWB
HPOS WEBM TNBOX OCSW
FUM TDSC MHPS

OPTION
USB HUB OPERATION UNIT
TOUCH
PWB PANEL
ADUML OZFM INVERTER
FUSER UNIT WEB-END DRIVER
LVDS PWB LCD
PFM PWB DM CRUM PWB
TH_UM
RRM PSPS OPTION
ORS_PD
TH_US HL_UM OPE PWB PWB
FIN 4K POWER SW
HL_US HL
or PWB
PWB Option
S-FIN
HL_UW USB
or CONV KEYBOARD
PS UNIT TH/HUD-DV USB I/F
FININNER
RIGHT DOOR UNIT PPD1 TCS
RDCFM LCC
OPTION PPD2
HVU DH LSU CNT LD PWB
POD3 PCS USB HOST
MX-M503N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

PWB
APPD1 BD PWB
DESK 1
Service Manual
APPD2 RD I/F PSFM1 DH PGM

OPTION PWB CPUC1 CPUC2 CSS11-14 CSS21-24 or
TFD3 PSFM2 DESK 2 LSU UNIT
CPFC1 CSPD1 CSPD2
DSW_ADU DH
CLUM1 CLUM2
MFPC
CPFD1 CPFD2 PWB
OPTION
ADUGS
CLUD1 CLUD2 DCPS
LSUCFM CPFM FAX
CPED1 CPED2 OPTI ON 2
MPFD Japan
MPWD DSW_C WHSW STD
PAPER FEED 2
MPLD MPED CPFC2 UNIT HDD LAN
AC TRAY
MTOP1 MPUC MSW PWB WH Japan
USB
PAPER FEED 1 DH1 CPUFM
PWB STD USB HOST
UNIT
MTOP2 MPFS
DH2
Japan
MPGS STD SCANNER
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT AC IN
B. DSPF unit, Operation unit and Scanner control PWB
DSPF UN OPE_UN
(Color) CIS UN DSPF Driver PWB Touch Panel

Motor
White LED 8.5 inch
CIS Motor Color WVGA
Driver SOL
AFE AFE
LSI
Sensor
LVDS PWB KEY PWB
DSPF_cnt PWB
CPU Receiver
Receiver KEY Buzzer LED
(H8S)
Program SRAM USB Host
SCAN ASIC Flash ROM Flash DIMM Work Front Access
SDRAM (Shading)
(Medusa) Sensor Power SW PWB
Key Board Option
Mirror
Motor
SCNcnt PWB
CPU IO ASIC
Program SRAM (H8S)
LED light source Flash DIMM Work
(Color) CCD PWB
Color CCD SDRAM
AFE IPD/DOCC ASIC

Receiver
SCAN ASIC
Receiver (Medusa) BUS SW Transmitter
Mother PWB
USB SWITCH/HUB LCD I/F PIC
SCAN I/F

C. MFP control PWB, Mother PWB
OPE_UN
USB Host LVDS PWB

Front Access
Receiver
Power SW PWB
Key Board Option
SCNcnt PWB
Transmitter
MFPc PWB
Mother PWB
USB Host 2.0 B2B CN
USB SWITCH/HUB
USB Host
System Memory PHY IC
DDR2 200pin SO-DIMM x 2Solt
Program / Option
Flash DIMM
G Ethernet G Ether SoC MPC8377E
PHY IC
RIC I/F PIC

D-SUB 9pin
PCI-e ACRE I/F
ImageArea
LSU I/F
Kronos2 ASIC PCI Uranos

USB device
SCAN I/F
2.0 Hi-Speed
2nd FAX I/F LCD I/F
Image Bus
Local Memory
Kronos2 Local Memory DDR2 144pin SO-DIMM x
On Board SDRAM SATA CN
1Solt
FAX I/F
HDD UN FAX UN
FAX BOX (Option)

Engine Block
LSU unit
LD PWB
LSUCnt PWB
LSU ASIC
(Raccon)
D. Engine
Mother PWB
LSU I/F
Engine Block
PCU PWB
Program CPU
LCC (Option)
Flash DIMM (H8S)
SRAM Finisher (Option)

Work
Fuser UN PMC ASIC DESK (Option)
HV
Sensor
EEPROM Mother LSU unit
Stepping Motor
PWB
LD PWB
CRUM
FAN Motor LSUCnt PWB
IO ASIC New LSU ASIC

(Raccon)
DC Motor
Sensor
Sensor Coin Vendor

(Option)

Uranos ASIC
P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C.
SCN Cnt
P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U. TxD[0]
RxD
E. Serial communication
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN

P.U.
RxD1 TxD
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[0]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[0]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0]
I/O ASIC Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U.
μPD65892GC CTS[0]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD
RxD
P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
TxD_FIN
CPU RTS_DSPF
O.C. Schmit Inv. CTS_DSPF
H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RXD_DSPF
SoC MPC8377E
TXD_DSPF
P.D.
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
P.U.
P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD I/O port
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD I/O port
P.D.
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C. (Optional) H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mot her MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC DSPF Cnt(for DSPF model) Kronos2 ASIC
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[0]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX (D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)- P.U. 244 (buffer) RxD[0]
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O RxD_FAX (D)
DSR_LCC LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)- 244 (buffer)
O.C. O.C. (Optional) ) LVDS TxD[2]
TxD_FAX (CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- P.U. 244 (buffer) RxD[2]
RxD_FAX (CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)- 244 (buffer)
New
I/O ASIC ASIC
A[4:0] P.U.
RTS[0]
μPD65892GC- RTS_FAX (D)
D[15:8] TxD
103 Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. Inv.
PCU CPU CTS[0]
PIC CTS_FAX (D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. 244 (buffer)
RxD RTS[2]
RTS_FAX (CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. Inv.
CTS[2]
CTS_FAX (CS)
1st FAX P.D. O.C 244 (buffer)
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
Voltage
T5AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
D101
+
F101
~
~
12A/125V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
15A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T1AH/250V
N
FW Voltage
Z101
F. AC power line diagram (100V)
Generating F103 Conversion

Circuit +24V1
F3 +24V2
T2.0AH/250V T8AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
+3.3V
L1
no-mounting RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY2 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD2
TD1 TD3

24V1B T1 G T1 G T1 G
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 HLOUT_UM 1 1
MAIN UNIT HLOUT_UW HLOUT_US
10W 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
Reactor DC POWER SUPPLY
10mH
3A F301
Voltage
Conversion
T3.15AH/250V
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
D101
+
F101
~
~
T6.3AH/250V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
T10A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T3.15AH/250V
F2
N
T10A/250V FW Voltage
G. AC power line diagram (200V)
Z101 Generating Conversion

F103 +24V1
F3 F4 Circuit
+24V2
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
+3.3V
L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD1 TD2 TD3

T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V1B
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 1 1
MAIN UNIT HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW HLOUT_US
10W 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
PSU MFPC PWB FAX1(OP)
FAX2(OP) GND1
Mother PWB GND1 GND1 GND1 GND2
GND2 GND2 GND2 5VO
5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VL PIC LSU CNT PWB
SUB 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V PIC 3.3V GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 BD
5VL 5VN
GND1
5VL 5VL GND2
PIC NIC 5VN 3.3V
FET 5VL 5VL 5VL
USB HUB 3.3V
GND2 1.5V GND1
3.3V 2.5V 1.8V 1.2V 1.0V
DCCNT2 24V3 24V3 PGM
GND1 RSPF unit
GND2 5VLD 5VLD 24V3
MAIN DCCNT1 5VO LD For U model Stamp(OP)
F203 5VL GND2
3.3V
24V3 24V3 24V3
5VN 5VN
6.3A/250V
GND1 Motor
+5V_HDD FET GND2
GND2 5VN Solenoid
HDD 12V
24V3 24V3 Cluch
H. DC power line diagram
3.3V
GND2 GND2 24V3 CCD RSPF Driver PWB
GND1 GND1 5VLD 5VN 5VN
A3.3V 3.3V GND2 Sensor
GND2
5VO
GND2 GND2 SCNcnt PWB
12V 12V 12V 12V A5V
24V3 24V3 A5V
5VN 5VN GND2 DSPF unit
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V For IT model
5VO 5VO A10V
A10V
12V 12V DSPFcnt PWB
GND1 GND1 12V
FAN
24V3
LED
5VLD
GND2
(IT model)
GND1 GND1
HVU
GND1 INT24V2
INT24V2 24V3 LAMP DSPF Driver
GND2 (U model) Motor
F202 24V3 PWB
RY1 Driver PWB Solenoid
24V2 24V2 INT24V2 PFM RRM ADUMH ADUML POM 24V3
INT24V2 10V Cluch
6.3A/250V INT24V1 FET A3.3V
GND2 A3.3V GND2
GND1 12V Fan Motor
GND2 (POFM3)
AC PWB 5VN 7V 24V3
3.3V 5VN 5VN
Stamp(OP)
GND2 Sensor
(TH/HUS-DV) 1.2V
5VLD
GND2
F201 GND2 24V3 ORS LED
PCU PWB 24V1B TCS,Solenoid 1.5V PWB 5VN
24V1B 24V1B Cluch,LUM,COUNTER(OP) GND2 Sensor
3.3V 1.5V
6.3A/250V 24V1A 24V1A 24V1A
GND2
DSW-R Fan Motor 5VO
12V
A7V
5VN
Reg
(POFM1/2,PSFM1/2
GND2 OZFM,LSUCFM) 24V3
SCM
Reg CIS
OSM(Stepping Motor)
DSW-F 5VN
FET
WEBM(Synchronous)
GND2 Sensor
INT24V1 INT24V1 OPE
LVDS-PWB GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 INVERTER
5VN 5VN 5VN
DM FUM CPFM GND2 GND2 GND2
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
GND2 GND2 LCD
12V 12V

5VN
GND2 GND2 PSun 5VO
GND2 GND2 GND2 Sensor,CRUM
MFP-OPE
5VN Sensor GND2
GND2 (PPD1,PPD2) 3.3V
FW FW 5VO
5VN
INT24V1
GND2 GND2
5VN ORS PD
5VN 5VN L
GND2 GND2 RY1
5VN 5VN Sensor
3.3V 3.3V (DSW_ADU, APPD1/2)
RIGHT DOOR
GND2 I/F PWB
24V1B
GND2 Sensor(OP)
F204
(TFD3,POD3) L-HL
Fan Motor
24V4 24V4 INT24V1
GND1 GND1 (RDCFM) Sensor
6.3A/250V 5VN 5VN GND2 /HL_PR
GND2 LCC (MPLD1,MPWD HL(UM) HL(UW) HL(US)
F205 MTOP1/2,MPED
Solenoid
24V5 24V5 24V Punch MPFD) N_HL(UM)
GND1 GND1 5V Cluch
6.3A/250V 5VN 5VN 4K FINISHER 24V module
N_HL(UW)
GND2 5V
Interface Sensor (PCS) N_HL(US)
OR pass un
24V4 RIGHT DOOR
GND1 HL PWB
SADLLE 24V 5VN DESK 1
Punch Interface
FINISHER 5V pass un GND2
OR OR
INNER
Punch DESK 2
FINISHER
OPTION
AC PWB
<100V series> (AC CORD)
DC PWB MOTHER PWB
CN6 PAP-03V-S
VLP-03V DCCNT1 1 PHR-3 CN14
CN1 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 1 GND2
1 L_IN DCCNT2 3 2 nDCCNT1
(NC) 2 NC CN2 VLP-03V-K B03B-PASK-1 3 nDCCNT2
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 B3P-PH-K-S
B03P-VL NC 2 (NC) PS-250(RED) CN2 VHR-5N VHR-10N CN10
MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
<200V series> (AC CORD) B03P-VL-K PS-250(RED) GND2 2 2 GND2
VLP-03V or MSW 5VL 4 3 5VL
CN1 CN3 5VL 5 4 5VL
L_IN L_IN 1 L_IN MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin 1 5VO 3 5 5VO
FG FG (NC) 2 NC NC 2 (NC) PS-250 B5P-VH-B 6 3.3V
N_IN N_IN 3 N_IN MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin 1 7 5VN
Inlet connecotr B03P-VL B03P-VL-R VLP-03V-R PS-250 8 12V
SRA-51T-4 F-GND 9 24V3
CN4 VHR-4N-R VHR-3N CN1 10 GND1
L_DC 1 3 L_DC CN3 VHR-3N B10P-VH
NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC 3.3V 1
NC 3 (NC) 1 N_DC 3.3V 2
N_DC 4 B2P3-VH-B GND2 3 (NC)
HL PWB B3P4-VH-R B3P-VH-B
CN1 VLP-03V VLP-03V-E CN5
L_HL 1 1 L_HL
NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC CN4 VHR-6N
N_HL 3 3 N_HL 5VN 1
B03P-VL(WH) B03P-VL-E 5VN 2
5VN 3 P9
2. Actual wiring chart
5VN 4 P9
CN6 GND2 5
1 N_WH GND2 6
A. Power supply section (P1)
2 NC B6P-VH-B
3 L_WH
B2P3-VH-R
CN5 VHR-4N
12V 1 PCU PWB
12V 2
WH-SW GND2 3 (NC) CN4 CN8 PHDR-10VS-2 PSFM1
GND2 4 XLP-12V (Power supply section) (AC section/Power fan) SMR-03V-N / SMP-03V-NC
PS-187(WH) B4P-VH-B (NC) 12 NC PSFM1_V 1 1 PSFM1_V 1
L_WH 1 11 3.3V PSFM1_LD 3 2 PSFM1_LD 2
PS-187(WH) CN7 VHR-8N 9 5VN GND2 5 3 GND2 3
L_WH 1 FW 1 10 GND2 PSFM2_V 2 1 PSFM2_V 1
GND1 2 8 GND2 PSFM2_LD 4 3 PSFM2_LD 3
GND1 3 (NC) 7 12V GND2 6 2 GND2 2
GND1 4 (NC) 6 FW (in) GND2 7 (NC) SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
GND1 5 (NC) 5 FW (out) /INT_CNT 8 PSFM2
GND1 6 2 GND2 INT24V1 9
GND1 7 P9 (NC) 3 nc GND2 10
JPN:STANDARD GND1 8 P9 4 24V1B B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
EX100V:OPTION P3 B8P-VH-B 1 24V1A(Interlock)
EX120V:OPTION B12P-XL(LF)(SN)
EX200V:OPTION CN8 VHR-7N
WH PWB 24V1-b 1
CN1 CN5 24V1-a 2
1 WH-L WHPR 1 24V2 3
2 NC (NC) 2 (NC) 24V3 4
3 WH-N 24V1B 3 24V3 5 (NC)
B2P3-VH-R B03B-PH-K-R PHR-3-R 24V4 6 P9
VHR-3N-R 24V5 7 P9
B7P-VH-B
CN4
WH_N(LCC) 1
WH_N(DESK) 2
(NC) 3 (NC)
P9
WH_L(DESK) 4
WH_L(LCC) 5
B4P(5-3)-VH
VHR-5N
SCANNER UNIT
CN2 ELR-02V / ELP-02V ELR-02V / ELP-02V

WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2
NC 2 (NC) 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH
WH-L(SCAN) 3
B2P3VH-BL VHR-3N-BL JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
CN3 JPN:STANDARD EX120V:OPTION
WH-N(DESK1) 1 EX100V:OPTION EX200V:OPTION

NC 2 (NC) WH EX120V:OPTION
WH-L(DESK1) 3 EX200V:OPTION
B2P3-VH VHR-3N
AC PWB
VHR-4N CN7 CN9
1 24V2 GND2 2
(NC) 2 NC INT24V1 3
3 INT24V2 /INT CNT 1
MOTOR DRIVER PWB 4 INT24V2 B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) PHR-3
B4P-VH-B(LF)
CN5 VHR-3N-R SLR-06VF / SLP-06V SLR-02VF / SLP-02V
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1
GND1 2 2 GND1 2 2 GND1 2
+5VN 3 3 LSUCFM_LD 3
B3P-VH-R 4 LSUCFM_V 4
P4 P4
5 GND2 5
6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6
PCU PWB
CN13
5VN 2
B7P-VH(LF)(SN)
HV PWB
CN1 PAP-07V-S SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2 2
GND1 2 1 GND1 1
/HV_DATA# 3
/HV_CLK# 4
/HV_LD# 5 P5
MHV-T 6
HV_REM# 7
B07B-PASK
Fuser unit Main frame
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
THERMOSTAT(MAIN)
HL(MAIN) 100V series: 480W

200V series: 600W YLR-02VF / YLP-02V
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
VLR-03V / VLP-03V HL(SUB) 100V series: 510W
1 L-HL(COM) 1 200V series: 390W
3 L-HL(COM) 3
2 L-HL(COM) 2
HL(UW) 100V series: 300W
200V series: 300W YLR-01VF / YLP-01V
1 N-HL(UW) 1 PCU PWB
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL PWB
VLP-03V-BK PHR-6 PHDR-18VS-2
CN2 CN4 CN12 (HL section drive)
THERMOSTAT(SUB) 1 N-HL(MAIN) INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
(NC) 2 L-HL(COM) GND2 5 4 GND2
3 L-HL(COM) /HL_PR 1 6 /HL_PR
B03P-VL-BK HLout_UM 2 8 HLout_UM
HLout_US 4 10 HLout_US
CN3 HLout_UW 3 14 HLout_UW
1 L-HL(COM) B6B-PH-K-S (NC) 12 HLout_E
Drawer connector 2 N-HL(UW) (NC) 16 GND2
(LF)(SN) (LF)(SN) 3 N-HL(SUB) (NC) 18 /LSUSS
B03P-VL-R B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
(Power) VLP-03V-R
4 L-HL(COM) 4
6 N-HL(UW) 6
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
5 L-HL(COM) 5
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
Front frame
B. Front section, Fuser unit section (P2)
SMR-04V-B / SMP-04V-BC (Connector)

RTH 1 GND2 1 B-9 GND2 B-1
(Sub contact thermistor) 2 TH_US_IN 2 B-8 TH_US_IN B-2
3 GND2 3 (NC) B-7 (NC) B-3 (NC)
4 TH_MY_IN 4 (NC) B-6 (NC) B-4 (NC)
B-5 GND2 B-5
RTH (NOTE 1) B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6
100V series (NOTE 1) (NOTE 2)
(Main contact thermistor) B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7
B-4: TH_MY_IN (100) connection B-2 WEB-END B-8 SMR-18V-N / SMP-18V-NC
B-3: Not connection B-1 GND2 B-9 1 GND2 5V_TNF 10
200V series (NC) A-10 (NOTE 2) 2 TH_US_IN TNF 11
(NC) A-1 (NC)
B-4: Not connection (NC) A-9 (NC) A-2 (NC) 100V series 3 GND2 GND2 12
B-3: TH_MY_IN (200) connection (NC) A-8 (NC) A-3 (NC) 4 TH_E_IN 5V_TNBOX 13
SRA-01T-3.2 SMR-02V-B / SMP-02V-BC B-6: TH_MY_IN (100) connection
1 WEB-END 1 (NC) A-7 (NC) A-4 (NC) B-7: Not connection 5 GND2 TNBOX 14
WEB-END 2 GND2 2 (NC) A-6 (NC) A-5 (NC) 200V series 6 TH_MY_IN GND2 15
SRA-01T-3.2 (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) B-6: Not connection 7 (NC) GND2 16 PHDR-26VS-1 CN16 (HL section sensor)
(NC) A-4 (NC) A-7 (NC) B-7: TH_MY_IN (200) connection 8 WEB-END TH_UMCS_IN 17 (NC) 1 GND2
(NC) A-3 (NC) A-8 (NC) 9 GND2 TH_UM_IN 18 (NC) 2 GND2
(NC) A-2 (NC) A-9 (NC) (NC) 3 TH_UMCS_IN
(NC) A-1 (NC) A-10 (NC) SMR-18V-N / SMP-18V-NC (NC) 4 TH_UM_IN
1 GND2 1 5 GND2
RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-09V-PS 2 TH_US_IN 2 7 TH_US_IN
RCZR-10V-PS RCZR-10V-PS (NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC) (NC) 6 GND2
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) (NC) 8 TH_E_IN
5 GND2 5 9 GND2
6 TH_MY_IN 6 10 TH_MY_IN
(NC) 7 (NC) 7 (NC) (NC) 13 GND2
8 WEB-END 8 11 WEB-END
9 GND2 9 12 GND2
10 5V_TNF 10 15 5V_TNF
11 TNF 11 17 TNF
12 GND2 12 19 GND2
13 5V_TNBOX 13 16 5V_TNBOX
179228-3(BLACK) 14 TNBOX 14 18 TNBOX
TNF 15 GND2 15 20 GND2

5V_TNF 3 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC) (NC) 14 reserve4-in
TNF 1 (NC) 17 (NC) 17 (NC) 23 24V1B
Fuser unit side P4
GND2 2 (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC) 24 /PNC
VHPGP1S73P+-18 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC (NC) 21 GND2
1 5V_TNF 1 (NC) 22 GND2
179228-3 2 TNF 2 (NC) 25 24V1B
TNBOX 3 GND2 3 (NC) 26 reserve2out
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
(Power)
N-HL(MAIN)
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4 GND2 2 6 GND2 6
3
2
1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
6 N-HL(UW) 6 VHPGP1S73P+-18 7 /C_CARD 7
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 8 /C_SEL 8
4
5
6
B1
B5
B6
B7
B9
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 9 /C_CLOCK 9
5 L-HL(SUB) 5 10 /C_DATA 10
3 N-HL(EXT) 3 11 5VN 11
12 GND2 12
(NC)
(NC)
(Connector) SCN-CNT PWB
GND2
GND2
GND2
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC
N-HL(UW)
B2 WEB-END
B8 TH_US_IN
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B3 TH_MY_IN(200)
B4 TH_MY_IN(100)
B-9 GND2 B-1 1 /C_CARD 1
B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 /C_SEL 2 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N PHR-7 CN3
B-7 (NC) B-3 CARD READER 3 /C_CLOCK 3 1 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD
B-6 (NC) B-4 (OPTION) 4 /C_DATA 4 2 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 5VN 5 3 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK
Main frame side B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 GND2 6 4 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 5 5VN 5 5 5VN
B-2 WEB-END B-8 6 GND2 6 6 GND2
B-1 GND2 B-9 (NC) 7 (NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
A-10 (NC) A-1 B7B-PH-K-S
A-9 (NC) A-2
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
A-8 (NC) A-3 CN13
A-7 (NC) A-4 (Interlock/Driver PWB)
1
2
3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
A-6 (NC) A-5 (NC) 1 GND2
A-5 (NC) A-6 PS-187 P1 2 5VN
6
5
4
B1
B3
B4
B5
B9
A-4 (NC) A-7 DSW-F ELP-02V / ELR-02V ELP-02V / ELR-02V (NC) 3 GND2
A-3 (NC) A-8 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 4 DSW_Fin
A-2 (NC) A-9 2 DSW_Rout 2 2 DSW_Rout 2 5 DSW_Rout
(NC)
(NC)
GND2
GND2
GND2
A-1 (NC) A-10 DSW_Rout 2 6 DSW_Rin
7 24V1A(Interlock)
B8 WEB-END
B2 TH_US_IN
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B6 TH_MY_IN(100)
B7 TH_MY_IN(200)
SPS-01T-187 PS-187-2V VHR-7N B7P-VH-B(LF)(SN)
DSW-R
DSW_Rin 1
24V1A(Interlock) 2
179228-3
PPD2
PS UNIT 5VN 1 Main frame
PPD2 2
GND2 3
5 5VN 5
179228-3 6 PPD2 6
PPD1 7 GND2 7
HV RESISTOR FG 5VN 1 1 5VN 1
SRA-21T-4 PPD1 2 2 PPD1 2
PWB GND2 3 3 GND2 3 PCU PWB
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) PHDR-26VS-1
CN6 (Right door sensor)

(NC) 16 3.3V
(NC) 17 HUD_PS
(NC) 19 GND2
(NC) 18 TH_PS
Right door unit 25 5VN
26 PPD2
QR/P4-32P-C(01) / QR/P4-32S-C(02) 24 GND2
(NC) 23 (NC) 23 (NC) 2 5VN
(NC) 24 (NC) 24 (NC) 4 PPD1
(NC) 25 (NC) 25 (NC) 6 GND2
1 5VN 1 1 5VN
2 SIN3 2 11 SIN3
3 SELIN2 3 7 SELIN2
4 APPD1 4 12 APPD1
OPTION
RIGHT DOOR I/F 5 MPFD 5 8 MPFD
6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD
179228-3 PWB 17 GND2 17 15 GND2
TFD3 PHNR-06-H/BU06P-TR-P-H/PHNR-06-H PHDR-16VS-2 CN2 CN1 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 5VN 1 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3
GND2 2 5 GND2 2 2 GND2 SIN3 3 20 APPD2 20 14 APPD2
5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SELIN2 5 21 POD3 21 10 POD3
3 POD3 4 4 POD3 APPD1 7 22 5VN 22 3 5VN
2 GND2 5 5 GND2 NC(APPD3) 9 (NC) 28 /MPGS 28 20 5VN
179228-3 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 MPFD 11 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC) (NC) 23 GND2
POD3 7 DSW_ADU MPWD 13 12 /MPFS 12 22 PCS
POD3 1 8 GND2 NC(HUD_M) 15 (NC) 13 24V1B 13 21 PCS_LED
GND2 2 9 5VLED2 GND2 2 7 5VN 7 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VLED4 3 10 APPD1 SELIN1 4 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC)
11 GND2 SELIN3 6 9 PCS 9
12 5VLED5 APPD2 8 10 PCS_LED 10
(NC) 13 NC(APPD3) POD3 10 11 RDCFM_V 11
179228-3
(NC) 14 NC(GND2) NC(FAX_D) 12 (NC) 26 GND2 26
DSW_ADU
(NC) 15 NC(5VLED3) NC(TH_M) 14 (NC) 27 RDCFM_LD 27 CN10 (Right door drive section)
DSW_ADU 1 (NC) 8 /MPGS
16 NC 5VN 16 14 /ADUGS 14
GND2 2 (NC) 6 24V1B
S16B-PHDSS-B S16B-PHDSS-B 15 24V1B 15
5VLED2 3 7 /MPFS
PHDR-16VS-2 30 /MPUC 30
31 24V1B 31 5 24V1B
32 F-GND 32 11 RDCFM_V
179228-3 (NC) 29 (NC) 29 (NC) 15 GND2
APPD1 PHNR-03-H/BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H 13 RDCFM_LD
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 3 /ADUGS
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 FG FG 1 24V1B
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 4 /MPUC
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 2 24V1B
18 24V1B
C. Right door unit section, PS unit section (P3)
P1
17 /WHPR
(NC) 16 GND2
(NC) 14 GND2
(NC) 12 GND2
PHDR-32VS-1 (NC) 10 24V1B
CN3 (NC) 9 GND2
(NC) 1 NC(FAX_D) PHDR-18VS-2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3 (NC) 2 NC(GND2)
APPD2 (NC) 3 NC(5VLED6)
APPD2 1 4 APPD2
GND2 2 5 GND2
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 11 NC(GND2) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 13 NC(PSD) 2 /MPUC 2
MPUC
(NC) 28 NC(5VN)
(NC) 29 NC(HUD_M)
(NC) 30 NC(GND2) SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 31 NC(TH_M) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 32 NC 2 /ADUGS 2
ADUGS
(NC) 15 NC(5VLED8)
16 MPLD
(NC) 17 NC(GND2)
18 5VLED12
19 5VN SMR-07V-N/SMP-07V-NC SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
20 MPWD 1 RDCFM_LD 1 3 RDCFM_LD 3
Manual feed tray unit (NC) 21 NC(GND2) PHDR-32VS-1 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 RDCFM
22 MTOP2 CN3 3 RDCFM_V 3 1 RDCFM_V 1
(NC) 23 NC(GND2) MPED 7 4 PCS_LED 4
24 5VLED13 GND2 8 5 PCS 5

179228-3
25 MTOP1 5VLED7 9 6 5VN 6
MPLD (NC) 26 NC(GND2) 5VLED11 12 7 F-GND 7
MPLD 1 PHNR-09-H/BU09P-TR-P-H/PHNR-09-H 27 5VLED9 MPFD 10 SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N PHR-3 PCS
GND2 2 (NC) 1 (NC) 9 (NC) 14 GND2 S32B-PHDSS-B 3 PCS_LED 3 3 PCS_LED
5VLED12 3 (NC) 2 (NC) 8 (NC) S32B-PHDSS-B FG FG 2 PCS 2 2 PCS
(NC) 3 (NC) 7 (NC) SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
4 MPLD 6
PHNR-03-H 5 GND2 5
MPWD 6 5VLED12 4 PHNR-14-H/BU14P-TR-P-H/PHNR-14-H
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 (NC) 1 (NC) 14 (NC)
HV RESISTOR
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 13 (NC) PWB
GND2 1 9 GND2 1 3 MPLD 12 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
4 5VLED12 11 1 24V1B 1
5 5VN 10 2 /MPFS 2
MPFS
6 MPWD 9
7 MTOP2 8
PHNR-08-H/BU08P-TR-P-H/PHNR-08-H
8 5VLED13 7
8 24V1B 1 179228-3
9 MTOP1 6
7 /MPFS 2 MPED
179228-3 10 5VLED9 5
MTOP2 (NC) (NC)
6 MPED 3 1 MPED
11 (NC) 4
(NC) (NC)
5 GND2 4 2 GND2
MTOP2 1 12 (NC) 3
4 5VLED7 5 3 5VLED7
GND2 2 13 GND2 2
(NC) (NC)
3 5VLED11 6
5VLED13 3 14 (NC) 1
2 /MPGS 7
1 MPFD 8 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
1 24V1B 1
179228-3 MPGS
2 /MPGS 2
MTOP1
MTOP1 1
GND2 2
5VLED9 3 PHNR-05-H/BU05P-TR-P-H/PHNR-05-H
5 24V1B 1 179228-3
4 /MPGS 2 MPFD
3 MPFD 3 1 MPFD
(NC)
2 GND2 4 2 GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1
3
5
2
4
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
24V1B
24V1B
24V1B
1
3
5
2
4
6
DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DP-SP1(05) DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
CS1 PAPER FEED UNIT
179228-3
CLUD1 PHNR-14-H / BU14P-TR-P-H / PHNR-14-H
GND2 3 14 GND2 1
CLUD1 2 13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 12 5VN 3
11 GND2 4
10 CPED1 5
9 5VN 6
179228-3 8 GND2 7
CPED1 7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3 6 5VN 9
CPED1 2 5 GND2 10
5VN 1 4 DSW_C 11
3 5VN 12
2 /CPFC2 13
1 24V1B 14 Main frame
179228-3
CPFD1
GND2 3 179228-3 PCU PWB
CPFD1 2 CSPD1
5VN 1 GND2 3
CSPD1 2 DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-24DES-2.5RC PHDR-30VS-1 CN5 (Paper feed section sensor)
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
179228-3 5 CPFD1 5 3 CPFD1
DSW_C 179228-3 20 CPFD2 20 4 CPFD2
GND2 3 CSPD2 3 CLUD1 3 5 CLUD1
DSW_C 2 GND2 3 18 CLUD2 18 6 CLUD2
5VN 1 CSPD2 2 4 CPED1 4 7 CPED1
5VN 1 19 CPED2 19 8 CPED2
8 CSPD1 8 9 CSPD1
17 CSPD2 17 10 CSPD2
PHR-6
D. Paper feed unit section (P4)
6 DSW_C 6 11 DSW_C
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC CSS1 7 /CPFC2 7 (NC) 12 GND2
1 /CPFC2 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 21 24V1B 21 (NC) 13 CSS1
CPFC2 2 24V1B 2 GND2 2 (NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) (NC) 14 CSS2
CSS11 3 9 CSS11 9 15 CSS11
CSS12 4 13 CSS21 13 16 CSS21
CSS13 5 10 CSS12 10 17 CSS12
CSS14 6 14 CSS22 14 18 CSS22
11 CSS13 11 19 CSS13
15 CSS23 15 20 CSS23
PHR-6 12 CSS14 12 21 CSS14
CSS2 16 CSS24 16 22 CSS24
(NC) 1 (NC) 23 5VN 23 23 5VN
GND2 2 24 GND2 24 24 GND2
CSS21 3 (NC) 25 GND2
CSS22 4 (NC) 26 GND2
CS2 PAPER FEED UNIT CSS23 5 (NC) 27 5VN reserve2-in
CSS24 6 (NC) 28 reserve2-in
(NC) 29 GND2
(NC) 30 GND2
B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3
CLUD2 PHNR-09-H / BU09P-TR-P-H / PHNR-09-H
GND2 3 9 GND2 1
CLUD2 2 8 CLUD2 2
5VN 1 7 5VN 3
6 GND2 4
5 CPED2 5
4 5VN 6
179228-3 3 GND2 7
CPED2 2 CPFD2 8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CPED2 2
5VN 1
(NC)
(NC)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHR-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
CPFM
179228-3 INT24V1 1
CPFD2 GND2 2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2 3 FG-OUT 3 (NC)
CPFD2 2 /CPFM_D 5
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
5VN 1 CW/CCW 7 (NC)
/CPFM_CK 4
DF11-8DS-2C DF11-8DS-2C SSJC6-4 CPFM_LD 6
+DF11-8DP-SP1 +DF11-8DP-SP1
CN9 (Paper feed drive section)

14 /CPFC2
13 24V1B
SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC 1 INT24V1
1 GND2 1 2 GND2
2 5VN 2 SLR-06VF / SLP-06V 4 /CPFM_D
3 CRUM_CLK 3 1 INT24V2 1 6 CPFM_CK
SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 4 CRUM_DATA 4 2 GND1 2 7 CPFM_LD
1 LSUCFM_V 1 1 LSUCFM_V 1 5 LSUCFM_V 5 4 LSUCFM_V 4 9 LSUCFM_V
4 LSUCFM_LD 4 2 LSUCFM_LD 2 6 LSUCFM_LD 6 3 LSUCFM_LD 3 8 LSUCFM_LD
LSUCFM 2 /LSUCFM_CNT 2 3 /LSUCFM_CNT 3 7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7 6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6 10 /LSUCFM_CNT
3 GND2 3 4 GND2 4 8 GND2 8 5 GND2 5 11 GND2
5 24V1B 5 9 24V1B 9 (NC) 3 GND2
P2
6 /PNC 6 10 /PNC 10 (NC) 5 5VN
292254-2 / 179228-2 (NC) 12 GND2
2 24V1B 1 15 24V1B
1 /PNC 2 16 /CPFC1
17 24V1B
18 /CPUC1
OPTION 19 24V1B
179228-2 20 /CPUC2
PNC PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H 21 CLUM1
24V1B 1 1 24V1B 2 22 CLUM2
/PNC 2
CPFC1 2 /CPFC1 1 23 GND2
24 GND2
When OPTION setting PHDR-24VS-2 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC
1 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1
CPUC1 2 /CPUC1 1 2 /CPUC1 2
3 24V1B 3
4 /CPUC2 4
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H
1 24V1B 2
CPUC2 2 /CPUC2 1
PHR-2
CLUM1
/CLUM1 2
GND2 1
PHR-2
CLUM2
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
Main drive unit Main frame
DV UNIT
PCU PWB
CN2 (TM)
(NC) 1 (nc)
(NC) 2 /TMA
(NC) 3 /TMXA
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC (NC) 4 /TMB
2 24V1B 2 (NC) 5 /TMXB
TDSC 1 /TDSC 1 (NC) 6 24V1B_TM
5 5 (NC) 7 (nc)
1 1 B7B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7
4 4 CN3
8 8 (DV section/high voltage section)
SMP-10V-NC / SMR-10V-N 1 (nc)
51021-0400 1 24V1B 1 2 (nc)
TCS QR/P8-8P-C(01)/QR/P8-8S-C(02) 2 /TDSC 2 3 24V1B
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 4 /TDSC
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 5 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 6 GND2
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 7 TSGout
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 8 GND2
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 9 TCS
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 10 24V1B
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 (NC) 11 5VN
12 DVCH1
(NC) 13 GND2
14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
(NC) 18 reserve1-in
(NC) 19 /DVBSREM
20 /HV_CLK
(NC) 21 /DHVREM
22 /HV_DATA
23 /HV_REM#
24 /HV_LD
(NC) 25 GND2
HV PWB 26 MHV-T
PF-187U(RED) RD CN1 PHDR-26VS-1
MHV MHV /HV_CLK# 4
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187 /HV_DATA# 3
HV_REM# 7
/HV_LD# 5
VHR-2N-Y YL MHV-T 6
GB 1 GB GND2 2
P1
(NC) 2 (NC) INT24V2 1
SRA-21T-3
B2P-VH-Y B07B-PASK
PAP-07V-S
GR
DVBS 1 DVBS
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-M B2P-VH-M
PF-187U(WHITE) WH
THV THV
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187
BL
DHV 1 DHV
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-BL B2P-VH-BL

MOTOR DRIVER
E. DV unit section, High voltage unit section, Stepping motor section (P5)
PWB PNDP-26V-Z PHDR-34VS-1

CN17 (Driver PWB)
PHR-6 PAP-06V-S (NC) 1 GND2
PFM CN1 CN4 (NC) 2 GND2
PFM24V 2 1 PFM24V ADUMHB 14 3 ADUMHB
PFM24V 5 2 PFM24V ADUMHA 25 4 ADUMHA
PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/ ADUMHXB 16 5 ADUMHXB
PFMB// 6 4 PFMB// ADUMHXA 23 6 ADUMHXA
PFMA// 4 5 PFMA// POMCNT 11 7 POMCNT
PFMA/ 1 6 PFMA/ ADUMHCNT 21 8 ADUMHCNT
B06B-PASK-1 POMB 17 9 POMB
POMA 15 10 POMA
POMXB 19 11 POMXB
POMXA 13 12 POMXA
PHR-6 ADUMLB 26 13 ADUMLB
ADUML PAP-13V-S CN3 ADUMLA 22 14 ADUMLA
ADUML24V 2 1 ADUML24V ADUMLXB 24 15 ADUMLXB
ADUML24V 5 2 ADUML24V ADUMLXA 20 16 ADUMLXA
ADUMLB/ 3 3 ADUMLB/ RRMCNT 1 17 RRMCNT
ADUMLB// 6 4 ADUMLB// ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
ADUMLA// 4 5 ADUMLA// RRMB 7 19 RRMB
ADUMLA/ 1 6 ADUMLA/ RRMA 5 20 RRMA
B13B-PASK-1 RRMXB 9 21 RRMXB
RRMXA 3 22 RRMXA
PFMB 10 23 PFMB
PHR-6-R PFMA 8 24 PFMA
RRM PAP-12V-S CN2 PFMXB 12 25 PFMXB
RRM24V 2 7 RRM24V PFMXA 6 26 PFMXA
RRM24V 5 8 RRM24V GND2 2 (NC) (NC) 27 PFM2CNT
RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/ PFMCNT 4 28 PFMCNT
RRMB// 6 10 RRMB// B26B-PNDZS-1 (NC) 29 PFM2B
RRMA// 4 11 RRMA// (NC) 30 PFM2A
RRMA/ 1 12 RRMA/ (NC) 31 PFM2XB
B12B-PASK-1 (NC) 32 PFM2XA
(NC) 33 (nc)
(NC) 34 (nc)
Paper delivery unit Main frame
PCU PWB
PHR-6-R PHDR-18VS-2
FUM SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC CN12 (HL section drive)
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 3 GND2
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC) (NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) (NC) 5 5VN
7 POMA// 7 (NC) 13 GND2
PHR-6 8 POM24V 8 (NC) 15 GND2
POM 9 POMB// 9 MOTOR DRIVER PWB (NC) 17 24V1B
POMA// 1 10 POMA/ 10 PAP-12V-S CN2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
POM24V 2 11 POM24V 11 5 POMA//
POMB// 3 12 POMB/ 12 1 POM24V
POMA/ 4 4 POMB//
POM24V 5 6 POMA/
POMB/ 6 2 POM24V
3 POMB/
B12B-PASK-1
FG FG
PAP-13V-S CN3
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 11 ADUMHA//
12 ADUMHA/
9 ADUMHB/
10 ADUMHB//
7 ADUMH24V
8 ADUMH24V
(NC) 13 NC
B13B-PASK-1
PHR-7
DM (Drum motor)
F. Paper delivery unit section (P6)
FGOUT 3 (NC) PHDR-20VS-2

CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14 (Paper exit/Process drive 1)
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
PHR-6 GND2 2 2 GND2
ADUMH /DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
ADUMHA// 1 DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
ADUMHA/ 4 DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
ADUMHB/ 6 RMOTP0929FCPZ (NC) 3 GND2
ADUMHB// 3 (NC) 7 5VN
ADUMH24V 2 (NC) 8 GND2
ADUMH24V 5 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC (NC) 9 /reserve1out
2 24V1B 2 17 24V1B
PSPS 1 /PSPS 1 18 /PSPS
(NC) 10 5VN
DF1B-26DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-26DES-2.5RC (NC) 11 GND2
21 ADUMHA// 21 12 24V1B_OSM
22 ADUMHA/ 22 15 /OSMXB
23 ADUMHB/ 23 16 /OSMXA
24 ADUMHB// 24 13 /OSMB
25 ADUMH24V 25 14 /OSMA
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC 26 ADUMH24V 26 19 WEBMAout
5 24V1B_OSM 5 1 24V1B_OSM 1 20 WEBMBout
1 /OSMXB 1 2 /OSMXB 2 B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
OSM 2 /OSMXA 2 3 /OSMXA 3
3 /OSMB 3 4 /OSMB 4
4 /OSMA 4 5 /OSMA 5 PHDR-30VS-1 CN15 Paper exit (sensor/fan)
6 POFM1_V 6 23 POFM1_V
SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC 7 /POFM1_CNT 7 25 /POFM1_CNT
4 POFM1_LD 4 8 POFM1_LD 8 27 POFM1_LD
3 GND2 3 9 POFM2_LD 9 28 POFM2_LD
POFM 1 2 /POFM1_CNT 2 (NC) 10 (NC) 10 (NC) (NC) 2 GND2
1 POFM1_V 1 11 GND2 11 29 GND2
12 5VN 12 7 5VN
SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC 13 TFD2 13 3 TFD2
4 POFM2_LD 4 14 POD2 14 4 POD2
3 GND2 3 15 HPOS 15 5 HPOS
POFM 2 2 /POFM1_CNT 2 16 POD1 16 6 POD1
1 POFM1_V 1 17 GND2 17 1 GND2
18 WEBMAout 18 (NC) 8 5VN
19 WEBMBout 19 (NC) 9 GND2
PHR-3 (NC) 20 (NC) 20 (NC) (NC) 11 DL
TFD2 SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N (NC) 13 reserve3-in
5VN 3 3 GND2 3 18 GND2

TFD2 2 POFM 3 2 POFM3_LD 2 20 POFM3_LD
GND2 1 1 POFM3_V 1 22 POFM3_V
(NC) 24 POFM2_V
(NC) 26 /POFM2_CNT
179228-3 SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N (NC) 30 GND2
POD2 1 OZFM_V 1 21 OZFM_V
5VN 1 2 /OZFM_CNT 2 19 /OZFM_CNT
OZFM 3 GND2 3 17 GND2
POD2 2
GND2 3 4 OZFM_LD 4 15 OZFM_LD
16 GND2
10 5VN
179228-3 12 CRUM_CLK
HPOS 14 CRUM_DATA
5VN 1 B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
HPOS 2
GND2 3
TSHR-04V-K
179228-3 CRUM SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC
POD1 GND2 4 1 GND2 1
5VN 1 5VN 3 2 5VN 2
POD1 2 CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3
GND2 3 CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4
5 LSUCFM_V 5
6 LSUCFM_LD 6
P4
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7
(NC)
P4
8 GND2 8
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
9 24V1B 9
P2
10 /PNC 10
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
DF11-4DS-2C
+ SSJC6-4 SSJC6-6
DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
SLP-02V / SLR-02VF
1 WEB_M1out 1
WEBM 2 WEB_M2out 2
LSU PWB MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
PHDR-26VS-1 PHDR-30VS-1
CN2 CN2 CN3 CN1 (MOTHER)
GND2 1 GR GR 3 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
+3.3V 3 OR OR 1 +3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND1 2 GR GR 4 GND1 5VLD 3 3 5VLD
+24V3 4 RD RD 2 +24V3 5VLD 4 4 5VLD
+5VN 5 BL BL 5 +5VN GND2 5 5 GND2
GND2 6 GR GR 6 GND2 GND2 6 (NC) (NC) 6 (nc)
S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-06V-1 RXD_PCU 7 7 PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR 8 8 PCU_DSR
TXD_PCU 9 9 PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR 10 10 PCU_DTR
GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 12 GND2
nPOF 13 13 /POF
nPCU_TRG 14 14 nPCU_TRG
nFAX_LED 15 15 /FAX_LED
PCU_RES 16 16 PCU_RES
2BEAM LD PWB PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 17 17 GND2
CN1 PHDR-20VS-2 CN5 JOBEND_INT 19 19 JOBEND_INT
+5VLD 2 BL BL 23 +5V_LD RSV_DAT 21 21 RSV_DAT
GND2 1 GY GY 24 GND2 CN3 PHDR-16VS-2 PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 23 23 GND2
GND2 3 GY GY 18 GND2 +5V_LD 1 22 +5V_LD TRANS_DAT 22 25 TRANS_DAT
nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1 GND2 2 GR GR 11 GND2 LSU_RST 18 26 LSU_RST
GND2 12 GY GY 1 GND2 nSCK_LSU 4 BR BR 12 nSCK_LSU TRANS_RST 24 27 TRANS_RST
nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2 GND2 3 GR GR 10 GND2 SCK 20 28 SCK
DT1- 14 WH WH 14 DT_K1- nTRANS_DAT 5 BR BR 9 nTRANS_DAT GND2 25 29 GND2
DT1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT_K1+ nRSV_DAT 6 PK BR 14 nRSV_DAT GND2 26 30 GND2
GND2 20 SD SD 12 GND2 JOBEND_INT 8 BR PK 13 JOBEND_INT B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 18 GND2
GND2 6 SD SD 2 GND2 LSUASIC_RST 7 8 LSUASIC_RST 20 HUD_DV
DT2- 8 WH WH 8 DT_K2- nTRANS_RST 9 7 nTRANS_RST 22 TH_DV
DT2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT_K2+ VSYNC_K_N 11 BR BR 18 LSU_VSYNC_K_N 24 +3.3V
nLDERR 11 BR BR 11 nLDERR_K VSYNC_K_P 12 PK PK 17 LSU_VSYNC_K_P B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
VREF_K1 9 BR BR 9 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K2_P 13 (NC) (NC) 16 (nc)
VREF_K2 7 BR BR 7 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K2_N 14 (NC) (NC) 20 (nc)
nENB_K 5 BR BR 5 nENB_K GND2 16 19 GND2
LDCHK2 17 BR BR 6 LD_CHK_2 nPCU_TRG 10 15 nPCU_TRG
LDCHK1 18 BR BR 3 LD_CHK_1 GND2 15 (NC) (NC) 21 GND2
LDCHK3 19 BR BR 17 LD_CHK_3 S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) (NC) 23 GND2
GND2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 nLDERR_K2 (NC) 24 GND2
S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B24B-PHDSS-B
BD PWB PHR-4
CN1
GND2 4 GR GR 21 GND2
BD 3 BR BR 19 nBD
GND2 2 GR GR 22 GND2
+5VN 1 BL BL 20 +5VN
G. LSU section, Temperature/humidity sensor section (P7)
S4B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CN4 PHDR-22VS-2 PHDR-22VS-2 CN4
CH0_N 1 WH WH 21 LSU_CH0_N
CH0_P 2 PK PK 22 LSU_CH0_P
GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2
POLYGON MOTOR (1200dpi) GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2
CN1 PAP-05V-S PHR-5 CN1 CH1_N 5 WH WH 17 LSU_CH1_N
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK CH1_P 6 PK PK 18 LSU_CH1_P
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK CH2_N 7 WH WH 15 LSU_CH2_N
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CH2_P 8 PK PK 16 LSU_CH2_P
GND1 4 4 GND1 GND2 9 SD SD 14 GND2
+24V3 5 5 +24V3 GND2 10 SD SD 13 GND2
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P

GND2 16 7 GND2
ECLK_LSU_N 17 WH WH 5 LSU_ECLK_N
ECLK_LSU_P 18 PK PK 6 LSU_ECLK_P
HSYNC_LSU_P 21 PK PK 2 LSU_HSYNC_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 WH WH 1 LSU_HSYNC_N
PHR-4
TH&HUD SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
GND2 3 1 GND2 1
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4
SRA-01T-3.2
US: STANDARD
Other than US: OPTION
USB CONVERSION KEY PWB
1
2 PWB FG
3 SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4
4 MOTHER PWB
5 USB PWB PHDR-10VS-2
6 CN CN GHR-10V-S CN16 CN13 QR/P4-8S-C(01) / QR/P4-8P-C(01) SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
7 1 VBUS2 VBUS2 5 10 VBUS2 PWR_CPUFAN 1 7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 1 PWR_CPUFAN 1
8 2 D2- D2- 4 9 D2- PWM_CPUFAN 3 6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 2 PWM_CPUFAN 2
9 3 D2+ D2+ 3 8 D2+ GND1 5 3 GND1 3 3 GND1 3
CPUFM
10 4 GND2 GND2 2 7 GND2 LOCK_CPUFAN 7 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4
11 5 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 1 6 SHIELD2 +24V3 9 (NC) 1 +12V 1
12 BM05B-GHS-TBT 5 VBUS3 PWR_HDDFAN 2 (NC) 5 GND2 5
TO KEYBOARD 13 4 D3- PWM_HDDFAN 4 (NC) 4 +5V_HDD 4
14 TO USB I/F 3 D3+ GND1 6 8 GND2 8
15 2 GND2 LOCK_HDDFAN 8
16 1 SHIELD3 +24V3 10 (NC)
17 BM10B-GHS-TBT B10B-PHDSS-B
18 CN12 VHR-4N HDD(SATA)
19 +12V 1
20 GND2 3 SATA POWER
21 CN PAP-06V-S / PALR-06VF PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S +5V_HDD 2 15 +12V
22 VBUS3 BLUE 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 GND2 4 14 +12V
23 D3- BROWN 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 B4P-VH 13 +12V
24 D3+ LIGHTBLUE 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 12 GND2
25 GND2 GRAY 4 GND2 4 4 GND2 4 11 GND2
26 SHIELD3 GRAY 5 SHIELD3 5 5 SHIELD3 5 MFPC PWB 10 GND2
27 Soldering 6 FG 6 9 +5V_HDD
28 8 +5V_HDD
FG FG 7 +5V_HDD
6 GND2
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 5 GND2
4 GND2
(NC) 3 +3.3V
(NC) 2 +3.3V
(NC) 1 +3.3V
CN15 SATA SIGNAL

GND2 1 1 GND2
USB HUB PWB SATA0_TX_P 2 2 SATA_TXP
CN3 SATA0_TX_N 3 3 SATA_TXN
VBUS2 10 GND2 4 4 GND2
D1- 9 SATA0_RX_N 5 5 SATA_RXN
D1+ 8 SATA0_RX_P 6 6 SATA_RXP
GND2 7 GND2 7 7 GND2
SHIELD1 6 6SAT07P-328B-B5
VBUS3 5 SATA 7pin
D2- 4
D2+ 3
GND2 2 CN3 POWER
SHIELD2 1 +5V 1 (NC) 1 +12V
BM10B-GHS-TBT D- 2 USB2.0 (NC) 2 GND2
CN4 GHR-04V-S PHR-11 CN17 D+ 3 (NC) 3 GND2
VBUS 4 1 VBUS GND2 4 (TYPE-A) (NC) 4 +5V
GND2 1
H. FAX section, MFP section, HDD section (P8)
2 GND2 UAR27-4K5J00
RE_D+ 2 6 RE_D+
RE_D- 3 7 RE_D-
BM04B-GHS-TBT 3 FP_D+ CN2
CN5 CN2 GHR-05V-S 4 FP_D- +5V 1
(NC) 6 VBUS VBUS 5 (NC) 5 GND2 D- 2 USB2.0
(NC) 5 D- FP_D+ 3 8 GND2 D+ 3
(NC) 4 D+ FP_D- 4 9 GND2 GND2 4 (TYPE-B)
(NC) 3 GND2 GND2 2 10 +5VL UBR23-4K2200
(NC) 2 SHIELD GND2 1 11 +5VL
(NC) 1 SHIELD BM05B-GHS-TBT B11B-PH-K-S
BM06B-GHS-TBT CN1 PHR-3 CN4
GND2 3 TRP1+ 1
+5VL 2 TRP1- 2
+5VL 1 TRP2+ 3
B3B-PH-SM4-TB TRP2- 4
TRP3+ 5 LAN
TRP3- 6
TRP4+ 7
TRP4- 8
SI-51005-F
TEL LIU PWB FAX PWB
MJ1 PHDR-32VS-2 CN1
(JAPAN) CN2 CN7 CN1 CN15 CD 1
1 - +24V 1 1 +24V GND1 1 1 GND1 RXD 2
2 - AGND 2 2 AGND GND2 2 2 GND2 TXD 3
3 L1 +24V 3 3 +24V +3.3V 3 3 +3.3V DTR 4
TO LINE 4 L2 AGND 4 4 AGND +3.3V 4 4 +3.3V GND2 5 RS232C

5 - 150VON 5 5 150VON +24V3 6 5 +24V3 DSR 6
6 - CION 6 6 CION nFAXCS_CTS 5 6 nFAXCS_CTS RTS 7
MJ-62J-RD315 MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE +5V_A 8 7 +5V_A CTS 8
HS1- 8 8 HS1- nFAXCS_RTS 7 8 nFAXCS_RTS RI 9
(EX) HS2- 9 9 HS2- FLVPP 10 9 FLVPP DBR30-091F100
1 - CI- 10 10 CI- nFAXD_CTS 9 10 nFAXD_CTS
2 T2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- GND2 12 11 GND2
3 R1 SON1 12 12 SON1 nFAXD_RTS 11 12 nFAXD_RTS
BOARD TO BOARD Connector
4 T1 SON2 13 13 SON2 GND2 14 13 GND2

5 R2 ECON 14 14 ECON +5V_OFF 16 14 +5V_OFF CN6
6 - MRON 15 15 MRON FAXCS_RXD_N 13 15 FAXCS_RXD_N GND2 1
MJ-64J-RD315 TELID 16 16 TELID FAXCS_RXD_P 15 16 FAXCS_RXD_P GND2 2
TO EX TEL CI2- 17 17 CI2- nFAX_WUP 18 17 nFAX_WUP +3.3V 3
NC 18 18 NC FAXD_RXD_P 17 18 FAXD_RXD_P +3.3V 4
MJ2 TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAXD_RXD_N 19 19 FAXD_RXD_N nCNCT_FAX 5
1 - NC 20 20 NC GND2 20 20 GND2 FAXD_TXD_N 6
2 - GND2 21 21 GND2 FAXCS_TXD_N 21 21 FAXCS_TXD_N FAXD_TXD_P 7
3 TEL1 +3.3V 22 22 +3.3V FAXCS_TXD_P 23 22 FAXCS_TXD_P +5VL 8
4 TEL2 GND2 23 23 GND2 nRES_FAX 22 23 nRES_FAX nRES_FAX 9
5 - +5VS 24 24 +5VS +5V_OFF 24 24 +5V_OFF FAXCS_TXD_P 10
6 - GND2 25 25 GND2 FAXD_TXD_P 25 25 FAXD_TXD_P FAXCS_TXD_N 11
MJ-62J-RD315 SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES- FAXD_TXD_N 27 26 FAXD_TXD_N GND 12
SPK 27 27 SPK nCNCT_FAX 26 27 nCNCT_FAX FAXD_RXD_N 13
MDM_ATXD 28 28 MDM_ATXD +3.3V 28 28 +3.3V FAXD_RXD_P 14
CN1 MDM_ARXD 29 29 MDM_ARXD +3.3V 29 29 +3.3V nFAX_WUP 15 2nd FAX UN
1 TX+ MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 MDM_ABITCLK GND2 30 30 GND2 FAXCS_RXD_P 16
BOARD TO BOARD Connector

2 RX+ MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 MDM_ASPCLK BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT (NC) 31 GND2 FAXCS_RXD_N 17 (OPTION)
TO HANDSET 3 RX- RGDT- 32 32 RGDT- (NC) 32 NC +5VL 18
(JAPAN ONLY) 4 TX- MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) B32B-PHDSS-B GND2 19
5 DG AFERES- 34 34 AFERES- nFAXD_RTS 20
6 RHS- BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK GND2 21
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK nFAXD_CTS 22
BRXD 37 37 BRXD FLVPP 23
BTXD 38 38 BTXD nFAXCS_RTS 24
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE- +5V0 25
RHS- 40 40 RHS- nFAXCS_CTS 26
TX24-40R-10ST-H1 TX25-40P-8ST-H1 +24V3 27
+3.3V 28
+3.3V 29
PAP-02V-S GND2 30
CN2 GND1 31
1 SP- B31B-CSRK
SPEAKER 2 SP+
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN)
PCU PWB
FINISHER
ELP-12V/ELR-12V CN11 (Coin Vendor)
TXD_FIN 1 1 TXD_INS 1 1 +24V1B
RXD_FIN 2 2 RXD_INS 2 2 GND2
/DTR_FIN 3 3 /DTR_INS 3 3 /CV_COPY
/DSR_FIN 4 4 /DSR_INS 4 4 /CV_COUNT
RES_FIN 5 5 RES_INS 5 5 /CV_START
+24V3 6 (NC) (NC) 6 NC 6 (NC) 6 /CV_CA
+5VN 7 7 +5VN 7 7 /CV_CLCOPY
GND2 8 8 GND2 8 TO COIN VENDOR 8 /CV_COLOR1
GND1 9 (NC) (NC) 9 NC 9 (NC) (OPTION) 9 /CV_STAPLE
F-GND 10 10 F-GND 10 FG 10 /CV_COLOR0
+24V5 11 11 +24V5 11 SRA-21T-4 11 /CV_DUPLEX
GND1 12 12 GND1 12 12 +5VN
13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
DC PWB 16 /CV_SIZE3
CN8 VHR-7N PNDP-16V-Z B16B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
4k FINISHER / SADLLE FINISHER / INNER FINISHER +24V4 6
OPTION +24V5 7
B7P-VH-B
CN7 VHR-8N
GND1 7
GND1 8
B8P-VH-B
CN4 VHR-6N
+5VN 3
+5VN 4
B6P-VH-B
DESK1 / DESK2 OPTION

CN F PHDR-12VS-2 SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC
+24V4 1 1 +24V4 1
GND1 2 2 GND1 2
+5VN 3 3 +5VN 3
GND2 4 4 GND2 4 PHDR-22VS-2 CN7 (FIN/DESK/LCC)
GND2 5 5 GND2 5 4 TXD_INS
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 6 RXD_INS
DESK CONTROL RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 5 /DTR_INS
PWB /DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 7 /DSR_INS
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 3 RES_INS
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 2 GND2
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 1 GND2
NC 12 (NC) 8 GND2
B12B-PHDSS-B 10 TXD_DSK
12 RXD_DSK
ELP-02V/ELR-02V ELP-03V/ELR-03V 11 /DTR_DSK
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1 13 /DSR_DSK
I. Finisher, Desk, LCC, Coin vender section (P9)
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3 9 RES_DSK

2 F-GND 2 14 /TRC_DSK
17 TXD_LCC
FG FG 19 RXD_LCC
SRA-21T-4 16 /DTR_LCC
18 /DSR_LCC
ELP-15V/ELR-15V 15 RES_LCC
(NC) 1 NC 1 (NC) 21 GND2
(NC) 2 NC 2 (NC) 20 /TRC_LCC
3 TXD_LCC 3 (NC) 22 GND2
4 RXD_LCC 4 B22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5 /DTR_LCC 5
6 /DSR_LCC 6
7 RES_LCC 7
8 F-GND 8
9 +5VN 9
10 GND2 10
11 +24V4 11
FG 12 GND1 12
13 /TRC_LCC 13
14 NC 14
15 NC 15
CN A PHDR-12VS-2 FG
+24V4 1 SRA-21T-4
GND1 2
NC 3 (NC)

NC 4 (NC)
+5VN 5
LCC CONTROL GND2 6
TXD_LCC 7
PWB RXD_LCC 8
/DTR_LCC 9
/DSR_LCC 10
RES_LCC 11
/TRC_LCC 12
B12B-PHDSS-B
LCC OPTION
ELP-12V-/ELR-12V
(NC) 1 NC 1 (NC)
(NC) 2 NC 2 (NC)
ELP-02V/ELR-02V (NC) 3 NC 3 (NC)
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 5 F-GND 5
(NC) 6 NC 6 (NC)
(NC) 7 NC 7 (NC)
(NC) 8 NC 8 (NC) FG
FG (NC) 9 NC 9 (NC) SRA-21T-4
(NC) 10 NC 10 (NC) WH PWB
(NC) 11 NC 11 (NC)
12 WH_N(LCC) 12 VHR-5N
CN4
5 WH_L(LCC)
4 WH_L(DESK)
(NC) 3 NC
2 WH_N(DESK)
1 WH_N(LCC)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CCD PWB SCN-CNT PWB EHR-3
CN1 CN10 CN4 PHR-6 OCSW
GND2 1 41 GND2 +5VN 1 1 +5VN
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 3 39 GND2 /OCSW 3 3 OCSW
RE+ 4 38 RE+ +24V3 4
RE- 5 37 RE- /SIZE_LED1 5
GND2 6 36 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 6 Soldering(LF) ORS LED PWB
RD+ 7 35 RD+ B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
RD- 8 34 RD- /SIZE_LED1
GND2 9 33 GND2 /SIZE_LED2
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ F-GND
CLK- 11 31 CLK- FG
GND2 12 30 GND2 SRA-21T-4
RC+ 13 29 RC+ CN1 PHR-4
RC- 14 28 RC- MIM_A 1
GND2 15 27 GND2 MIM_B 2 MIRROR
RB+ 16 26 RB+ MIM_XA 3
RB- 17 25 RB- MIM_XB 4
MOTOR
GND2 18 24 GND2 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
RA+ 19 23 RA+
RA- 20 22 RA- EHR-3
GND2 21 21 GND2 CN17 PHR-3 MHPS
A10V 22 20 A10V MHPS 1 3 MHPS
A10V 23 19 A10V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 24 18 GND2 +5VN 3 1 +5VN
A5V 25 17 A5V B3B-PH-K-S
A5V 26 16 A5V
A5V 27 15 A5V
GND2 28 14 GND2
A3.3V 29 13 A3.3V LED DRIVER PWB
A3.3V 30 12 A3.3V CN PHR-4 PHR-4 CN1 LED PWB 1
A3.3V 31 11 A3.3V LED1-11 1 1 LED1-11
A3.3V 32 10 A3.3V LED12-22 2 2 LED12-22
A3.3V 33 9 A3.3V LED23-33 3 3 LED23-33
A3.3V 34 8 A3.3V +24V 4 4 +24V
CN7 CN
GND2 35 7 GND2 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
GND2 1 1 GND2
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD
GND2 2 2 GND2
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS
CL_ON 3 3 CL_ON
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK
POWER 4 4 POWER CN PHR-5 PHR-4 CN1 LED PWB 2
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD
+24V 5 5 +24V LED1-11 1 1 LED1-11
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05CPB7F LED12-22 2 2 LED12-22
GND2 41 1 GND2
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF LED23-33 3 3 LED23-33
+24V 4 4 +24V
(NC) 5 (NC) B4B-PH-K-S
MOTHER PWB S5B-PH-K-S
VHR-6N VHR-6N
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 PHR-6
+12V 3 2 +12V 501189-4030 ORS PD PWB 501189-2030
+5VN 4 4 +5VN 3 PDSEL2 MFP OPE PWB
J. Scanner, 8.5 inch operation system (P10)
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V CN2 2 PDSEL1 CN1

GND2 6 6 GND2 PDSEL2 20 1 PDSEL0 4 +5VO
B6P-VH B6P-VH PDSEL1 23 4 +5VN 6 GND2
PDSEL0 22 5 PD 8 WU_LED
MOTHER PWB
CN7 PHR-15 PHDR-16VS-2 CN11 +5VN 25 6 GND2 12 nINFO_LED
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 21 10 POW_LED
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- GND2 40 2 GND2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 GND2 27 20 GND2
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ nBZR 34 16 nBZR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0 LCD INVERTER PWB
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1(nc)
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0 1 +CCFT
BACK LIGHT
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 2 /CCFT
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 36 501190-2017 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 18
CN5 PHDR-12VS-2 PHDR-12VS-2 CN5 GND2 19
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 16 CN4 GHR-05V-S PAP-05V-S
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 17 GND2 5 5 GND2
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN GND2 14 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 15 LVDS PWB +24V3 3 3 +24V3
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +3.3V 12 +24V3 2 2 +24V3
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0 +5VN 13 GND2 1 1 GND2
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 10 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4

GND2 10 10 GND2 XH(X1) 9 501189-4030 XH(X1) 3 TOUCH
nSPED 11 11 nSPED YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2 PANEL
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469 8.5inch LCD UN
VCONT 5 7 GND2 CN2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
PHR-13 PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
PHR-3 CN9 DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
POWER SW PWB 1 nA_PNC 501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
3 n PWRSW 2 nA_COPY 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
2 GND2 3 nA_CA 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
1 GND2 4 nA_READY 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
5 nA_AUD 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 501189-3030 6 +5VN 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10
TO AUDITER 7 GND2 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 8 +24V3 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
GND2 12 9 (NC) 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) 10 nA_TC 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) 11 +24V3 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 12 PNC-a 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
GND2 4 13 GND2 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
MFP OPE PWB
nINFO_LED 6 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
nWU_KEY 7 (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 9 SD SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 13 PK PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
LCD_DATA3- 14 WH WH 8 LCD_DATA3- B0 23 23 B0
GND2 17 SD SD 16 GND2 B1 24 24 B1
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 22 WH WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA0- 26 WH WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029 UD/LR 36 36 UD/LR
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
501190-3017(MOLEX) FG +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
CIS PWB DSPF_CNT PWB DSPF DRIVER PWB
CN B PHR-6(RED) PHR-6 SPF
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD _SPM 2 5 +24VPD_SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
CN** PAP-06V-S PAP-06V-S CN6 CN8 PHDR-26VS-1 PHDR-26VS-1 CN-A +24VPD _SPM 5 2 +24VPD _SPM
+12V 1 1 +12V GND1 1 1 GND1 SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
GND2 2 2 GND2 GND1 2 2 GND1 B6B-PH-K-R(RED)
A7V 3 3 A7V +24VPD 3 3 +24VPD
GND2 4 4 GND2 +24VPD 4 4 +24VPD CN F PHR-6 PHR-6 SPFM
+5V 5 5 +5V +5V 5 5 +5V SPFMB/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND2 6 6 GND2 SPFMCK 6 6 SPFMCK SPFMA/ 2 3 +24VPD_SPFM
SM06B-PASK-1 B06B-PASK-1 SPFMM1 7 7 SPFMM1 SPFMB 3 4 SPFMA
SPFMM2 8 8 SPFMM2 SPFMA 4 1 SPFMB
SPFMO1 9 9 SPFMO1 +24VPD_SPFM 5 5 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMO2 10 10 SPFMO2 +24VPD_SPFM 6 2 SPFMB/
SPFMRV 11 11 SPFMRV B6B-PH-K-S
SPMA 12 12 SPMA
SPMA/ 13 13 SPMA/ CN D PHR-3 FAN
SPMB 14 14 SPMB +24VPD FAN 1 1 +24VPD FAN Cooling fan
SPMB/ 15 15 SPMB/ FAN_LOCK 2 2 FAN_LOCK
SPMO1 16 16 SPMO1 GND2 3 3 GND2 (NFANP0107FCPZ)
STMPS 17 17 STMPS B3B-PH-K-S
SRRC 18 18 SRRC
SPFC 19 19 SPFC
SCOV 20 20 SCOV CN E PHR-5 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
CN** 501189-3030(MOLEX) 501189-3030(MOLEX) CN4 STMPU 21 21 STMPU +24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
LVDSA_TA- 1 23 LVDSA_TA- +5VPD 22 22 +5VPD SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRC
GND2 2 22 GND2 FAN_ON 23 23 FAN_ON/OFF +24VPD 3
LVDSA_TA+ 3 21 LVDSA_TA+ FAN_LOCK 24 24 FAN_LOCK GND2 4 (NC)
PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S
K. DSPF unit section (P12)
GND2 4 20 GND2 GND2 25 25 GND2 +24VPD SW 5

1 SPED 1
LVDSA_TB- 5 19 LVDSA_TB- GND2 26 26 GND2 B5B-PH-K-S
2 GND2 2 PS-187
GND2 6 18 GND2 B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B
3 +5V SPED 3 SCOV
LVDSA_TB+ 7 17 LVDSA_TB+
4 +24VPD 4 1 +24VPD
GND2 8 16 GND2
5 +24VPD SW 5
LVDSA_TC- 9 15 LVDSA_TC-
GND2 10 14 GND2 1 +24VPD_SW
LVDSA_TC+ 11 13 LVDSA_TC+ CN C PHR-7 SPS-01T-187
GND2 12 12 GND2 +24VPD SPFC 1 (NC)
LVDSA_CLK- 13 11 LVDSA_CLK- SPFC/ 2 (NC)
GND2 14 10 GND2 N.C 3 (NC)
LVDSA_CLK+ 15 9 LVDSA_CLK+ GND2 4
GND2 16 8 GND2 STMPU 5
LVDSA_TD- 17 7 LVDSA_TD- STMPS/ 6 SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N 179228-4 179228-4
GND2 18 6 GND2 +24VPD STMPS 7 1 GND2 1 1 GND2 4
LVDSA_TD+ 19 5 LVDSA_TD+ B7B-PH-K-S 2 STMPU 2 2 STMPU 3
GND2 20 4 GND2 3 STMPS/ 3 3 STMPS/ 2
LVDSA_TE- 21 3 LVDSA_TE- 4 +24VPD STMPS 4 4 +24VPD STMPS 1 STMPS
GND2 22 2 GND2 292254-4
LVDSA_TE+ 23 1 LVDSA_TE+
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND2 24 24 GND2
GND2 25 25 GND2
TRIG 26 26 TRIG
SPI_CS 27 27 SPI_CS 179228-3(BLACK)
SPI_SI 28 28 SPI_SI PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S SPPD1
SPI_SCK 29 29 SPI_SCK 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
SPI_SO 30 30 SPI_SO 4 +5VPD 4 2 SPPD1
501571-3007 501190-3017 2 SPPD1 2 3 GND2
5 SPPD2 5
3 GND2 3
6 GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD2
CN9 PHDR-16VS-2 1 +5VPD
+5V 1 2 SPPD2
+5V 2 3 GND2
SPPD1 3
SPPD2 4
SCN_CNT PWB GND2 5 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 6 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
GND2 8 5 GND2 5 2 SPPD3
CN16 PHR-14 PHR-14 CN5 SPPD3 9 2 SPPD3 2 1 +5VPD
GND2 1 1 GND2 SOCD 10 4 SOCD 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 +5V 11 1 +5VPD 1
+5VO 3 3 +5VO +5V 12 6 +5V_SOCD 6 179228-3
+3.3V 4 4 +3.3V +5V 13 SOCD
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V SPED 14 1 SOCD
+5V 6 6 +5V GND2 15 2 GND2
+5V 7 7 +5V N.C 16 3 +5VPD SOCD
+12V 8 8 +12V B16B-PHDSS-B
+12V 9 9 +12V
+24V 10 10 +24V 179228-3
+24V 11 11 +24V PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S SPED

GND2 12 12 GND2 1 +5V_SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 13 13 GND2 2 SPED 2 2 GND2
GND2 14 14 GND2 3 GND2 3 3 +5V SPED
B14B-PH-K-S B14B-PH-K-S
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
CN2 PHDR-10VS-2
+5V 1 (NC)
+5V 2
CN13 501189-3030(MOLEX) 501189-3030(MOLEX) CN3 SPPD4 3 (NC)
DSDATA_0N 1 1 DSDATA_0N SPPD5 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 GND2 5 (NC)
DSDATA_0P 3 3 DSDATA_0P GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nPOF_DSPF 4 4 CN_nPOF_DSPF GND2 7 SPPD5
GND2 5 5 GND2 SPPD6 8 1 +5VPD
nLVDS_STBY1 8 8 nLVDS_STBY_SCN +5V 9 2 SPPD5
DSDATA_1N 7 7 DSDATA_1N N.C 10 (NC) 3 GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2 B10B-PHDSS-B
DSDATA_1P 9 9 DSDATA_1P
MM_nSTBY 10 10 MM_nSTBY 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nDSPFUP 14 14 CN_nDSPFUP SPPD6
CN_SPED 12 12 CN_SPED 3 GND2
DSDATA_2N 13 13 DSDATA_2N 2 SPPD6
GND2 11 11 GND2 1 +5VPD
DSDATA_2P 15 15 DSDATA_2P
CN_RES_DSPF 16 16 CN_RES_DSPF
CN_nDSPF_INT 20 20 CN_nDSPF_INT PHR-9 179228-3
GND2 18 18 GND2 CN7 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_N 19 19 DSCLKOUT_N +5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
GND2 17 17 GND2 SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_P 21 21 DSCLKOUT_P GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 22 22 GND2 GND2 4
CN_TXD_DSPF 26 26 CN_RXD_SCN SPLS2 5
CN_RXD_DSPF 24 24 CN_TXD_SCN +5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
DSDATA_3N 25 25 DSDATA_3N AVCC 7 SPLS2
GND2 23 23 GND2 SPWS 8 2 GND2
DSDATA_3P 27 27 DSDATA_3P GND2 9 1 SPLS2
CN_nCTS_DSPF 28 28 CN_nRTS_SCN B9B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
GND2 29 29 GND2
CN_nRTS_DSPF 30 30 CN_nCTS_SCN
501190-3017 501190-3017
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND 3 GY GND2
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN10 3 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drives the ADU upper section. – – CN17 3,4,5, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 6 the 4-phase
signal.
ADUMHCNT ADU motor upper current Selects the ADU motor upper Large Small CN17 8 PCU
select current. current current
ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the ADU lower section. – – CN17 13,14, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 15,16 the 4-phase
signal.
ADUMLCNT ADU motor lower current select Selects the ADU motor lower Large Small CN17 18 PCU
current. current current
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 12 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 14 PCU
[Transmission type] medium stream section.
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN2 2 SCNcnt
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the document ON OFF CN7 3 SCNcnt
for the CCD to scan the document
images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 paper upper limit Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper limit – CN5 5 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 paper upper limit Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper limit – CN5 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 21 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 22 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray 1. YES NO CN5 7 PCU
[Transmission type]
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray 2. YES NO CN5 8 PCU
[Transmission type]
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper feed
tray section.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller 2 in the paper feed
tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 1. Pass – CN5 3 PCU
(Paper entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 2. Pass – CN5 4 PCU
(Paper entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor drive Changes the paper feed section – – CN9 6 PCU Pulse input
frequency [Brush-less motor] speed.
CPFM_D Paper feed motor start/stop Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN9 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor – Lock CN9 7 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF CN9 18 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF CN9 20 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN5 9 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting
up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN5 10 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting
up.
CSS11 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN5 15 PCU
DM_CK Drum motor drive frequency Changes the drum section speed. – – CN14 6 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor]

DM_D Drum motor start/stop Drives the drum section. Drive Stop CN14 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Detects the drum motor lock. – Lock CN14 5 PCU
detection
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the ADU Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
detection [Transmission type] cover.
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/ Detects open/close of the tray 1, 2 Open Close CN5 11 PCU
close detection transport cover.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN13 4 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU laser
power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN13 6 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DVCH1 Developing check 1 Detects the destination of the Detection – CN3 12 PCU
developing unit 1.
developing unit 2.
developing unit 3.
FUM_CK Fusing motor drive frequency Changes the fusing section – – CN12 9 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop Drives the fusing section. Drive Stop CN12 7 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. – Lock CN12 11 PCU
detection
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 6 PCU
control relay.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 8 PCU
main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 10 PCU
sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up OFF ON CN12 14 PCU
operation of the heater lamp.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position. – Home CN15 5 PCU
position
HUD_DV Developing section humidity Detects the developing section – – CN1 20 PCU Analog
detection humidity. detection
INT_CNT AC PWB interlock Controls the AC PWB interlock. Release Lock CN8 8 PCU
LOCK_ Controller cooling fan lock – Lock CN13 7 Mother
CPUFAN detection detection
LSUCFM_ LSU cooling fan motor speed Adjusts the rotating speed of the – – CN9 10 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT control LSU cooling fan motor. drive
LSUCFM_ LSUCFM lock detection Detects the LSU cooling fan motor – Lock CN9 8 PCU
LD lock. detection
LSUCFM_V LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU. Stop Drive CN9 9 PCU
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home – Home CN17 1 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] position. position
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section – – CN1 1,2,3, SCNcnt
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F Manual
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. paper feed
unit
MPFD Manual feed paper entry Detects paper entry in the manual Pass – CN6 8 PCU
detection [Transmission type] paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper Pickup – CN10 7 PCU
(Manual paper feed) pickup roller.
MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual ON OFF CN10 8 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection – CN3 16 RD I/F Manual
detector manual paper feed tray. paper feed
unit
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN10 4 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper
feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the – – CN6 13 PCU Analog
width detector manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistance]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of the – Storing CN3 25 RD I/F Manual
position detection 1 manual paper feed tray. position paper feed
(Retraction position) unit

MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of the – Pull-out CN3 22 RD I/F Manual
position detection 2 manual paper feed tray. position paper feed
(Pull-out position) unit
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open CN4 3 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] document cover
(document size detection trigger).
OSM Shift motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. – – CN14 13,14, PCU Drives with
15,16 the 4-phase
signal.
OZFM_CNT Ozone fan motor speed control Adjusts the rotating speed of the – – CN15 19 PCU Pulse (Duty)
ozone fan motor. drive
OZFM_LD Ozone fan motor lock detection Detects the ozone fan motor lock. – Lock CN15 15 PCU
detection
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor drive Discharges the ozone. Stop Drive CN15 21 PCU
PCS Process control sensor light Detects the toner patch density. – – CN6 22 PCU Analog
reception [Reflection type] detection
PCS-LED Process control sensor light Adjusts the light emitting amount – – CN6 21 PCU Analog
emitting [Reflection type] of the process control sensor. detection
PFM PS front transport motor Transports and drives the – – CN17 23,24, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] registration front roller drive 25,26 the 4-phase
system. signal.
PFMCNT PS front transport motor Selects the PS front transport Large Small CN17 28 PCU
current selection motor current. current current
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. – Pass CN15 6 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass – CN15 4 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right tray. Pass – CN6 10 PCU
POFM1_ Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Controls the speed of the paper – – CN15 25 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT speed control exit cooling fan motor 1. drive
POFM1_LD POFM 1 lock detection Detects the POFM 1 lock. – Lock CN15 27 PCU
detection
POFM1_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 23 PCU
POFM2_ Paper exit cooling fan motor 2 Controls the speed of the paper – – CN15 26 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT speed control exit cooling fan motor 2. drive
detection
POFM2_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 2 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 24 PCU
detection
POFM3_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 Cools the paper exit unit. Stop Drive CN15 22 PCU
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. – – CN17 9,10, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 11,12 the 4-phase
signal.
POMCNT Paper exit drive motor current Selects the paper exit drive motor Large Small CN17 7 PCU
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass – CN6 4 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Pass – CN6 26 PCU
[Reflection type] registration roller.
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN8 3 PCU
detection motor 1 lock. detection
PSFM1_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 1 PCU
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN8 4 PCU
detection motor 2 lock. detection
PSFM2_V Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 2 PCU
PSPS Separation solenoid Controls the separation solenoid. ON OFF CN14 18 PCU
PWM_ Controller cooling fan PWM Controller cooling fan. – – CN13 3 Mother Pulse (Duty)
CPUFAM control drive
* Control is
MFPC.
RDCFM_LD RDCFM lock detection Detects the RDCFM lock. – Lock CN10 13 PCU
detection
RDCFM_V Suction fan motor Discharges air from the suction Stop Drive CN10 11 PCU
section.
RRM Registration motor transport Transports and drives the – – CN17 19,20, PCU Drives with
motor [Stepping motor] registration roller drive system. 21,22 the 4-phase
signal.
RRMCNT Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Large Small CN17 17 PCU
SCOV Upper cover open/close sensor Detects the upper cover open/ – Open CN8 20 DSPFcnt
close.
SOCD Cover open/close sensor Detects the cover open/close. Close – CN9 10 DSPFcnt

SPED Document empty sensor Detects the document empty. Detection – CN9 14 DSPFcnt
SPFM* Transport motor Drives the transport motor. – – CN8 6,7,8, DSPFcnt
9,10,
11
SPLS1 Document size sensor 1 Detects the document size. Detection – CN7 2 DSPFcnt
SPLS2 Document size sensor 2 Detects the document size. Detection – CN7 5 DSPFcnt
SPM* Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed motor. – – CN8 12,13, DSPFcnt
14,15,
16
SPOD Paper exit sensor Detects paper pass. Detection – CN2 8 DSPFcnt
SPPD1 No. 1 paper feed sensor Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 3 DSPFcnt
SPPD2 No. 2 paper feed (PS front) Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 4 DSPFcnt
sensor
SPPD3 No. 1 (front surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 9 DSPFcnt
front sensor
SPPD4 No. 1 (front surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection – CN2 3 DSPFcnt
rear sensor
SPPD5 No. 2 (back surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection – CN2 4 DSPFcnt
front sensor
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width. – – CN7 8 DSPFcnt Analog
detection
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN8 18 DSPFcnt
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the finish stamp. – Stamping CN8 17 DSPFcnt
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density. – – CN3 9 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls toner supply. ON OFF CN3 4 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch]
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper exit Full – CN15 3 PCU
[Transmission type] tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full – CN2 1 RD I/F
detection right tray.
TH_DV Developing section Detects the temperature in the – – CN1 22 PCU Analog
temperature detection developing section. detection
TH_MY_IN Main thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN16 10 PCU Analog
detection
TH_US_IN Sub thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN16 8 PCU Analog
detection
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity in – – CN16 18 PCU "Detection
quantity detection the waste toner box. pattern
table"
provided.
TNF Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity in – – CN16 17 PCU "Detection
quantity detection the waste toner box. pattern
table"
provided.
TSGOUT Toner density sensor control Controls the toner density. – – CN3 7 PCU Analog
voltage [Magnetic sensor] detection
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end. End – CN16 11 PCU
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning – – CN14 19,20 PCU Drives with
(Synchronous motor) paper. the 2-phase
signal.
WH_PR Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the dehumidifying ON OFF CN10 17 PCU ON:
heater. Relay open

[13] TOOL LIST
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Exclusive-use tools list

For repair or adjustments of this machine, the following tools are required.
Name Parts code Purpose

DSPF shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0330FCZZ DSPF CIS unit shading adjustment
Gray scale chart UKOG-0162FCZZ Copy density and gradation check
Color test chart (AB series) UKOG-0326FCZZ Copy density and gradation check / Void area and image loss check /
Color test chart (Inch series) UKOG-0326FC11 Resolution check
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1 CCD, DSPF CIS color balance and gamma adjustment
Stearic acid UKOG-0309FCZZ Apply to the side seal on the OPC drum cleaner section.
MX-M503N TOOL LIST 13 – 1

[A] EXTERIOR
MX-M503N (2) Left cabinet
Service Manualrear lower/Left cabinet
1. Disassembly and assembly

2
A. Cabinet
d
i
k
h
l
p 1
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
j
n
g
f C
e
m B
a
o 2
c
A 4
1 3
Parts (3) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left

a Rear cabinet 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
b Left cabinet rear lower the table glass (C).
c Left cabinet
d Upper cabinet right
e Upper cabinet left B
C
f Upper cabinet rear cover
g Upper cabinet rear
h Front cabinet upper
i Operation panel base plate A
j Right cabinet front
k Right connection cabinet
l Right cabinet rear cover
m Paper exit cover
n Paper exit tray cabinet
o Left cabinet rear
p Front cover
(1) Rear cabinet

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
B
2
1 A
MX-M503N EXTERIOR A – 1
(4) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear (6) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the Right cabinet rear cover
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B). 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
B
2
1
2
earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
rear.
3
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D).
B 2
(5) Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate

1 D
1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
A 4
3
(7) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
2) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base A

plate.
(8) Front cover
1) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "[i] Toner supply sec-
tion."]
2) Remove the developing unit. [Refer to "[J] DEVELOPING
SECTION"]
3) Remove the photo-conductor unit. [Refer to "[H] PHOTO-CON-
DUCTOR SECTION"]
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray cabi-
net.
6) Remove the band and the hinge, and remove the front cabinet.
7) Remove the screw, and remove the front cover.
3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0
4 +5VN
5 PD
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
MX-M503N
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
LCD
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL0 22 8 WU_LED
GND2 6 6 GND2 +5VN 25 12 nINFO_LED
B6P-VH B6P-VH PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 40 2 GND2
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
MFP OPE PWB

SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1(nc)
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2 +CCFT 1
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0 /CCFT 2
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 GND2 36 501190-2017
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V GND2 18
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 19
PWB
CN5 CN5 GND2 16 CN4
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17 GND2 5 5 GND2
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15 +24V3 3 3 +24V3
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 12 +24V3 2 2 +24V3
5
[B] OPERATION PANEL
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13 GND2 1 1 GND2

+24V3 10 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
LCD INVERTER
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 XH(X1) 3
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2
nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2 CN2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
1
DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
6
+5VN 6
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 10 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
3
GND2 4 +24V3 11 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 PNC-a 12 (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
G3 19
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
nWU_KEY 7 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 19 G3
MFP OPE PWB

nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 9 SD SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 13 PK PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
GND2 17 SD SD 16 GND2 B1 24 24 B1
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
8.5inch LCD UN
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 22 WH WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
MX-M503N OPERATION PANEL B – 1

LCD_DATA0- 26 WH WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029 UD/LR 36 36 UD/LR
PWRSW
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX) +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
+24V3 4
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
/SIZE_LED1 5
Service Manual
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
GND2 7 2 GND2 GND2 4
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Outline A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD
INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, and
the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and
to display the status. e
They are connected with the document detection light receiving
PWB for detection of the document size. They receive light from the g
document detection light emitting PWB attached to the rear frame
f c
side, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF con- a
trol signal of the DC power. b
The USB connector can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and the USB d
hub, sending the electronic data to the mother PWB.
Use of the keyboard in the lower section of the operation panel Parts
facilitates text inputs. a LCD INV PWB
b POWER SW PWB
c 8.5 MFP OPE PWB
d USB connector PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Disconnect four con-
nectors.
*1 *2
*3
*1
*4 *1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
*4: Disconnect the connector from the Mylar.

3) Remove the screw, remove the earth harness from the (3) LVDS PWB
machine, and turn the operation panel back. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
(1) LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/8.5 MFP OPE PWB 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
1) Remove the operation panel unit. wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the * When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB. LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the earth sheet and the 8.5 MFP OPE PWB.
(4) LCD module

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LVDS shield sheet.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
(2) USB connector PWB

2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove

the LCD unit.
5) Remove the LCD module.
5) Remove the touch panel.
(5) Touch panel

2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.

[C] DSPF SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Paper feed section
&52(&4+8'429$
%0$
52/# 52/#
82&A52/ 82&A52/
52/# 52/#
52/$ 52/$
82&A52/ 82&A52/
52/$ 52/$
%0'
82&544%
544% 5%18
82& 82& 82&
&52(A%0629$ )0&
82&59

0% 82&59 82&A59
%0 %0# 522&

)0& )0&

82&
522&
SPM
)0& )0&
82& 82& )0&
82& 82&
8 8
52(/%- 52(/%-
52(// 52(// SPPD2
52(// 52(//
52(/1 52(/1
52(/1 52(/1
52(/48 52(/48
52/# 52/#
52/# 52/# 2 SCOV
52/$ 52/$
52/$ 52/$
52/1 52/1
56/25 56/25
544% 544%
52(% 52(%
5%18
56/27

5%18
56/27
SPPD1
82& 82&
(#0A10 (#0A101((
(#0A.1%-
)0&

(#0A.1%-
)0&
SPED 1
)0& )0&
3
%0
8 82&
8 82& 522&
522& 522& 82&
522& 522& 522&
)0& )0& )0&
)0& )0&
8 52'&
52'& 8A52'& 52'&
)0& 52'& )0&
0% )0& 852'& SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
%0 52.5
8A52.5 82&52.5
52.5 52.5
)0& )0&
)0&
52.5 52.5
8A52.5 )0&
#8%% 52.5
5295 82&52.5
)0&
#8%% $. #8%%
5295 $4 5295
)0& ); )0&

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
MX-M503N DSPF SECTION C – 1

SPM
SPED
SCOV
SPWS
SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD2
SPPD1
Signal name
%0
)0& )0& )0&
)0& )0& 522&
SOCD
522& 522& 82&
51%& 51%&
8 82&
1
8 8A51%& 51%&
)0&
2
82&51%&
B. Transport section
%0(
Paper feed motor
52(/$ 52(/#
52(/# 82&A52(/
52(/$ 52(/#
Name
52(/# 52(/$
3
DSPF document sensor
82&A52(/ 82&A52(/
82&A52(/ 52(/$
DSPF paper pass sensor 2
DSPF paper pass sensor 1
%0'
DSPF document width sensor
82&544% 82&544%
544% 544%
%0%
82&52(%
0%
&52(A%0629$
DSPF document length sensor (long)
DSPF upper cover open/close sensor
52(%
0%
DSPF document length sensor (short)
4
0%
0%
)0& )0&
56/27 56/27
56/25 56/25
82&56/25 82&56/25
%0 %0#
)0& )0&
)0& )0&
82& 82&
SPPD3
Type
Micro switch
82& 82&
SRRC
Stepping motor
8 8
Volume resistor
52(/%- 52(/%-
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
52(// 52(//
52(// 52(//
52(/1 52(/1
52(/1 52(/1
52(/48 52(/48
52/# 52/#
52/# 52/#
SPFM
52/$ 52/$
SPPD5
52/$ 52/$
52/1 52/1
56/25 56/25
544% 544%
&52(&4+8'429$
52(% 52(%
5%18 5%18

56/27 56/27
82& 82&
(#0A10 (#0A101((
Detects pass of the paper.
Detects pass of the paper.
STMPS
(#0A.1%- (#0A.1%-
)0& )0&
)0& )0&
%0&
82&(#0 82&(#0
(#0A.1%- (#0A.1%-
)0& )0&
6
%0 %0
Drives the rollers in the paper feed section.
8 8
Detects open/close of the DSPF upper cover.
)0& )0&
#8 #8
)0& )0&
SPPD6 (SPOD)
Function/Operation
8 8
)0& )0&
Detects document empty in the DSPF paper feed tray.
%0
5
Detects the document width in the DSPF paper feed tray.
8
0%
Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
8
522&
0%
FAN
522& 82&
)0&
0% 522&
)0& )0&
)0&
522& )0&
8 522&
0%
0% 82&
1 Resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport 3 roller.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
5 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.
6 DSPF CIS unit Reads document images. (CIS PWB: CIS control, LED: Light source)

FAN Cooling fan motor DC motor Cools the CIS unit and the motor.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPPD3 DSPF paper pass sensor 3 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SPPD5 DSPF paper pass sensor 5 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SPPD6 (SPOD) DSPF paper exit sensor Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Document size detection B. Paper feed and transport operations
Size detection on the document tray (1) Single face scanning
The document width is detected by the document width sensor 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
below.
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray,
the maximum size is detected.
Document length sensor

Document size 2) Preliminary paper feed start (1st sheet)
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
B5 OFF OFF (The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON 3) Preliminary paper feed complete/Paper feed start (1st sheet)
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
4) Resist operation (1st sheet)
(Resist clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
SPWS
SPLS1 SPLS2
5) Scanning start (1st sheet)

6) Preliminary paper feed start (2nd sheet) 13) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
(When the SPPD1 detects the rear edge of the previous docu-
ment, the paper feed motor is booted.)
14) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
7) Preliminary paper feed complete (2nd sheet) roller.)
(2) Duplex scanning

8) Paper feed start (2nd sheet) 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (1st sheet)

9) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Resist operation (2nd sheet) Pick-up roller descending
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
3) Preliminary paper feed complete/Paper feed start (1st sheet)
10) Scanning start (2nd sheet)
4) Resist operation (1st sheet, front surface)
11) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
5) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
12) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

6) Preliminary paper feed start (2nd sheet) (3) Stamp operation
(When the SPPD1 detects the rear edge of the previous docu- 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
ment, the paper feed motor is booted.)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (1st sheet)

Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
7) Scanning start (1st sheet, back surface)/Preliminary paper
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
feed complete (2nd sheet)
3) Preliminary paper feed complete/Paper feed start (1st sheet)

8) Scanning complete (1st sheet, back surface)
The paper feed transport operation is the same as single-sur- 4) Resist operation (1st sheet)
face scanning. Since, however, the next page surface must be (Resist clutch ON)
scanned after scanning the back surface with the CIS, the next (When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
page is stopped temporarily at the resist roller section until the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
scanning of the back surface and the process on the MFP side
are completed.
Therefore, the paper interval becomes longer in duplex scan-
ning.
5) Scanning start (1st sheet)
10) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
11) Resist operation (2nd sheet, front surface)
7) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)
12) Scanning start (2nd sheet, front surface)
The same operations are performed hereinafter.

8) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd D. The original scan
sheet)
The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) unit is the contact type image
scan sensor, and is assembled to the DSPF to scan document
images. The LED light in the CIS unit is radiated to a document,
and the reflected light is passed through the lens to the photoelec-
tric conversion elements to form images. (Pixel: 7196 pixels, reso-
lution: 600dpi) The CIS and the CCD assembled in the lens unit
allow simultaneous scan of duplex surfaces of a document.

A. DSPF unit
a
g
e
10) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)
f
(Stamp solenoid ON) d
b
11) Paper exit start (2nd sheet) Parts

a DSPF CIS unit
b Cooling fan motor
c DSPF control PWB
d DSPF driver PWB
e Transport motor
f PS clutch
g Paper feed motor
12) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
earth wire. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the harness cover and the locking band.
13) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)
C. Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit,

and operating speed
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.
The document fed by the pickup roller is sent through the paper
feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan
start position are synchronized.
The document is transported to the scan section. After being
scanned, the document discharged to the document exit tray by the
paper exit roller.
The document transport speed depends on the resolution as
shown below.
Resolution Document transport speed

300dpi 346mm/sec.
400dpi 259mm/sec.
600dpi 173mm/sec.

4) Open the DSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and 3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
slide the DSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the DSPF unit.
4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the holder.
Remove the document tray.
(1) DSPF CIS unit

1) Open the paper feed unit.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the document tray lower and
the paper guide.
2) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions) of the

front cabinet by inserting a minus screwdriver under the base
tray, and remove the front cabinet.
6) Remove the step screw. Remove the DSPF CIS unit. Discon-
nect the connector.
NOTE: Never touch the light source and the lens of the DSPF CIS
unit.
NOTE: Install so that the round hole of the DSPF CIS unit is on the
rear side of the mark, and tighten the screws in the
sequence of the round hole and then the long hole.

(2) Cooling fan motor (5) Transport motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit. 1) Remove the document tray.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
cooling fan motor. Remove the screw, and remove the mount- wire saddle. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
ing plate from the cooling fan motor. remove the earth wire.
NOTE: Be careful of the extending position of the harness. Be
careful of the installing direction of the fan.
(3) DSPF control PWB 3) Remove the screw, and remove the transport unit.
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit.
2) Remove the cooling fan motor.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Remove the
snap band. Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and
remove the DSPF control PWB.
(4) DSPF driver PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit.
DSPF driver PWB.

4) Loose the screw, and loosen the belt tension to remove the (7) Paper feed motor
belt. Remove the screw, and remove the transport motor. 1) Remove the document tray.
Remove the harness from the transport motor.
2) Remove the transport unit.
NOTE: When ordering the DSPF motor as a service part, the har- 3) Remove the PS clutch.
ness is provided with the motor. Do not use this newly-pro-
4) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension to remove the
vided harness, but use the one which was originally
belt. Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame.
attached to the machine.
When replacement of the harness attached to the machine
is required, refer to the Parts Guide and order one.
5) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
Remove the harness from the paper feed motor.
NOTE: When ordering the DSPF motor as a service part, the har-
(6) PS clutch ness is provided with the motor. Do not use this newly-pro-
1) Remove the document tray. vided harness, but use the one which was originally
attached to the machine.
2) Remove the transport unit.
When replacement of the harness attached to the machine
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
is required, refer to the Parts Guide and order one.
NOTE: When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame. 70mm
30mm
Cable tie

[D] SCANNER SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
4
CLI
3
1
2
8
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
8
8
%0
%0

%0˴
˴
%0˴˴

.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
%.A10
219'4
.'&
.'&
/*25
)0&
)0&
)0&
8
80
8
8

0%
2
˴
%0˴

.'&&4+8'429$

%0
%0
%0

5%0%0629$
/+/A:#
/+/A:$
%.A10
219'4
/+/A#
/+/A$
/*25
)0&
80
)0&
)0&
8
4'5A%%&#&
#('A%56)
#('A5%.-
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4'
4&
4&
4%
4%
4$
4$
4#
4#
#8
#8
#8

%0
%0

4'5A%%&#&
#('A%56)
#('A5%.-
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4'
4&
4&
4%
4%
4$
4$
4#
#8
#8
#8
4#
4#
%%&29$
Signal Name Function/Operation

CLI LED lamp unit Illuminates the document.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 No. 1 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 2 mirror.
5 No. 2 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
MX-M503N SCANNER SECTION D – 1

A. Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB. R
(2) LED lamp drive G
The LED lamp (CLI) is driven by the LED lamp drive voltage gener- B
ated in the LED drive PWB according to the control signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(Image data for 1 line)
(3) Image scan/color separation
Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the contrast
of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of
RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). R G B
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, Red component Green component Blue component
image data image data image data
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B).
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue (4) Image signal A/D conversion
components. This operation is called the color separation. 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
elements, R, G, and B. Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- process section.
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and CCD PWB
reflected to the CCD. Analog IC
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
G
B
Buffer TG
R,G,B Color filter
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
3LINES CCD UNIT the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

3. Disassembly and assembly 7) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the harness from the wire saddle.
A. Scanner unit
f
b
d
a
c
e
Parts
a LED lamp
b LED drive PWB
c CCD unit 8) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
d Scanner motor
e Document detection light receiving PWB
f Document detection light emitting PWB

2) Remove the DSPF unit. [Refer to "[C] DSPF SECTION."]
3) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
4) Remove the operation panel unit. [Refer to "[B] OPERATION
PANEL."]
5) Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet right, the
upper cabinet left, and the rear cabinet.
6) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
the harness from the wire saddle.
(1) LED lamp/LED drive PWB

1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
C B

2) Move the LED lamp unit to the position where there are (2) CCD unit
notches in the frame. 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
C B

the LED lamp unit. Remove the LED lamp. Disconnect the
connector.
2) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and

remove the CCD unit.
(3) Scanner motor

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.

LED drive PWB.

(4) Document detection light receiving PWB
1) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.
(5) Document detection light emitting PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.

[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Manual paper feed section
CN9
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/CPFM_D 4 (NC) 3 FG-OUT
CPFM_CK 6 5 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 7 (NC) 7 CW/CCW
B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 4 /CPFM_CK
CN17 6 CPFM_LD
GND2 1 (NC)
GND2 2 (NC) CN4 CN1
ADUMHB 3 14 ADUMHB PFM24V 1 2 PFM24V
ADUMHA 4 25 ADUMHA PFM24V 2 5 PFM24V
ADUMHXB 5 16 ADUMHXB PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
ADUMHXA 6 23 ADUMHXA PFMB// 4 6 PFMB//
POMCNT 7 11 POMCNT PFMA// 5 4 PFMA//
ADUMHCNT 8 21 ADUMHCNT PFMA/ 6 1 PFMA/
POMB 9 17 POMB B06B-PASK-1
POMA 10 15 POMA
POMXB 11 19 POMXB
PCU PWB POMXA 12 13 POMXA
ADUMLB 13 26 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 14 22 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 15 24 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 16 20 ADUMLXA
CN10
8 /MPGS RRMCNT 17 1 RRMCNT MOTOR
(NC) 6 24V1B ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
DRIVER
7
5
/MPFS
24V1B
RRMB
RRMA
19
20
7
5
RRMB
RRMA PWB
PFM
4 /MPUC RRMXB 21 9 RRMXB
2 24V1B RRMXA 22 3 RRMXA
B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PFMB 23 10 PFMB
PFMA 24 8 PFMA
QR/P4-32P-C(01) / QR/P4-32S-C(02) CN6
PFMXB 25 12 PFMXB
1 5VN 1 1 5VN
PFMXA 26 6 PFMXA
2 SIN3 2 11 SIN3 (NC) (NC)
PFM2CNT 27 2 GND2
3 SELIN2 3 7 SELIN2
PFMCNT 28 4 PFMCNT
4 APPD1 4 12 APPD1 (NC)
PFM2B 29 B26B-PNDZS-1
5 MPFD 5 8 MPFD (NC)
PFM2A 30
6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD (NC)
PFM2XB 31
17 GND2 17 15 GND2 (NC)
PFM2XA 32
CN1 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1 (NC)
(nc) 33
5VN 1 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3 (NC)
(nc) 34
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
20
21
APPD2
POD3
20
21
14
10
APPD2
POD3
CPFM MPUC
APPD1 7 22 5VN 22 3 5VN
NC(APPD3) 9 28 /MPGS 28 20 5VN
MPFD 11 12 /MPFS 12 23 GND2
MPWD 13 13 24V1B 13 22 PCS
NC(HUD_M) 15 30 /MPUC 30 21 PCS_LED
GND2 2 31 24V1B 31 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
SELIN1 4
SELIN3 6 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
APPD2
POD3
8
10
1
2
24V1B
/MPUC
1
2
4
NC(FAX_D) 12 1
NC(TH_M) 14
5VN 16
S16B-PHDSS-B
5
MPFD MPFS
3
2
MPED MTOP1
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB
MPWD MTOP2
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC MPGS
8 24V1B 1
1
2
24V1B
/MPFS
1
2
MPLD
CN3 7 /MPFS 2
MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 3 5VLED7
5VLED11 12 3 5VLED11 6
MPFD 10 2 /MPGS 7
S32B-PHDSS-B 1 MPFD 8
PHNR-05-H/BU05P-TR-P-H/PHNR-05-H 1 24V1B 1
6 24V1B 6 5 24V1B 1 2 /MPGS 2
4 24V1B 4 4 /MPGS 2
2 24V1B 2 3 MPFD 3 1 MPFD
5 GND2 5 2 GND2 4 2 GND2
3 GND2 3 1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1 GND2 1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
9 (NC) 1
8 (NC) 2
H-41-RNHP/H-P-RT-P41UB/H-41-RNHP 7 (NC) 3 1 MPLD
CN3 14 (NC) 1 6 MPLD 4 2 GND2
MPLD 16 13 (NC) 2 5 GND2 5 3 5VLED12
NC(GND2) 17 12 MPLD 3 4 5VLED12 6
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 3 5VN 7 3 5VN
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 1 GND2 9 1 GND2
NC(GND2) 21 8 MTOP2 7
MTOP2 22 7 5VLED13 8
NC(GND2) 23 6 MTOP1 9
5VLED13 24 5 5VLED9 10 1 MTOP2
MTOP1 25 4 (NC) 11 2 GND2
NC(GND2) 26 3 (NC) 12 3 5VLED13
5VLED9 27 2 GND2 13
GND2 14 1 (NC) 14 1 MTOP1
5 (NC)
S32B-PHDSS-B 2 GND2
3 5VLED9
6
4
3
2
1
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
MX-M503N PAPER FEED SECTION E – 1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry.
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out position).
PFM Transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the
paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.

B. Tray paper feed section
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC CN9

1 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1 17 24V1B
2 /CPUC1 1 2 /CPUC1 2 18 /CPUC1
3 24V1B 3 19 24V1B
4 /CPUC2 4 20 /CPUC2
1 24V1B 2
2 /CPUC2 1
INT24V1 1
DF11-8DS-2C GND2 2
DF11-8DS-2C
FG-OUT 3 (NC)
+DF11-8DP-SP1 +DF11-8DP-SP1
/CPFM_D 5 1 INT24V1
CW/CCW 7 (NC) 2 GND2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPFM_CK 4 4 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 6 CPFM_CK
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H 7 CPFM_LD
GND2 3 1 24V1B 2 15 24V1B
CLUD1 2 2 /CPFC1 1 16 /CPFC1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VN 1 21 CLUM1
22 CLUM2
GND2 3 23 GND2
14 GND2 1
CPED1 2 24 GND2
13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 14 /CPFC2
12 5VN 3
13 24V1B
11 GND2 4
GND2 3 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
10 CPED1 5
CPFD1 2
9 5VN 6
5VN 1
8 GND2 7
7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3
6 5VN 9
DSW_C 2
5 GND2 10
5VN 1
4 DSW_C 11
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC 3 5VN 12
1 /CPFC2 1 2 /CPFC2 13
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 14
CPFC2 CPUC1
CPFM
PCU PWB
CLUD1 4
CPED1
CPFC1
2
1
3 DSW_C
10 CPUC2
9
CPFD1
CSS11 CLUM1 /CLUM1 2
CSS13 CSS12 GND2 1
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
CSS14 DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-24DES-2.5RC

1 5VN 1
CN5
1 5VN
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
5 CPFD1 5 3 CPFD1
GND2 3 20 CPFD2 20 4 CPFD2
3 CLUD1 3 5 CLUD1
CSPD1 CSPD1
5VN
2
1 18
4
CLUD2
CPED1
18
4
6
7
CLUD2
CPED1
19 CPED2 19 8 CPED2
GND2 3 8 CSPD1 8 9 CSPD1
CSPD2 2 17 CSPD2 17 10 CSPD2
5VN 1 6 DSW_C 6 11 DSW_C
7 /CPFC2 7
(NC) 1 21 24V1B 21
GND2 2 22 (NC) 22
CSS11 3 9 CSS11 9 15 CSS11
11 CSS12
CSS13
4
5
13
10
CSS21
CSS12
13
10
16
17
CSS21
CSS12
CSS14 6 14 CSS22 14 18 CSS22
11 CSS13 11 19 CSS13
15 CSS23 15 20 CSS23
12 CSS14 12 21 CSS14
16 CSS24 16 22 CSS24
CLUD2 (NC)
GND2
1
2
23
24
5VN
GND2
23
24
23
24
5VN
GND2
CPED2 CSS21
CSS22
3
4
CSS23 5
CSS24 6
6 PHNR-09-H / BU09P-TR-P-H / PHNR-09-H

5 GND2 3 9 GND2 1
CPFD2 CLUD2
5VN
2
1
8
7
CLUD2
5VN
2
3
7 8 6 GND2 4
GND2 3 5 CPED2 5
CPED2 2 4 5VN 6
12 5VN 1 3
2
GND2
CPFD2
7
8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CSS21 CPFD2 2
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VN 1
CSS23 CSS22
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
CSS24
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
SSJC6-4
CSPD2 CLUM2
11

CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit.
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 2 in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass.
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 The paper size of tray 2 is detected.
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.

4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to
the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
11 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
A. Bypass B. Tray paper feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, (1) Paper feed front operation
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
to the paper feed roller section.
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the • The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual stops at the specified position.
transport roller. (2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
• The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
• The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

A. Manual paper feed unit 2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
b
Parts
a Manual paper feed gate solenoid
b Paper pickup solenoid

3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl. 7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever. unit.
3
1
3
4 (1) Manual paper feed gate solenoid
5 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and

remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
(2) Paper pickup solenoid

6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
feed tray unit. 2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.

3) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive). 7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
1
2
2
1 1
8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
4) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
B. Tray paper feed unit

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
1 Parts
a Paper transport clutch 2
1) Remove the right cabinet front. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]

6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.

3) Remove the right lower door unit. C. Others
4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
Parts
a Paper size detection PWB
(1) Paper size detection PWB

5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.

paper size detection unit.
(1) Paper transport clutch 2

1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
cover. Remove the bearing, the belt and the clutch unit.
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper transport clutch 2. 3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
NOTE: When installing, engage the rotation-stopper of the clutch PWB.
with the frame. Remove the spring from the paper size detection PWB.

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
MOTOR DRIVER PWB

CN2
RRM24V 2 7 RRM24V
RRM24V 5 8 RRM24V
RRM RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB// 6 10 RRMB//
RRMA// 4 11 RRMA//
RRMA/ 1 12 RRMA/
PHR-6-R B12B-PASK-1
CN1
PFM24V 2 1 PFM24V
1
PFM24V 5 2 PFM24V
2 PFM PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
PFMB// 6 4 PFMB//
PFMA// 4 5 PFMA//
PFMA/ 1 6 PFMA/
PHR-6 B06B-PASK-1
PPD2
3 PCU PWB
179228-3 SMR-07V-N / SMP-07V-NC CN6
5VN 1 5 5VN 5 25 5VN
PPD2 2 6 PPD2 6 26 PPD2
GND1 3 7 GND2 7 24 GND2
1 5VN 1 2 5VN
PPD1 2 PPD1 2 4 PPD1
3 GND2 3 6 GND2
179228-3 4 (NC) 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VN 1
PPD1 2
GND2 3

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller
and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
PPD1 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
3 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-M503N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 1

Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller A. Resist roller unit
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch con- 1) Remove the photo-conductor unit. [Refer to "[H] PHOTO-CON-
trols ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
DUCTOR SECTION."]
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
2) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1. [Refer to "[E] PAPER FEED
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported SECTION."]
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the resist
3) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images
are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor. 4) Remove the ADU connection drive.

the resist roller unit.
MX-M503N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 2

[G] LSU SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
LSU PWB MOTHER PWB PCU PWB

CN2 CN2 CN3 CN1 (MOTHER)
GND2 1 GR GR 3 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
+3.3V 3 OR OR 1 +3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND1 2 GR GR 4 GND1 5VLD 3 3 5VLD
+24V3 4 RD RD 2 +24V3 5VLD 4 4 5VLD
+5VN 5 BL BL 5 +5VN GND2 5 5 GND2
GND2 6 GR GR 6 GND2 GND2 6 (NC) (NC) 6 (nc)
CN1 CN5 S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) RXD_PCU 7 7 PCU_RXD
+5VLD 2 BL BL 23 +5V_LD PCU_DSR 8 8 PCU_DSR
GND2 1 GY GY 24 GND2 CN3 TXD_PCU 9 9 PCU_TXD
GND2 3 GY GY 18 GND2 +5V_LD 1 22 +5V_LD PCU_DTR 10 10 PCU_DTR
nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1 GND2 2 GR GR 11 GND2 GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 GY GY 1 GND2 nSCK_LSU 4 BR BR 12 nSCK_LSU GND2 12 12 GND2
nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2 GND2 3 GR GR 10 GND2 nPOF 13 13 /POF
DT1- 14 WH WH 14 DT_K1- nTRANS_DAT 5 BR BR 9 nTRANS_DAT nPCU_TRG 14 14 nPCU_TRG
DT1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT_K1+ nRSV_DAT 6 PK BR 14 nRSV_DAT nFAX_LED 15 15 /FAX_LED
GND2 20 SD SD 12 GND2 JOBEND_INT 8 BR PK 13 JOBEND_INT PCU_RES 16 16 PCU_RES
GND2 6 SD SD 2 GND2 LSUASIC_RST 7 8 LSUASIC_RST GND2 17 17 GND2
DT2- 8 WH WH 8 DT_K2- nTRANS_RST 9 7 nTRANS_RST JOBEND_INT 19 19 JOBEND_INT
DT2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT_K2+ VSYNC_K_N 11 BR BR 18 LSU_VSYNC_K_N RSV_DAT 21 21 RSV_DAT
nLDERR 11 BR BR 11 nLDERR_K VSYNC_K_P 12 PK PK 17 LSU_VSYNC_K_P GND2 23 23 GND2
VREF_K1 9 BR BR 9 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K2_P 13 (NC) (NC) 16 (nc) TRANS_DAT 22 25 TRANS_DAT
VREF_K2 7 BR BR 7 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K2_N 14 (NC) (NC) 20 (nc) LSU_RST 18 26 LSU_RST
nENB_K 5 BR BR 5 nENB_K GND2 16 19 GND2 TRANS_RST 24 27 TRANS_RST
LDCHK2 17 BR BR 6 LD_CHK_2 nPCU_TRG 10 15 nPCU_TRG SCK 20 28 SCK
LDCHK1 18 BR BR 3 LD_CHK_1 GND2 15 (NC) (NC) 21 GND2 GND2 25 29 GND2
LDCHK3 19 BR BR 17 LD_CHK_3 S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) (NC) 23 GND2 GND2 26 30 GND2
GND2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 nLDERR_K2 (NC) 24 GND2 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 18 GND2
S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B24B-PHDSS-B 20 HUD_DV
22 TH_DV
CN4 CN4 24 +3.3V
CH0_N 1 WH WH 21 LSU_CH0_N B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CN1
GND2 GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2
GND2 4 GR GR 21
nBD GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2
BD 3 BR BR 19
GND2 CH1_N 5 WH WH 17 LSU_CH1_N
GND2 2 GR GR 22
+5VN CH1_P 6 PK PK 18 LSU_CH1_P
+5VN 1 BL BL 20
S4B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P
CN1 CN1
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK
GND2 16 7 GND2
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START
ECLK_LSU_N 17 WH WH 5 LSU_ECLK_N
GND1 4 4 GND1
ECLK_LSU_P 18 PK PK 6 LSU_ECLK_P
+24V3 5 5 +24V3
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S
HSYNC_LSU_P 21 PK PK 2 LSU_HSYNC_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 WH WH 1 LSU_HSYNC_N
SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC SLR-06VF / SLP-06V CN9

1 LSUCFM_V 1 1 LSUCFM_V 1 5 LSUCFM_V 5 4 LSUCFM_V 4 9 LSUCFM_V
4 LSUCFM_LD 4 2 LSUCFM_LD 2 6 LSUCFM_LD 6 3 LSUCFM_LD 3 8 LSUCFM_LD
2 /LSUCFM_CNT 2 3 /LSUCFM_CNT 3 7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7 6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6 10 /LSUCFM_CNT
3 GND2 3 4 GND2 4 8 GND2 8 5 GND2 5 11 GND2
PGM
8
1 5
2
4
3
7 6
LSUCFM

LSUCFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
MX-M503N LSU SECTION G – 1

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
4 f lens 2 that at the center.
5 Reflection mirror for BD Laser beams for BD are reflected to the BD PWB.
6 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
8 LSU PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB
control signal and image data.
2. Operational descriptions C. Outline of LSU specifications

A. Outline Effective scan width: 310mm
Resolution: 600/1200dpi
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 80µm, Sub scan = 60 to 90µm
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum.
Laser power: Max. 0.255mW
In this model, the 2-laser system is employed which radiates two LD wavelength: 780 to 800nm
laser beams. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system from
the laser to the polygon mirror and the scanning system of the opti-
cal elements including the polygon mirror.
B. Composition
NOTE: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
(Primary system)
A. LSU removal
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
LSU.
(Scanning system)
NOTE: Lift the LSU tip and insert it so that the LSU boss comes in
the frame hole. After insertion, remove the toner cartridge
and check.
(On the polygon motor)
Number of Rotating
Model Bearing Remarks
mirror surface speed
MX-M453/503 7 surfaces 45556rpm AIR
MX-M363 7 surfaces 35433rpm AIR
MX-M503N LSU SECTION G – 2

[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
OZFM
DM
PSPS
MC
3
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
5 INT24V1
GND2
1
2
1
2
INT24V1
GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
2 24V1B 2 17 24V1B
1 1 /PSPS 1 18 /PSPS
CN15
1 OZFM_V 1 21 OZFM_V
2 /OZFM_CNT 2 19 /OZFM_CNT
2 3
4
GND2
OZFM_LD
3
4
17
15
GND2
OZFM_LD
HV PWB CN3
RD CN1 20 /HV_CLK
MHV /HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
YL HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 GB /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1 DC PWB
TNBOX FW
CN7
1
GND1 2
TNF GND1 3 (NC) PCU PWB
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
5V_TNF 3
TNF 1
GND2 2 CN16
1 5V_TNF 1 10 5V_TNF 10 15 5V_TNF
2 TNF 2 11 TNF 11 17 TNF
3 GND2 3 12 GND2 12 19 GND2
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 13 5V_TNBOX 13 16 5V_TNBOX
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5 14 TNBOX 14 18 TNBOX
GND2 2 6 GND2 6 15 GND2 15 20 GND2

DM Drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
MC Main charger Charges the OPC drum surface.
OZFM Ozone fan Discharges ozone generated in the machine.
PSPS Separation solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.
TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.
MX-M503N PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION H – 1

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the toner collection box.
4 Ozone filter Removes ozone.
5 Waste toner collection box Collects waste toner.
2. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Main corona unit
Screen grid
TNBOX
TNF
High voltage unit
OPC drum
CTL
CGL
Waste toner detection is performed by two sensors (TNBOX,
Aluminum layer TNF).
The following four statuses of the waste toner box are detected
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The by the two sensors as shown below.
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid. Output level Sensor status
Pattern Status
TNBOX TNF TNBOX TNF
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
1 L H Transmitted Interrupted Waste toner
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. box not
provided
2 L L Transmitted Transmitted Waste toner
box provided
+ Not full
3 H L Interrupted Transmitted Waste toner
OPC drum OPC drum box provided
+ Near end
4 H H Interrupted Interrupted Waste toner
Laser beams box provided
+ Full
Aluminum layer
CGL
CTL
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on
the OPC drum surface.

3. Disassembly and assembly 6) Remove the blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and
hold the handle to remove the unit.
A. Photo-conductor unit
1) Open the front cover.
2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.
3) Remove the toner cartridge.

[Refer to "[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION."]
4) Remove the developing unit.
[Refer to "[J] DEVELOPING SECTION."]

[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
CN15
GND2 4 1 GND2 1 16 GND2
5VN 3 2 5VN 2 10 5VN
CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3 12 CRUM_CLK
CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4 14 CRUM_DATA
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
DM
PCU PWB
CRUM
TDSC
CN3
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1 3 24V1B
1 /TDSC 1 2 /TDSC 2 4 /TDSC

CRUM Crum PWB Stores various information of the toner cartridge.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.
MX-M503N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i – 1

The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the A. Toner cartridge
drum motor to supply toner to the developing unit. 1) Open the front cover.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF
by the toner supply clutch TDSC.
The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner
density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the
drum motor and the toner supply clutch TDSC are turned ON to
supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
When the toner density reaches the specified level, TDSC turns
OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit.
With the above process, the toner density in the developing unit is
maintained at a fixed level.
2) Pull and remove the toner cartridge slowly and horizontally.

NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and
inset it slowly.
MX-M503N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i – 2

[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
DM
TH_DV/
HUD_DV
FGOUT 3 (NC)
3 CW/CCW
INT24V1
7
1
(NC) CN14
1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
CN1
GND2 3 1 GND2 1 18 GND2
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2 20 HUD_DV
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3 22 TH_DV
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4 24 +3.3V
5 5
1 1
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7 PCU PWB
4 4
8 8
1 CN3
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 7 TSGout
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 8 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 9 TCS
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 10 24V1B
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 (NC) 11 5VN
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 12 DVCH1
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 (NC) 13 GND2
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
TCS HV PWB
(NC)
(NC)
18
19
reserve1-in
/DVBSREM
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
GR
HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 DVBS /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2

TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and humidity of the process section for process control.

1 Developing roller Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
MX-M503N DEVELOPING SECTION J – 1

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- A. Developing unit
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
NOTE: Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV
roller surface.
OPC drum
NOTE: Be careful not to hold the case adjacent to the developing
roller strongly.
1) Open the front cover.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias (negative).
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
When rotation of the OPC drum is started and stopped, some area
on the OPC drum is not charged negatively. To prevent toner from
attaching to that area, a positive voltage is applied to the drum.
OPC drum 3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
MX-M503N DEVELOPING SECTION J – 2

[K] TRANSFER SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
DM
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
HV PWB INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
BL GND2 2 2 GND2
PCS (NC)
1
2
DHV
(NC)
/DM_D
DM_LD
5
6
4
5
/DM_D
DM_LD
WH DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
THV
CN3
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
1 /HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
RDCFM HV_REM#
/HV_LD#
7
5
(NC)
23
24
/HV_REM#
/HV_LD
MHV-T 6 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB PCU PWB
2 GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
HV RESISTOR PWB 2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
CPWBF1593FCE2
FG FG CN6
20 5VN
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 (NC) 23 GND2
7 F-GND 7 7 5VN 7
PCS 2 2 PCS 2 (NC) (NC) 22 PCS
6 5VN 6 8 (NC) 8
PCS_LED 3 3 PCS_LED 3 21 PCS_LED
5 PCS 5 9 PCS 9
4 PCS_LED 4 10 PCS_LED 10 CN10
1 RDCFM_V 1 3 RDCFM_V 3 11 RDCFM_V 11 11 RDCFM_V
2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 26 GND2 26 15 GND2
3 RDCFM_LD 3 1 RDCFM_LD 1 27 RDCFM_LD 27 13 RDCFM_LD

DM Drum motor Drives the OPC drum, the developing unit, and the transfer unit.
PCS Image density sensor Detects the toner patch density on the OPC drum in process control.
RDCFM Suction fan Stabilizes paper transport.

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
2 Paper guide electrode Connected to the ground through a high resistor to maintain the paper guide at a proper potential, stabilizing the
transfer operation.
3 Separation charger Applies a high negative voltage to the paper which was charged positively in the transfer process in order to
discharge it.
MX-M503N TRANSFER SECTION K – 1

2. Operational descriptions C. Toner patch density detection in the process
control
A. Transfer operation
In the process control, the toner patch density on the OPC drum is
A positive high voltage is applied to the transfer roller to transfer the detected with the image density sensor.
toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
In addition, the sensitivity of the image density sensor is automati-
OPC drum cally performed by using reflection on the OPC drum surface.
OPC drum
Separation charger
Transfer roller
Toner patch
To PCU PWB
Transfer roller
Image density sensor
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current) A. Transfer unit
B. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning process, the polarity of the voltage applied to the
transfer roller is made negative, and unnecessary toner on the
transfer roller is sent to the OPC drum, cleaned with the cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section.
OPC drum
Separation charger
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
Transfer roller
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current)
MX-M503N TRANSFER SECTION K – 2

[L] FUSING SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
CN12
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC)
FUM
WEBM
WEB-END
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
1 N-HL(UW) 1
PCU PWB
1
6 TH_MY
TS_UM 4
3
TS_US
6 HL PWB
CN2
TH_US (NC)
1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(COM)
2 3
CN3
L-HL(COM)
1 L-HL(COM)
2 N-HL(UW)
3 N-HL(SUB)
1 L-HL(COM) 1 (Power) CN4 CN12
3
2
L-HL(COM)
L-HL(COM)
3
2 6 4
6
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(UW)
4
6
INT24V1
GND2
6
5
2
4
INT24V1
GND2
/HL_PR 1 6 /HL_PR
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW 2 1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
N-HL(SUB)
1
2 HLout_UM 2 8 HLout_UM
5 L-HL(COM) 5 HLout_US 4 10 HLout_US
3 (NC) 3 HLout_UW 3 14 HLout_UW
(Connector) CN16
1 GND2 1 B-9 GND2 B-1 1 GND2 1 5 GND2
2 TH_US_IN 2 B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 TH_US_IN 2 7 TH_US_IN
3 GND2 3 B-7 (NC) B-3 3 (NC) 3 (NC) 6 GND2
4 TH_MY_IN 4 B-6 (NC) B-4 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 8 TH_E_IN
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 GND2 5 9 GND2
B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 TH_MY_IN 6 10 TH_MY_IN
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 7 (NC) 7 (NC) 13 GND2
1 WEB-END 1 B-2 WEB-END B-8 8 WEB-END 8 11 WEB-END
2 GND2 2 B-1 GND2 B-9 9 GND2 9 12 GND2
CN14
1 WEB_M1out 1 18 WEBMAout 18 19 WEBMAout
2 WEB_M2out 2 19 WEBMBout 19 20 WEBMBout
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation

FUM_CK Fusing motor drive frequency [Brush-less motor] Changes the fusing section speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop [Brush-less motor] Drives the fusing section.
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up operation of the heater lamp.
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp control relay.
TH_MY_IN Main thermistor Detects the temperature.
TH_US_IN Sub thermistor Detects the temperature.
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end.
WEBM Web motor (Synchronous motor) Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.
MX-M503N FUSING SECTION L – 1

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
4 Cleaning roller Cleans the fusing roller (pressing).
5 Web roller Cleans the fusing roller (heating).
6 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (pressing).
7 Thermostat (Main) Shuts down the power to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally.
8 Thermostat (Sub) Shuts down the power to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally.
2. Operational descriptions C. Fusing operation

Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
A. Fusing unit drive roller.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
Driving by the drive motor (DC Brush-less motor) is performed
according to the control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
Fusing roller (Heating)

Fusing roller (Pressing)
The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three heater lamps,
which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper.
The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because of
the following reasons and purpose.
1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is
of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to
separate paper upward.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation.

D. Fusing temperature control F. Web end detection
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing roller The judgment of web end is made by the fusing web print counter
(heating). or the web life end detection, whichever is earlier.
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the The web life end detection is made when the WEB-END sensor ter-
heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at minal is conducted by making contact with the roller shaft on the
the specified level. web supply side.
When the web life end is detected, the warning display is made, but
E. Roller cleaning
the machine still continues the operation.
The upper fusing roller is cleaned by the web. The lower fusing
Warning display content: Maintenance required. Code: FK3
roller is cleaned by the cleaning roller.
When the web is replaced with a new one and the web counter is
1) Remaining toner on the upper fusing roller is cleaned by the
cleared, the warring display disappears.
web with silicon included.
The new web is not automatically detected.
The web unit is provided in the upper section of the upper fus-
ing roller, and is composed of the feeding section of the web
sheet, the winding section, and the backup roller which
pressed the web sheet onto the upper fusing roller.
2) Remaining toner on the lower fusing roller is attached to the
cleaning roller by the differences in the temperature, etc.
between the lower fusing roller and the cleaning roller.
WEB-END
Web roller
WEB-END

Cleaning roller A. Fusing unit
c
a
b
Fusing roller (Heating)
Fusing roller (Pressing)
Parts
a Thermostat (main)
b Thermostat (sub)
c Heater lamp

1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. (2) Heater lamp
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw, and

remove the fixing plate. Remove the heater lamp.
(1) Thermostat (main/sub)

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw,
and remove the terminal. Remove the screw and the washer,
and remove the thermostat.
NOTE: When fixing the thermostat and the harness, tighten the
screws at the following torque:
1.0 - 1.2 Nm
10 - 12 kgfcm
0.7 - 0.9 lbft

[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Duplex section
ADUMH
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
GND2
5VLED1
2
3
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
5
4
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
4
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
GND2 5 5 GND2 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 GND2
DSW_ADU 7 3 5VLED4
GND2 8 5
5VLED2
APPD1
9
10
1
2
DSW_ADU
GND2 POD3
GND2 11 3 5VLED2
5VLED5 12
1
2
APPD1
GND2
3
2
1
2
APPD1
GND2
TFD3
3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5
CN3
APPD2
GND2
4
5
1
2
APPD2
GND2
ADUGS
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10
1 24V1B 1 ADUML
2 /ADUGS 2
RIGHT DOOR CN10 3
I/F PWB 14
15
/ADUGS
24V1B
14
15
3
1
SGUDA/
B1V42
CN1 CN6
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
2
3
SIN3
SELIN2
2
3
11
7
SIN3
SELIN2
APPD1
APPD1
MPFD
7
11
4
5
APPD1
MPFD
4
5
12
8
APPD1
MPFD
DSW_ADU
MPWD 13 6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD
GND2 2 17 GND2 17 15 GND2
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1
SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 14 APPD2
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 10 POD3
5VN 16 22 5VN 22 3 5VN 1
PCU PWB
MOTOR DRIVER PWB
CN4 CN17
ADUMHB 14 3 ADUMHB
ADUMHA 25 4 ADUMHA
ADUMHXB 16 5 ADUMHXB
ADUMHXA 23 6 ADUMHXA
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT
11
21
7
8
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT 2
POMB 17 9 POMB
POMA 15 10 POMA
POMXB 19 11 POMXB
POMXA 13 12 POMXA
ADUMLB 26 13 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 22 14 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 24 15 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 20 16 ADUMLXA
RRMCNT 1 17 RRMCNT
ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
RRMB 7 19 RRMB
RRMA 5 20 RRMA
RRMXB 9 21 RRMXB
RRMXA 3 22 RRMXA
PFMB
PFMA
10
8
23
24
PFMB
PFMA
APPD2
PFMXB 12 25 PFMXB
PFMXA 6 26 PFMXA
GND2 2 (NC) (NC) 27 PFM2CNT
PFMCNT 4 28 PFMCNT
CN3
ADUML24V 1 2 ADUML24V
ADUML24V 2 5 ADUML24V
ADUMLB/ 3 3 ADUMLB/
ADUMLB// 4 6 ADUMLB//
ADUMLA// 5 4 ADUMLA//
ADUMLA/ 6 1 ADUMLA/
CN3
ADUMHA// 11 21 ADUMHA// 21 1 ADUMHA//
ADUMHA/ 12 22 ADUMHA/ 22 4 ADUMHA/
ADUMHB/ 9 23 ADUMHB/ 23 6 ADUMHB/
ADUMHB// 10 24 ADUMHB// 24 3 ADUMHB//
ADUMH24V 7 25 ADUMH24V 25 2 ADUMH24V
ADUMH24V 8 26 ADUMH24V 26 5 ADUMH24V
NC 13

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.
ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to the right tray.
5 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
MX-M503N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M – 1

B. Paper exit section
PCU PWB
CN14
12 24V1B_OSM
5 24V1B_OSM 5 1 24V1B_OSM 1 15 /OSMXB
1 /OSMXB 1 2 /OSMXB 2 16 /OSMXA
2 /OSMXA 2 3 /OSMXA 3 13 /OSMB
3 /OSMB 3 4 /OSMB 4 14 /OSMA
4 /OSMA 4 5 /OSMA 5 CN15
6 POFM1_V 6 23 POFM1_V
7 /POFM1_CNT 7 25 /POFM1_CNT
4 POFM1_LD 4 8 POFM1_LD 8 27 POFM1_LD
3 GND2 3 9 POFM2_LD 9 28 POFM2_LD
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 10 (NC) 10 (NC) 2 GND2
1 POFM1_V 1 11 GND2 11 29 GND2
12 5VN 12 7 5VN
13 TFD2 13 3 TFD2
4 POFM2_LD 4 14 POD2 14 4 POD2
3 GND2 3 15 HPOS 15 5 HPOS
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 16 POD1 16 6 POD1
1 POFM1_V 1 17 GND2 17 1 GND2
TFD2 5VN
TFD2
3
2
HPOS GND2 1
5VN 1
POD2 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
HPOS 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
POD1 2
GND2 3
OSM
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC) 1
(NC) 7
(NC) 4
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
#
#
#
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
POFM_1
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
POFM_3 3 GND2 3 18 GND2
1 2
1
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
2
1
20
22
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
POD2 MOTOR DRIVER PWB

CN2
POM POMA//
POM24V
1
2
7
8
POMA//
POM24V
7
8
5
1
POMA//
POM24V
POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 4 POMB//
POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 6 POMA/
POM24V 5 11 POM24V 11 2 POM24V
POD1 POMB/ 6 12 POMB/ 12 3 POMB/
POFM_2

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing after detection fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_1 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_2 Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_3 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.

2. Operational descriptions 1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
A. Duplex
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
• By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position. 2) Remove the right door unit.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
charged to the right tray.

A. Right door unit (1) RD I/F PWB
2) Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
Parts
a RD I/F PWB 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
b Manual paper feed clutch
c ADU gate solenoid

(2) Manual paper feed clutch 5) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
(3) ADU gate solenoid

2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU gate solenoid

unit.
4) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-
Remove the ADU gate solenoid.
nector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.

B. Paper exit unit 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit cooling
fan motor.
e * When installing, be sure to note the fan direction.
a
a b
c f
(2) Shifter motor

1) Remove the paper exit unit.
Parts
a Paper exit cooling fan motor 2) Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
b Shifter motor Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
c Fusing web cleaning motor the connectors and remove the snap band.
d Fusing drive motor
e Paper exit drive motor
f ADU motor upper
1) Remove the upper cabinet right and the right connecting cabi-
A
net. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the fusing unit. [Refer to "[L] FUSING SECTION."]
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.
B
(1) Paper exit cooling fan motor

3) Remove the shifter motor unit. Remove the gear.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.

4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor. (5) Paper exit drive motor/ADU motor upper
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
(3) Fusing web cleaning motor

2) Remove the exhaust fan duct. B
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing web cleaning motor.
B A
* Be careful to install the motors in the proper direction.

* When installing, attach the belt as shown below.
(4) Fusing drive motor

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing drive motor.

C. Others
Parts
a ADU motor lower
(1) ADU motor lower

2) Remove the screw, and open the control box.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.

[N] DRIVE SECTION
MX-M503N 4) Disconnect
Service the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
Manual
main drive unit.

A. Main drive unit
a
d
Parts
a Drum motor
b Resist motor
c Toner supply clutch
d Separation solenoid
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
(1) Drum motor
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
drum motor.
3) Remove the flywheel. (2) Resist motor

* After installing, check to confirm that the flywheel is not in 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
contact with the harness. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
resist motor.
MX-M503N DRIVE SECTION N – 1

(3) Toner supply clutch B. Paper feed drive unit
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear. Disconnect the a
connector, remove the E-ring, and remove the toner supply
clutch.
d
e b
c
f
Parts
a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Paper transport clutch
(4) Separation solenoid 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 2) Open the control box.
2) Remove the main drive unit. 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive
3) Remove the E-ring and the screw, and remove the separation unit.
solenoid.

(1) Transport motor 4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
the transport motor.
(4) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/

Paper feed tray 2)/Paper transport clutch
2) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
(2) Paper feed motor
3) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
the paper feed motor.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
(3) Paper tray lift-up motor

the paper tray lift-up motor unit.

5) Remove the paper feed clutch unit. 8) Remove the gear, and remove the paper transport clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process. * When installing, be careful of wiring process.
9) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper transport clutch 1.
6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
7) Remove the belt.

[O] PWB SECTION
MX-M503N A. ControlManual
Service box

(Countermeasures against static electricity)
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
h
b
a g
e
i
f
c
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag

(case), use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the Parts
machine. a DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
b DIMM memory PWB (512MB)
c PROG1 ROM PWB
d PROG2 ROM PWB
e MFP cnt PWB
f HDD
g PCU Flash ROM PWB
h PCU PWB
i Mother PWB
(1) DIMM memory PWB (1GB/512MB)/PROG1 ROM

PWB/PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

procedure on an anti-static mat.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-M503N PWB SECTION O – 1

* Inserting position an inserting procedure when the DIMM * Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
memory is removed Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM3
DIMM1
DIMM2 * Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM1: Option (200 pin)

DIMM2: 1GB (200 pin) a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
DIMM3: 512MB (144 pin) the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
3) Push Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock holding * When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
the memory PWB. sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
A A
b) Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the

bottom.
4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out.
* Be careful not to tilt left and right.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* The gold plated section must be completely seated
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB. inside slot.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]

c) Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper (2) HDD
clicks. 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
* Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
of the lock hole. 2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the HDD unit.
A A
B B
5) Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
A B

the MFP cnt PWB.
(3) PCU Flash ROM PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.

2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. B. Power unit
Parts
a AC power PWB
(4) PCU PWB
b DC power PWB
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. (1) AC power PWB
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
the PCU PWB. 2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector,
and remove the AC power PWB.
(5) Mother PWB

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw of the MFP
PWB and the mother PWB. Remove the mother PWB.
(2) DC power PWB
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and the AC cord unit and dis-
connect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.

3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove 3) Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit.
the DC power PWB. Disconnect the connector.
C. Others 4) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.
a
b
c
d e
Parts
a SCN Flash ROM PWB (2) HL PWB
b Scanner control PWB
c HL PWB
d Motor drive PWB 2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
e HV PWB (High voltage PWB) the HL PWB.
(1) SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB

2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
2
1

(3) Motor drive PWB 4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, earth wire and
1) Remove the rear cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] the plate, and remove the PCU PWB.

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the HV PWB.
the motor drive PWB.
(4) HV PWB (High voltage PWB)

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the left cabinet rear lower. [Refer
to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
3) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the plate,
and remove the control box.

6) Note for assembly of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
When inserting the connector into the high voltage output ter-
minal of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB), check to confirm
that the connector is securely inserted into the high voltage
output terminal as shown in the photo below.
If the high voltage output terminal is on the outside of the con-
nector, it is NG.
NG NG
The clearance
must be about 1mm.
OK
The clearance
must be about 2mm.
OK
NG NG

[P] FAN SECTION
MX-M503N 3) Disconnect
Service the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
Manual
the harness from the wire saddle.
Remove the screw, and remove the control box.
A. Fan motor
a
e
f
d
c
b
4) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector and remove
the screw, and remove the duct.
Parts
a Ozone fan
b Power cooling fan 1
c Power cooling fan 2
d MFP PWB cooling fan
e Paper exit cooling fan 3
f LSU cooling fan
(1) Ozone fan

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the upper cabinet rear cover.
5) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover. Disconnect the

connector, remove the screw, and remove the ozone fan.
* When installing, arrange so that the fan label (A) faces out-
side.
MX-M503N FAN SECTION P – 1

(2) Power cooling fan 1 4) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan 2.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
2) Remove the screw, and remove the clamp. Disconnect the harness (B) facing upward.
connector and remove the screw, and remove the power cool-
ing fan 1.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
C B
A
A
(3) Power cooling fan 2

1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] (4) MFP PWB cooling fan
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector, 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
and remove the AC power PWB unit. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
3) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove

the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.

the MFP PWB cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.

(5) Paper exit cooling fan 3
1) Remove the paper exit unit. [Refer to "[M] DUPLEX/PAPER
EXIT SECTION."]
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the paper exit cooling fan 3.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
(6) LSU cooling fan

1) Remove the left cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
wire saddle.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the

wire saddle.
* When installing, arrange so that the fan label (A) faces
inside.

[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
MX-M503N (3) Right door
Service open/close switch
Manual
1. Disassembly and assembly 2) Remove the resist roller unit. [Refer to "[F] PAPER TRANS-
A. Sensor/Switch PORT SECTION."]
c b
a
Parts
a Main switch 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
b Front door open/close switch the right door open/close switch cover unit.
c Right door open/close switch
(1) Main switch

1) Remove the front cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, disengage the pawl, and remove the main switch.
* Attach the main switch and the harness so that they are fit
with the marks on the back surface of the mounting plate.
5) Remove the right door open/close switch.
ON
W B Harness color
Switch position W W
Connector color
R R
OFF
(2) Front door open/close switch

1) Remove the front cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close
switch unit.
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the front door open/close switch.
MX-M503N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q – 1

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT ©
solder is about 220°C, which
XXXX is about 40°C higher
BYSHARP than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 March Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

MXM363N-M453N-M503N SM GB

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MXM363N-M453N-M503N SM GB

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TopPage

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [A] EXTERIOR

[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING [L] FUSING SECTION

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

Paper exit system

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

Printer expansion Image send expansion

PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT

XPS EXPANSION KIT

SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

STD: Standard provision. : Installable. —: Cannot be connected.

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

1. Supply system table

D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)

2. Maintenance parts list

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M363N/M453N/M503N)

3. Definition the developer/drum life end 36/45/50-sheet machine

Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm 100,000

Developer/drum 200K 930K rotations

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 2

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 3

1. Identification of each section and functions

When a finisher / saddle stitch

When a finisher is installed

(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)

When a saddle stitch finisher is (11)

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

No. Name Function/Operation

B. Internal operation parts

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 2

When the fax expansion kit is installed

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 3

JOB STATUS PRINT

(7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 4

No. Name Function/Operation

(2) Sensors and Switches

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 5

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 6

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 7

5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel- 0+95,'6(77,1$1'287387

If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the reference $˖

toner density control value is not completed normally. ˷̚˹

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$

'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$

)˖ ˖(;32685(̚,)$̚̚67$1'$5'',7+(5

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$

'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$

(;(&87( 2. *˖ ˖3$3(5&6